KIP 3000 SERVICE MANUAL Version E.2December 28, 2006 This service manual includes the basic information about the KIP 3000 Multi-Function Printer, which is required when you during field service to maintain the products quality and reliability. Chapter 1IntroductionOverview(Features, specifications, name of parts andetc.) Chapter 2InstallationInstallation requirements, method of installation, connection with PC & printer Chapter 3Print / Scan Processexplanation for the steps of the print andscan process Chapter 4ElectricalCircuit diagrams, image process system,electric parts location and etc. Chapter 5Mechanical Parts replacement and mechanicaldisassembly Chapter 6MaintenanceField maintenance information Chapter 7Troubleshooting Problem resolution Chapter 8Service Mode and Utility SoftwareService Mode settings, Diagnosis and etc. Chapter 9AppendixGeneral Circuit Diagram Some of the information included in this manual may be changed by product upgrades. Such information will be informed to you through Technical Bulletins or Engineering Change Orders. Read this service manual and these TBs / ECOs to understand the KIP 3000 correctly, and you will be able to maintain the product quality for a long period of time. All sections of the document are subject to change without notice. Chapter 1 Introduction page 1. 1 Features1-2 1. 2 Specifications1-3 1. 2. 1 General1-3 1. 2. 2 Printer part1-4 1. 2. 3 Scanner part1-5 1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1-6 1. 3. 1 Original - Standard1-6 1. 3. 2 Special Documents1-6 1. 3. 3 Do Not Scan Originals1-6 1. 4 Appearance1-7 1. 4. 1 Front1-7 1. 4. 2 Rear1-8 1. 5 Specifications for the Scan Original1-9 1. 6 Specifications for the Printing Paper1-12 1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use1-12 1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody1-13 1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition1-14 K105sm1e1_USC 1-11. 1Features The KIP 3000 is a single footprint Multi-Function Printer which can copy, scan and print.Advanced drivers and comprehensive print utilities make the KIP 3000 an advanced, easy to use system. (some functions may be optional) The scan and print speeds are up to 60mm/sec or up to 4 landscape D prints/minute. KIP HDP technology generates no waste toner. The combination of the KIP HDP Plus imaging system with mono-component minute toner produces high definition lines, distinctive greyscale and consistent blacks. The maximum paper width is 36 (914mm) wide, and the minimum is 11 (279mm). The maximum paper length is 11.8 (3.6m, with 36 paper) or, and the minimum is 8.5 (210mm). Up to 600dpi print and scan resolutions, with an advanced Image Process System, produces the highest quality images. Copier Features Easy Touch screen control panel Collated Sets copying Real-time image preview Recall/reprint previous jobs 600x600DPI copy quality Integrated Accounting and Reports for all copying, network printing, scanning Network ready copier Simple Operator assistance for every day tasks (toner replacement procedure) Image stamping All hardware/software included for instant upgrade from Digital Copier to Network Printer to Scan-to-File system. Information center displays all support information, meter readings, and serial number. Network Printer Features (Optional) Standard TCP/IP connectivity Direct support for vector file formats:HPGL1/2, HP-RTL, Calcomp 906/907 KIP 3000 DWF format support Direct support for raster file formats: TIF Group 3/4, Cals Group 4, Uncompressed Grayscale/Color TIF,Optional KIP 3000 PDF format support: PS/PDF file format. Standard Windows Driver for KIP Script (PS output) and KIP-GL (HPGL/2,RTL output) Standard AutoCAD Drivers Unlimited site license of KIP Request allows users to group supported formats together for printing collated sets. Integrated Accounting in all KIP Drivers/Request for all network printing. Integrated KIP 3000 Web Printing (web server) Open architecture ASCII Job Ticket for third party applications Scan-to-File Features Scan directly to PDF, TIF Group 4, Cals Group 4 Scan to file to FTP or personal inbox on the KIP 3000 Selected resolution up to 600 DPI optical Automatic original size recognition Retrieve scanned image files with KIP Request K105sm1e1_USC 1-21. 2 Specifications 1. 2. 1 General SubjectSpecification ModelKIP 3000 ConfigurationConsole Maximum power consumption 1500W (Including Scanner & IPS) Acoustic noiseIdling Max. 52db PrintingMax. 60db Impulse sound Max. 65db OzoneMax. 0.1ppm (Measurement method under UL Standard) Dimensions50 (W) x 24 (D) x 44 (H) 1266mmx 600mm x 1100mm (Operation Panel is not included in these dimensions) Weight210 kg (1 roll) 217 kg (2 roll) (weights are estimated) Environmental condition for usage Temperature: 10 to 32 Centigrade or 50 to 86 Fahrenheit Humidity: 20 to 85% RH InterfaceNetwork Interface (10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX) Input powerIn U.S.A. : 120V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 10AIn Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 6A NOTE The above specifications are subject to change without notice. K105sm1e1_USC 1-31. 2. 2. Printer part SubjectSpecification ModelKIP 3000 ConfigurationConsole Single Footprint Printing methodLED Array Electro-Photography PhotoreceptorOrganic Photoconductive Drum Print speed60mm per second (Inch)2 Eor 4 D Landscape / minute (Metric) 2 A0 / minute Print headLED Array Calibrated Resolution600dpi x 600dpi Print widthMaximum 36 (914mm) Minimum11 (279mm) Print lengthMaximum Plain paper 3.6m or 11.8 (36) 3 times as long as each standard size(other sizes) Tracing paper Twice as long as each standard size FilmEach standard size Minimum 210mm or 8.5 Warm up timeLess than 4 minutes (23oC or 74F at 60% RH, with the rated voltage, and bond media) First print time24 seconds (D Landscape) 32 seconds (E) Fusing methodHeat - Pressure Rollers Development methodDry, non-magnetic mono-component toner Media Plain Paper64 to 80g/m2 - US Bond (20lbs) Tracing PaperUS Vellum (20lbs) Film4 MIL Recommend media for electro-photography process Storage of consumablesStore toner from 0 to 35 C (32 to 95 F) and within the humidity range from 10 to 85% RH. NOTE It is possible to make a longer print than the above shown maximum lengths (24 meters in maximum). But we will not guarantee the image quality or reliability of paper feeding if the page is longer than the above maximum lengths. NOTE The above specifications are subject to change without notice. K105sm1e1_USC 1-41. 2. 3 Scanner part SubjectSpecification Scanning methodContact Image Sensor (CIS) (5 A4) Light sourceLED (R/G/B) Scanning speed65mm per second Setting of originalFace up Starting point of scanCenter Scan widthMax. : 36 (914.4mm) Min.: 11 (275.0mm) Scan lengthMax. : 3.6m(Including the margin area) Min.: 11 (210mm, including the margin area) Margin area3mm from leading edge and trailing edge 3mm on both left and right Optical resolution600dpi Digital resolution600, 400, 300, 200, 100dpi Original transportationSheet through type Transportable original thickness Max. : 0.65mm Min.: 0.05mm NOTE It is possible to scan a longer original than 0.65mm (1.6mm in maximum). But we will not guarantee the image quality or reliability of original feeding if the original is thicker than 0.65mm. NOTE The above specifications are subject to change without notice. K105sm1e1_USC 1-51. 3 Specifications for Originals 1. 3. 1 Original Standards (1)The width of original must range from 11 to 36 (275.0mm to 914.4mm). (2)The length of original must range 8.5 (210mm) to 25,000mm (3)The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.65mm. (4)The shape of original must be square, and it must be standard sized. (5)The type of original must belong to any of the followings. Plain paper Coated paper (High or middle class plain paper is coated with the paint.) Tracing paper Pansy Trace Paper (Both sides of the film is sandwiched between Tracing paper.) Film Newspaper Cardboard paper 1. 3. 2 Special Documents The following kinds of originals are special. It is possible to scan them, but the image quality and feed reliability are not guaranteed. (1)The type of original is acceptable, but the thickness and type may not be: Booklets Original with a Hanger Cut and Pasted originals (2)These original may not damage the scanner, but these types are NOT recommended:following ones. Cloth Aluminium Kent Paper 1. 3. 3 Do Not Scan Originals It is impossible to use the following types of originals because they are likely to damage the scanner. (1)Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage) (2)Slippery originals which is difficult to transport (3)Irregularly shaped originals (Not square in shape) (4)Extremely curled originals (Diameter of curl is less than 50mm) (5)Extremely creased originals (6)Torn originals K105sm1e1_USC 1-61. 4 Appearance 1. 4. 1 Front 2 3 456 8 9 10 13 7 1112 1 No.NameFunction 1Main SwitchYou can turn on/off the KIP 3000. 2Original GuidesFeed the original under the Scanner Unit along the Original Guides. 3User InterfaceThis is a Touch Screen, and many kinds of user operation are available. 4Emergent Stop ButtonPress this button when you would like to stop copying or scanning emergently. 5Original TrayThese trays catch the original ejected from the Scanner Unit. 6Scanner UnitRead the original with this unit when you make scan or copy. 7Toner Hatch (Original Table) Open the Toner Hatch when you replace the Toner Cartridge.Also put the original here and then feed it into the Scanner Unit when you make scan or copy. 8Engine Unit Open LeverPull up these levers when you open the Engine Unit. 9Bypass FeederFeed a cut sheet paper from the Bypass Feeder. 10Roll DeckRoll paper can be set here. (You can set 1 roll paper normally, but 2 roll paper are available if you install the optional 2nd Roll Deck.) 11Print TrayPrints are stacked here after the ejection. 12Sub User InterfaceService Mode operations are available. 13CounterIt counts the total amount printing. K105sm1e1_USC 1-71. 4. 2 Rear 1 2 7 3 6 4 5 No.NameFunction 1Exit CoverOpen the Exit Cover when you remove the paper misfed inside the Fuser Unit. 2LAN PortConnect the LAN Cable to connect the KIP3000 to the network. 3Dehumidify Heater Switch (Optional in U. S. A.) Turn on the Dehumidify Heater with this switch when you would like to dry the paper in the humid season. 4BreakerIt is possible to shut off supplying the AC power. 5Inlet SocketConnect the Power Cord here. 6Print Guide TraysThese trays guide the prints to the Print Tray. 7COM Port (Optional)Connect the cable from the Optional Device. (D-Sub Connector 9 pins: +/-12VDC in maximum) K105sm1e1_USC 1-81. 5 Specifications for the Scan Original A scan original must satisfy the following specifications. Thickness0.05mm to 0.6mm Width11 to 36 (279.4mm to 914.4mm) Length8.5 (210mm) to 3,600mm Do not scan the following kinds of original, because you may damage the original or scanner itself! Sticked with paste Torn Folded (Leading edge) Excessively curled (a diameter of 50 mm or less) Paste K105sm1e1_USC 1-9 Not square Wet Metal or fabric material Rough surface(Carbon paper for example) Clipped or stapled K I P K I P Wet K I P K I P Metal Fabric Rough surface ClippedStapled K I P K I P K105sm1e1_USC 1-10The following kinds of originals can be read with using a carrier sheet. Image quality or the reliability of paper feeding for them is not guaranteed. Patched Punched K105sm1e1_USC 1-111. 6 Specifications for the Printing Paper 1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use Do not use the following kinds of printing paper because you may damage the print engine! Excessively curled (a diameter of 50 mm or less) Folded Creased Torn Punched K105sm1e1_USC 1-12 Extremely slippery Extremely stickyExtremely thin and soft Extremely slippery OHP Film CAUTION Do not use the paper with staple, or do not use such conductive paper as aluminium foil and carbon paper. Such paper may become cause for the fire. NOTE (1)Print image may become light if printed on a paper of rough surface. (2)Print image may become defective if the print paper is much curled. (3)It will become a cause for paper mis-feed, defective print image or crease of paper if youuse a paper that does not satisfy the specification. (4)Do not use a paper of which surface is very special, such as thermal paper, art paper, aluminium foil, carbon paper and conductive paper. (5)Tracing paper exposed to air over a long period tends to defective printing. Removing one round on the surface of the tracing roll paper from the beginning is recommended. 1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody Keep the paper in the custody taking care of the following matters. 1.Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight. 2.Keep the paper away from high humidity. (It must be less than 70%) 3.Put the paper on a flat place 4.If you will keep the paper in the custody, which you have already unpacked, put it into the polyethylene bag to avoid the humidity. K105sm1e1_USC 1-131. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition Humidity(%) Possible problemNecessary treatment Void of image, crease of paper and other problems occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper. 1.Install the humidifier in the room, and humidify the room air. 2.Remove the paper from the machine right after the completion of print, and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Void of image occurs when you print with tracing paper. If you will not make print soon, remove the tracing paper from the machine and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Remove the paper from the machine after everyday use, and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Void of image occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper. If you will not make print soon, remove the tracing paper from the machine and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Low 40% 70% High Void of image, crease of paper and other problems occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper. 1.Turn on the Dehumidify Heater.(if installed) 2.Remove the paper from the machine right after the completion of print, and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Crease of paperNormal Print Loss of image If the media is humidified ; If the media is humidified ; Normal Print NOTE (1) KIP 3000 is equipped with the Dehumidify Heater (optional in U.S.A.) Using it in high humidity environment (65% or higher) is recommended. (2)Void of image and crease of paper will occur in case of extremely high or low humidity. K105sm1e1_USC 1-14K105sm2e1_USC 2-1 Chapter 2 Installation page 2. 1 Installation Requirements2-2 2. 2 Unpacking 2-3 2. 2. 1 Unpacking2-3 2. 2. 2 Confirmation of accessories2-6 2. 3 Leveling the KIP 30002-12 2. 4 Setup of Roll Deck2-16 2. 5 Setup of the Machine Unit2-17 2. 6 Installation of Accessories2-43 2. 7 Turning on the KIP 30002-49 2. 8 Initializing the KIP 3000 Scanner2-51 The machine had passed our strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and then it was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to make the machine work at customers site as same as it has passed our strict inspection before shipment. A service engineer has to understand machines function very well. Install the machine in a good environmental place in a correct way, and then check that it works perfectly. K105sm2e1_USC 2-22. 1 Installation Requirements The following conditions are required for the installation of the equipment. 1. Power source should be rated as: In U.S.A120V +6% or -10%, 50/60Hz, 15A or higher 2. The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit. 3. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. 1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet. 2. The outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Site Environmental ConditionsTemperature Range 10 C to 30 C 50 F to 86 F Humidity Range 20% to 85% RH. (NON CONDENSING) Keep the printer away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators. 1. The installation site must not have any open flames, dust or ammonia gases. 2. The equipment must not be exposed to the air vents from heating/cooling systems. 3. The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. Please draw curtains to block any sunlight. When you open the printer (Upper Half), do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to strong (intense) light as this will damage the Drum. Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is within all safe levels. (see certifications) Ventilate the room, if so required. Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation. (Refer to the following figure.) The floor must be level and the strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the equipment. KIP 3000 45cm/18 or wider 45cm/18 or wider (Front) (Rear) 60cm/24or larger when the standard tray is installed 80cm/32 or larger K105sm2e1_USC 2-32. 2 Unpacking 2. 2. 1 Unpacking 1.Cut the bands (1) and remove the top board (2). 2.Remove the outer cardboard box (3). Please note that installation toner anda Software Box will be included in the crate.The Software box has the Software CD andother important installation notes anddocuments OPEN THIS BOX FIRST DO NOT DISCARD THIS BOX 3.Remove the inner cardboard cases (4). 1234K105sm2e1_USC 2-4 4.Open the front face (5) of the bottom board. Remove the wrapped machine (6) with a forklift, and move it to the installation place. 5.Unwrap the machine. 6.Put aside each accessory box (7), Start Up Kit (8) and empty Drum Box (9).DO NOT DISCARD THESE ITEMS. Remove the scanner protection box (10) and the protection papers (11) around the machine. 5 610 1197 8 10 11K105sm2e1_USC 2-5 7.Put aside one more accessory box (12) under the Roll Deck. DO NOT DISCARD IT. Remove the padding (13) on Roll Deck Handle. Remove the tapes (14) on both sides. 8.Open the Scanner Unit and remove the protection mat (15). Put aside Shading Sheet (16) and Calibration Sheet (17: for machines after S/N 10510001) under the protection mat (15), which will be used on the scanner adjustment. DO NOT DISCARD THE SHEET(S). HANDLE WITH GREAT CARE. KEEP THE SHEET(S) IN SAFE COSTODY FOR AVOIDING DIRT, FOLD OR TEAR. 9.Put aside the Power Cord (18) which is on thebottom plate of machine. 18 13 1214 14 1516 15 17 K105sm2e1_USC 2-62. 2. 2 Confirmation of accessories Confirm the following parts are attached to the product. Some parts may slightly vary in quantity or shape according to time of manufacture. Item namePictureNumber of article Tray4 (3) Drum Box ( empty )1 Guide 32 Tray 2 Assembly2 K105sm2e1_USC 2-7 Item namePictureNumber of article Guide 42 3x8 Bind Screws (for Tray 2 Assembly & Guide 2) 3x6 Bind Screws (for Cover 3) 4 4 Org. Guide 1 & 21 1 Power Cord1 K105sm2e1_USC 2-8 Item namePictureNumber of article Monitor Assembly1 Arm Assembly1 Cover 31 Plate 22 K105sm2e1_USC 2-9 Item namePictureNumber of article Arm2 Arm 32 Arm 42 Plate 5 Assembly 2 K105sm2e1_USC 2-10 Item namePictureNumber of article Shading Sheet1 Calibration Sheet (for machines after S/N 10510001) 1 Starting Toner (500g)1 Toner Cartridge (300g)2 K105sm2e1_USC 2-11 Item namePictureNumber of article 4x10 Bind Screws 4x8 Tooth Washer Screws 4 4 Setup Procedure1 User CD (Operator Manual) 1 Developer Handle1 K105sm2e1_USC 2-122. 3 Leveling the KIP 3000 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine. 2.Remove the screws (2) at both sides. 3.Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides. 1 2 23 3K105sm2e1_USC 2-13 4.Remove 5 screws (4) at the back on both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). 6.Close the Engine Unit. 4 45 6 K105sm2e1_USC 2-14 7.Rotate 4 Levelling Bolts (7) on the bottom of the KIP 3000 with a wrench to bring up theKIP 3000 from the floor. Keep 85mm of distance between the bottom plate and the floor.(It is about 80mm before theadjustment.) NOTE Do not rotate the Levelling Bolts too much. If the distance between the bottom plate and the floor becomes wider than 95mm, the Adjuster Bolt may be removed. 785mmK105sm2e1_USC 2-15 8.Put a level (8) on the specified positions shown to check the level of the KIP 3000. If not leveled, adjust by rotating the Adjustment Bolts. Front Rear Right Left 8888K105sm2e1_USC 2-162. 4 Setup of the Roll Deck 1.Open the Roll Deck (1). 2.Remove the tape (2) that fixes the Spool Assemblies. Left side Right side 3.Remove the tape (3) at the center, which fixesthe Guide Plate. 4.Close the Roll Deck. 122 32. 5 Setup of the Machine Unit 1.Pull up on the Levers (1) to open the Engine. 1 2.Carefully remove the protection mat (2) under the Drum. 2 3.Open the Toner Cover 4 (3). 3 K105sm2e2_USC 2-17 4.Remove the screws (4) and flat washers (5) to release the Bands (6) at both sides. 6 456 5.Rotate up the Pins (7) and move them to the inside to pull them out from the holes. Remove the Toner Cover 4 (3). 7 3 K105sm2e2_USC 2-18101198 6.Open the Bypass Feeder (8). 7.Remove 4 pieces of screw (9). 9 8.Open the Developer Press Unit (10). 9.Disconnect the connector (11). K105sm2e2_USC 2-1910. Remove 2 pieces of red screw (12) at both sides of the Developer Unit, which protect theDeveloper Unit from vibration during transportation. (They are no longer required.) 11. Holding both side plates firmly, slide theDeveloper Unit (13) out of the machine. 121312 12. On the right (electrode plate side) of the unit, remove the red screw with tag (14). (This red screw will not to be reused.) 14 K105sm2e2_USC 2-2013. Loosen 2 screws (15) which fix Bracket 5. 15 14. Completely press down and hold the Bracket 5 (16), and tighten the screws (15). (The Regulation Roller is pressed onto the Developer Roller.) 161515 K105sm2e2_USC 2-21 NOTE (1)The Regulation Roller (17) is not pressurized during the transportation not to damage the Developer Roller (18), but it must be pressurized by pressing down the Bracket 5 (16)before using the machine. If you do not do it, too dark image will be printed out. (2)Make sure to fix the right side (electrode plate side) of the Regulation Roller first thenthe left side (gear side). The pressure of Regulation Roller will be unbalanced between left and right if you do notfollow this order. 17 18 15.On the left (gear side), loosen 2 screws (19) which fixes the Bracket 4. And also loosen the screw (20) which fixes the Bracket 6. 19 1920 K105sm2e2_USC 2-2216.Completely press down and hold the Bracket 4 (21), tighten the screws (19). NOTE (1)The Regulation Roller (17) is not pressurized during the transportation not to damage the Developer Roller (18), but it must be pressurized by pressing down the Bracket 5 (16)before using the machine. If you do not do it, too dark image will be printed out. (2)Make sure to fix the right side (electrode plate side) of the Regulation Roller first thenthe left side (gear side). The pressure of Regulation Roller will be unbalanced between left and right if you do notfollow this order. 2119 1917 18 K105sm2e2_USC 2-2317. Tighten the screw (20) to fix the Bracket 6 (22). (It is unnecessary to press down the Bracket 4 at this point of time.) 20 22 NOTE Note that Bracket 6 (22) on the left is fixed with the screw (20) although the Bracket 7 (23) on the right is not fixed. The Regulation Roller can press the Developer Roller with an even pressure with this state. Fixed Not fixed 2322 20 18.Remove the Gear Package (24) on the Hopper and carefully unpack it. You will find a Collar (25), a Parallel Pin (26), a Gear Helical (27) and a Retaining Ring-E (28). 24 2827 26 25 K105sm2e2_USC 2-2419. Set the Collar (25) onto the shaft of Regulation Roller. Install the Parallel Pin (26) to the shaft. 25 26 25 NOTE Be careful of the direction of the Collar (25). Install it as shown. K105sm2e2_USC 2-2520. Install the Gear Helical 20T (27) to the shaft, and fix it with the Retaining Ring-E (28). 27 28 NOTE (1) Press the Gear Helical 20T (27) to the arrowdirection. (you may rotate the DeveloperRoller Shaft with the Developer Handle (29)to easily install the Gear Helical 20T.) (2) Do not rotate the Developer Roller when the Gear Helical 20T (27) is not installed tothe shaft of Regulation Roller! The Seal 3 or the Seal 4 (30) inside of the Developer Unit will be broken if you do so. 30 30 2927 K105sm2e2_USC 2-26K105sm2e3_USC 2-2721. Remove 3 screws (31) to remove the front Cover (32). 22. Disconnect the connector (33). 23. Remove 4 screws (34). 31 32 32 3334 34 K105sm2e3_USC 2-2824. Remove the Hopper Assembly (35). 25. Remove the Separator (36). 26. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (37) well, andadd the toner to the Developer Unit. (Please even out the toner in the developmentunit.) 36 373635K105sm2e3_USC 2-2927. Insert the Developer Handle (29) to the shaft of Roller Developer, and rotate the RollerDeveloper several times so that its surface is covered with the toner. Developer Handle P/N: Z050320050 2929 NOTE Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller If the pressure of Regulation Roller is weak, the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Developer Roller in the above procedure 27. Pressurize the Regulation Roller in the correct way as shown below in this case. (You will not be able to pressurize it successfully by the usual way of pressurization.) (1)On the right side (Electrode Plate side) ofthe unit, press and hold the Bracket 5 (16) tothe arrow direction completely, and fix it withthe screws (15). (2)On the left side of the unit (gear side), confirm that the Bracket 4 (21) is fixed with thescrews (19) being completely pressedto the arrow direction. Also confirm that the screw (20) is loosened and the Gear Helical 20T (27) isinstalled. 16 151521 19 192027K105sm2e3_USC 2-30 NOTE Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller (3)Fully press down and hold the top of the Bracket 4 (21). With holding, rotate the Developer Roller twice with the Developer Handle (29). Check that the toner layer on the Developer Roller gets thinner. (4) Remove both the Retaining Ring-E (28) and the Gear Helical 20T (27). (5) Tighten the screw (20) to fix theBracket 6 (22). 212927 & 2827282022K105sm2e3_USC 2-31 28. Replace the Separator Plate (36). NOTE Be careful of the direction of Separator (36). Do not install it in the wrong direction. 36 36 NOTE Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller (6) Reinstall the Gear Helical 20T (27) and the Retaining Ring-E (28). 27 2827 & 28K105sm2e3_USC 2-3229. Replace the Hopper Assembly (35) and Cover (32). 30. The process unit and toner cover should be open. The Photoconductive Drum is covered witha black sheet (38). Gently pull and remove it. 35 NOTE Do not install the Developer Unit at this time, as it must be removed when you setup the Drum in the later procedure. 32 38 38K105sm2e4_USC 2-3331. Install the Developer Unit (13) 32. Close and fix the Developer Press Unit (10), and put back the Cover 4 (3). NOTE Both the Gear Helical 34T (39) on machine side and the Gear Helical 28T (40) on Developer Unit side must be in gear firmly with each other. But they may not be in gear with each other if you just install the Developer Unit to the machine. To make sure, rotate the Gear Helical 34T (39) by hand from under the Engine Unit. Both gears will be in gear by this treatment. 1310 339 4039K105sm2e4_USC 2-3433. Close the Engine Unit. 34. Both the LED Head and the Image Corona are locked with the screws (41) being separatedfrom the Drum, not to be damaged during the transportation.Loosen the screws (41) to unlockthe Fixing Brackets (42) at both sides.Pressing down the Fixing Brackets (42) firmly, tightenthe screws (41). 41 4142 42 NOTE Please satisfy the following requirements before performing Step 34. (1)The black sheet has been removed from the Drum. (See the former procedure 30.) (2)The Engine Unit is closed firmly. (See the former procedure 33.) Otherwise a proper distance can not be kept between LED Head and Drum. K105sm2e4_USC 2-3535. Fit the Arm Assembly (43) to the bracket of Monitor Assembly (44), with 4 - 4 x 6 screw (45). 434445 45K105sm2e4_USC 2-3636. Connect the VGA Cable (46), Power Supply Cable (47) and USB Cable (48) to the Monitor. 37. Install the Cover 3 (50) to the Arm Assembly with 4 pieces of 3x6 screw (51). 46474850 5151 NOTE Make sure that both Power Supply Cable andUSB Cable are under the Core (49) of theVGA Cable to avoid any electrostatic issues. Power Supply Cable and USB Cable 49 K105sm2e4_USC 2-3738. Remove 4 screws (52), loosen 4 screws (53), and remove the Cover 15 (54). 39. Disconnect the connector (55), remove 5 screws (56), and remove the Case 5 (57). 40. Put a 4x8 tooth washer screw (58) to the screwhole as the photo. (Do not tighten it.) Also remove the Bushing (59) from the right sideplate. 52 53 54 5556 56 57 5859K105sm2e4_USC 2-3841. Hold the harness with the Bushing (59), and fit it to the Side Plate. 59 59 K105sm2e4_USC 2-3942. Fit the screw hole (60) of the Arm Assembly to the tooth washer screw (58) you have put instep 40. 43. Fix the Arm with 4 - 4x8 tooth washerscrew (58). 5858605858 58 K105sm2e4_USC 2-4044. Insert the harnesses (61) into the machine through the hole (62).Bundle the harnesses withthe Wire Saddles (63). 45. Connect the Power Supply Cable (47) to the connector (64) of the DC Power Supply. Hold the Power Supply Cable (47) with the Wire Saddles (65) at this time. 47 6461626365 NOTE (1)As the USB Cable (48) is a little long, curve it outside of the Side Plate, and bundle it with the Wire Saddle (63). (It is not recommended to curve it inside ofthe Side Plate, because there are manycables inside of the Side Plate so it willbecome very complicating if you do so.) (2)There are 2 kinds of cable inside of themachine. One is the internal cable such as USB Cable,VGA Cable and Power Supply Cable. And another is the external one such asLAN Cable and Folder Cable (Option). These 2 kinds of cable must not be bundledwith the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem may occur. Therefore bundle the internal cables only withthe Wire Saddles at this time. (The blue cable is the LAN Cable, so do notbundle it.) 48LAN Cable63K105sm2e4_USC 2-4146. Connect the VGA Cable (46) and USB Cable (48) to the concerning terminal of Controller PC. Hold these cables with the Wire Saddles (66). NOTE There are 2 kinds of cable inside of the machine. One is the internal cable such as USB Cable, VGA Cable and Power Supply Cable. And another is the external one such as LAN Cable and Folder Cable (Option). These 2 kinds of cable must not be bundled with the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem may occur if these cables are mixed. Take care of the following matters. (1)There are 2 Wire Saddles on each PC Cover. Bundle the internal cables with the frontone (66) of them. Note that the rear one (67) is for the external cable. (2)Between the Wire Saddle (66) and the terminal of each cable, bundle each VGA Cable,Power Supply Cable and external cable together with the same Wire Saddle (68). But do not bundle the USB Cables (69 : for both scanner and UI) together at this time,because the USB Cable is the great cause for a noise issue. 4648 68 69 66 6666 67K105sm2e4_USC 2-4247. Replace the Case 5 (57). 48. Replace the Cover 15 (54), Cover 3 (70) and Cover 2 (71). 55 707157K105sm2e5_USC 2-432. 6 Installation of Accessories 1.Fit 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1) to the notches (2) on the Cover 10. 2.Fit the Guide 1 & 2 (3) to the Cover 4. 2 1 3K105sm2e5_USC 2-443.Loosen 4 screws (4), fit the Plate 2 (5) to the screws (4), and tighten the screws (4). 4.Install 2 pieces of Arm (6). 4 5 6654K105sm2e5_USC 2-45 5.Install Arm 3 (7) and Arm 4 (8). NOTE (1)Insert all Arm 3 (7) and Arm 4 (8) as the following photos.(Be careful of the direction of insertion.) (2)Direct the flat end of each Arm 3 (7) and Arm 4 (8) to the bottom. Prints will not be stuck satisfactory when they installed upside down. 7 8 Flat endK105sm2e5_USC 2-46 6.Remove 2 screws (9). 7.Attach 2 Plate 5 Assembly (10) with 4x6 Bind Screws (9) you have removed at step 6. NOTE Fit the positioning bosses on Plate 5 Assembly to the positioning holes on machine side at this time. 9 10 10boss 9 10 K105sm2e5_USC 2-47 8.Fit 4 pieces of Tray (11) to the notches on the rear of the machine. 9.Fit the Guides 4 (12) to the Tray 2 Assemblies (13). NOTE Insert the tip plate (14) of the Guide 4 (12) intothe slit (15) of the Tray 2 Assembly (13). 14 15 notch 11 12 1313 K105sm2e5_USC 2-4810. Put Tray 2 Assemblies (13) onto the slide rails (16) on the bottom. Fix them with 2 screws (M3x8) (17). 17 NOTE Change the position of Tray 2 Assemblies (13) according to the format of printing paper. ISO (A/B)Architecture Engineering Pull out completelyAlign with the marking line. Push in completely 131716 17K105sm2e5_USC 2-492. 7 Turning on the KIP 3000 1.Plug the KIP 3000 into a dedicated wall outlet. 2.There is a Power Switch on the right side of KIP 3000. Press it to the I side to turn on the KIP 3000. Power Switch Press this side. WARNING (1)Do not handle the Power Plug with wet hands, or you may receive an electrical shock. (2)Make sure to ground the machine for safety. (3)Do not plug the printer into a multi-wiring connector in which other devices areplugged. It may overheat the outlet and may result in a fire. (4)The outlet must satisfy the following conditions. In U.S.A. : 120V, plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz and 15A K105sm2e5_USC 2-503.The User Interface (UI) starts operating, and it indicates the following Copy Mode Screen in about 1 minute. There is a Ready Indicator on the Copy Mode Screen, which flashes during warming up. Ready Indicator 4.The Ready Indicator lights green when the KIP 3000 is ready. Set media type / width and thenmake a test copy. K105sm2e5_USC 2-512. 8Initializing the KIP 3000 Scanner After the setup, the KIP 3000 scanner requires initialization. This provides a clearer and more accurate scan image. Follow the below outline to initialize the KIP 3000 scanner with Scanner Utility. 1. Install USB driver and Scanner Utility. See [8.12.1 Installation] on page 8-172. 2. Perform Shading. See [8.12.4.1 Shading] on page 8-181. 3. Perform Calibration. See [8.12.4.2 Calibration] on page 8-187. (Only for machines after S/N 10510001) K105sm3e1_USC 3-1 Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process Page 3. 1 Print Process 3-2 3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner3-2 3. 1. 2 Each step of the print process3-3 3. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)3-5 3. 2. 2 Charge of Drum3-6 3. 2. 3 Exposure3-7 3. 2. 4 Development 3-8 3. 2. 5 Transfer3-10 3. 2. 6 Separation3-11 3. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)3-12 3. 2. 8 Fusing3-13 3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit3-14 3. 1. 4 Control of Toner Supply Roller Bias3-17 3. 1. 5 Toner Collection Process 3-20 3. 2 Scan Process 3-23 3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy3-23 3. 2. 2 Positioning process of Image Block3-24 K105sm3e1_USC 3-23. 1 Print Process 3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner The toner used for KIP 3000 has a characteristic to be charged negative, which tends to be attracted to a more positive object. Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows. 1.Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A. 2.Toner exists on the object A. Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively positive and the object A is negative. (In another word, object B is more positive than the object A.)As the toner is negative, it is attracted to the object B that is more positive. If you move the object B close to the object A, therefore, the toner moves onto the object B. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) Toner moves from A to B. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher than the object A. Even if you move the object A close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) Toner stays on B. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place with a higher potential. If we control the electric potentials, it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as we intend, or it is also possible to remove the toner from an unwanted place. KIP 3000 controls the electric potentials properly working each part as Drum, Corona Units, Lamps, Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller.The movement of toner is controlled correctly and several processes as Development, Toner Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed. ABABAB ABABAB K105sm3e1_USC 3-33. 1. 2 Each step of print process One cycle of print consists of the following 8 processes. 1.Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 2.Charge of Drum 3.Exposure 4.Development 5.Transfer 6.Separation 7.Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) 8.Fusing Image Corona LED Head Cleaning Roller Eraser Lamp Regulation Roller Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller Transfer Corona Pressure Roller Fuser Roller Grid Plate Separation Corona & Separation Lamp NOTE The figures of Developer Units side view in this chapter are shown with a brush type Developer Unit unless otherwise indicated. K105sm3e1_USC 3-4Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials. The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner. Surface Potential of Drum SP1 : For black image / SP2 : For white image Name of partVoltage (Current) during Print CycleVoltage during Toner Collection Process Image Corona Wire -1.3mA +/-0.02mA Grid Plate-620V +/-30V Developer Roller-230V +/-5V+350V +/-5V Regulation Roller (Center) -40V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias-40V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias Regulation Roller (Both sides) 0V (Connected to the ground)0V (Connected to the ground) Toner Supply Roller * (A) Same voltage with Developer Roller Bias or (B) -150 +/-5V against Developer Roller Bias (on printing) -50+/-5V against Developer Roller Bias (Interval of print) (A) Same voltage with Developer Roller Bias or (B) -150 +/-5V against Developer Roller Bias (on printing) -50+/-5V against Developer Roller Bias (Interval of print) Transfer Corona+500V +/-30V- Separation CoronaAC (5.0KV) + DC (-250V +/-5V)- Cleaning Roller+450V +/-5V-550V +/-5V * (A) for brush type Developer Unit, (B) for sponge type Developer Unit 0V- 100V- 200V- 300V- 400V- 500V- 600V- 700V+400V+300V+200V+100V+500V2345671+600VSP1SP2+700V1 When the printer is going to stop after printing, or when the used Roll Deck is changed with other one, the KIP 3000 Digital Printer will take the Toner Collection Process to remove the remained toner and place back into the Developer Unit. Refer to [3.1.5Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-20 for the detail. Reference Voltage ofCleaning Roller Voltage ofTransfer Corona Voltage ofDeveloper Roller K105sm3e1_USC 3-53. 1. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) As the first step of print cycle, it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the Drum, which have remained there after the former print cycle. The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light. So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp. The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V (residual potential) by this process. 0V0V0V Eraser Lamp Drum Negative electriccharges K105sm3e1_USC 3-63. 1. 2 .2 Charge of Drum The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum. The surface of Drum becomes about -620V evenly as a result, which corresponds to the white area of the printed image pattern. The Grid Plate is also connected to the High Voltage Power Supply individually. Current and Voltage supplied to the Image Corona Wire is as follows. Corona Wire-1.3mA +/-0.02mA 0V0V620V620V Corona Wire Drum Grid Plate Image Corona K105sm3e1_USC 3-73. 1. 2. 3 Exposure According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws the light (740nm) onto some part of Drum which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern.As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light, this part of Drum surface loses the charges and its potential becomes about -20V. (This potential is not constant but is variable by the environment.) The other part of Drum surface, which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head, keeps-620V of potential which the Image Corona has given. An invisible electric image pattern that consists of -620V area and the -20V area is formed on the surface of Drum as a result. (This is called Electrostatic Latent Image.) (Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure) 0V620V0V620V20V20V LED Head Drum Even if the toner remains on the Drum, it will not block the light from the LED Head as the diameter of toner (9 micrometers) is much smaller than that (42 micrometers) of 1 pixel of LED. The electric charges on the Drum are removed as needed. Reference -20V -620VK105sm3e1_USC 3-83. 1. 2. 4 Development The Developer Roller, which is evenly covered with the toner, is contacted to the Drum because the Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum. (The width of contact point is about 5mm.) The Developer Roller is supplied with -230V (+/-5V) during the print cycle. And both -620V area and -20V area exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has been formed in the former Exposure process. Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-230V), the -20V area on the Drum is relatively positive. So the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -20V area of Drum. On the other hand, the -620V area is relatively negative seen from the Developer Roller.So the toner does not move to the -620V area but stays on the Developer Roller. A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result. Developer Roller Drum Developer Roller Drum Before Development After Development : Toner movesonly to -20V area. (Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image)(Visible toner image) 620V20V20V230V -20V-620V K105sm3e1_USC 3-9Even if some toner has not been removed by the Cleaning Roller but remained on the -620V area of Drum (It corresponds to the white area of the print) in the later [3.1.2.7Drum Cleaning], this toner is removed at the time of Development because it moves to the Developer Roller of which potential (-230V) is higher than that of Drum (-620V). So there will be no case that unnecessary black spot is printed on the white area of the print. The remained toner that moved to the Developer Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then reused. 1.Toner remained on the Drum 2.Toner moves from the Drum to the Developer Roller. 3.Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller 4.Toner is shifted to the inside of the Developer Unit by the revolution of Toner Supply Roller. 5.Toner is reused. Before DevelopmentAfter Development (Toner is remaining on the white area.)(Toner is removed from the white area.) The Developer Unit has not only the Developer Roller but also 2 more rollers inside which are also supplied with the individual voltages. The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, and covers the Developer Roller with the toner in the end. Refer to [3.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] to know how the Developer Unit controls the movement. Reference -20V-620V12345 K105sm3e1_USC 3-103. 1. 2. 5 Transfer The printing paper is charged positively as the Transfer Corona discharges positive electric charges from under the paper. The toner existing on the -20V area on the Drum will move to the printing paper because the potential of the paper comes to be higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process. The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows. Transfer Corona Wire : +500 +/-30V (When the Insulated Drum is used.) Printing paper Transfer Corona Positive electric charges 20V20V20V K105sm3e1_USC 3-113. 1. 2. 6 Separation The printing paper is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer because the potential of paper is positive and that of Drum is negative. It is necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the paper from the Drum by removing the static force between them. The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC voltage. AC voltage : 5.0KV DC voltage : -250V As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are generated more than positive ones, which mainly results in removing the positive charges of the printing paper. On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Corona Wires to remove the negative charges of the Drum. The static force between the printing paper and the Drum is reduced as a result, and the paper is separated from the Drum by its weight. Negative charges of the Drum are removed by the light from the Separation Lamp. Drum Separation CoronaPositive charges of the paper are removed by the AC discharge. Separation Lamp 20V620V K105sm3e1_USC 3-123. 1. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) Some amount of toner that has not been transferred onto the printing paper is remaining on the Drum. This remained toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller. The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V (+/-5V), and there are some negative electric charges on the Drum at this time. As the Cleaning Roller is relatively positive and the Drum is negative, the toner moves from the Drum to the Cleaning Roller. 450V NOTE If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller may not be able to remove all of them. But this toner is removed from the Drum in the Development Process. Refer to the page 3-9 for the detail. Drum Remained toner Cleaning Roller Negative electric charges K105sm3e1_USC 3-133. 1. 2. 8 Fusing After Transfer / Separation Processes, the printing paper is transported to the Fuser Unit by the Inner Transport Unit. The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller.The Fuser Roller is very hot, and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller by the spring. The toner is firmly fused onto the printing paper by the heat and the pressure when the paper passes through between these rollers. Pressure Roller Fuser Roller Inner Transport UnitK105sm3e1_USC 3-143. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit There are 3 kinds of rollers called Developer Roller, Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller in the Developer Unit. Each roller is supplied with its own voltage. In the following list, the voltage of the Developer Roller (-230V) is measured against the ground. The other voltages mean the difference against the voltage of Developer Roller Bias. Name of rollerSupplied voltage Developer Roller-230V +/-5V against the ground Regulation Roller (Center)-40V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias Regulation Roller (Both sides)0V (Connected to the ground) (brush type) Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias (Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller are short circuited being connected with the plate.) Toner Supply Roller (sponge type) -150V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias (On printing) -50V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias (Interval of print) Regulation Roller : Both sides InsulatorRegulation Roller : Center (0V : Connected to GND)(-40V against the Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller (-230V against GND) Toner Supply Roller (Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias) OR (-150V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias [On printing]) (Or -50V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias [Interval of print]) NOTE The Regulation Roller is divided into central area and both side areas by the insulator, and individual voltage is supplied to each area. K105sm3e1_USC 3-15Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner iscontrolled in the Developer Unit as follows. 1.The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller. 2.The voltage of the Toner Supply Roller is 150V lower than that of Developer Roller. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto theDeveloper Roller. Then the Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller. 3.The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by the spring, and these2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point. Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required, the Regulation Roller limitsthe amount of toner that can pass through between 2 rollers. So very small amount of tonercan pass through between rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside. As the voltage of Developer Roller is 40V higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), thetoner which has passed through between rollers is firmly attracted to the Developer Roller. Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result. 4.Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside. This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller. Scraper Regulation Roller : Center (-40V against the Developer Roller Bias) Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller (Same voltage with the Developer Roller) (-230V against GND) OR (-150V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias [On printing]) (Or -50V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias [Interval of print]) 1 234 K105sm3e1_USC 3-16 5.The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 0V as these parts are connected to theground. It is higher than that of Developer Roller (-230V). When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto theRegulation Roller. The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, so it ispossible to avoid the toner drops into the machine from the side. Regulation Roller : Both Sides (0V : Connected to GND) Developer Roller (-230V against GND) Regulation Roller : Center (-40V against Developer Roller voltage) Toner area Regulation Roller : Both sides Non-toner area (0V : Connected to GND) Developer Roller (-250V against GND) 5 K105sm3e1_USC 3-173. 1. 4 Control of Toner Supply Roller Bias (This section is applied to sponge type Developer Unit only.) In the Print Cycle, the Toner Supply Roller Bias is switched between high and low according to the situation. It is low when on printing, and it is high when interval of print. The actual voltage in each situation is as follows. On printing (Low)-150 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias Interval of print (High)-50 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias The purpose to switch the Toner Supply Roller Bias is to avoid the deterioration of toner. [Technical explanation] The toner on the Developer Roller is not transferred onto the Drum surface if this area of Drum surface is either white image area or interval of print (paper). This toner is returned to the Developer Unit. Then in the next occasion this toner is transported by the Developer Roller for the development, but it may be returned again by the same reason. The toner is deteriorated in the end if this go and return cycle is repeated many times, which will result in a defective image. This toner is returned to the Developer Unit as it was not transferred onto the Drum. K105sm3e1_USC 3-18As the cause for the deterioration is repeating go and return cycle many times, it is possible to avoid the deterioration if the Developer Roller transports only few amount of toner when in the term no toner is required at all. This term is in short, interval of print. Of course the Developer Roller must supply enough toner to the Drum when in the term the toner is required, in short on printing. So the Toner Supply Roller Bias is controlled as follows to satisfy the above requirements. 1.The Developer Roller must supply enough toner to the Drum when the situation is on printing (paper exists under the Drum). So the Toner Supply Roller Bias becomes -150V against the Developer Roller Bias. As the difference of voltage between 2 rollers is big (150V), much amount of toner is transferred from on the Toner Supply Roller onto the Developer Roller. As a result the Developer Roller can transport enough toner for the development. Much toner is transferred 150V PaperPaper Paper Developer Roller transports enough toner. Toner SupplyRoller Bias Developer Roller Bias -250V 0V Paper K105sm3e1_USC 3-192.It is preferable for avoiding the deterioration of toner not to transport so much toner when the situation is interval of print (paper does not exist under the Drum). So the Toner Supply Roller Bias becomes -50V against the Developer Roller Bias. Because the difference of voltage between 2 rollers is small (50V), only few amount of toner is transferred from on the Toner Supply Roller to the Developer Roller. As a result the Developer Roller transports only few amount of toner, which means much amount of toner can be prevented from go and return cycle that is the cause of deterioration. Only few toner is transferred 50V PaperPaper Paper Developer Roller transports only few toner. Toner SupplyRoller Bias Developer Roller Bias -250V 0V Paper K105sm3e1_USC 3-203. 1. 5 Toner collection process As explained in [3.1.2.7Drum Cleaning] on the page 3-12, the Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V to remove the remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle. This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3 cases. (1)When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and then going to stop. (2)When the used roll paper is ended and changed with another one. (3)When the used roll paper is changed from one to another because the print size specified in the job is different. This process to return the toner is called Toner Collection Process. When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the printer will take the Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions. 1.The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges fromthe Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V. 2.The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -550V in the Toner CollectionProcess. As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller, toner on the CleaningRoller moves onto the Drum. 550V0V0V0V Remained toner Cleaning Roller Drum K105sm3e1_USC 3-21 3.The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-5V) in the TonerCollection Process. As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drummoves onto the Developer Roller. Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the TonerSupply Roller. Remained Toner Developer Roller 350V0V0V0V Drum K105sm3e1_USC 3-22 Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows. Regulation Roller : Both sides Regulation Roller : Center (0V : Connected to GND)(-40V against the Developer Roller Bias) Developer RollerToner Supply Roller (+350V against GND)(Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias) OR (-150V against the Developer Roller Bias) Reference Name of rollerSupplied voltage Developer Roller+350V +/-5V against the ground Regulation Roller (Center) -40V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias Regulation Roller (Both sides) 0V (Ground) (brush type) Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias Toner Supply Roller (sponge type) -150V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias K105sm3e1_USC 3-233. 2 Scan Process 3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy There are CIS Units, CIS Controller PCB and Data Controller PCB in the scanner unit, which take image reading and processes the data. 1.The CIS Units read the image pattern of original, and then send the analog data to the CISController Board. 2.The CIS Controller Boards converts the analog data into digital data, and then send to the DataController PCB. 3.The Data Controller PCB takes the correct image process according to the UI setting. Then it outputs the image data to the IPS through the USB 2.0. 4.The IPS output the image data to the printer part of KIP 3000 through the Interface 8 in case ofcopy, or it outputs to the Network PC through the LAN cable in case of scan to file. CISCISCISCISCIS CIS Controller PCB(A/D Conversion) Analog data Digital data CIS Controller PCB(A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB(A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB(A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB(A/D Conversion) Data Controller PCB(Several image process) USB 2.0 IPS (Controller) Interface 8LAN Printer partNetwork PC Printing out of the Copy Saving as an image file K105sm3e1_USC 3-243. 2. 2 Positioning process of Image Block The scanner part of KIP 3000 reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image Sensor). As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks. So it is necessary to remove this gap by vertical positioning process (Y offset). Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. It means some image pixels are commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks. It is very hard to recognize the image because many images are duplicated. To prevent this kind of problem, it is necessary to remove the duplication of image pixels by horizontal positioning process (X overlap). The Data Controller PCB performs these positioning processes. [Explanation] 5 pieces of CIS are arranged in 2 rows as the following illustration, with some amount of their reading area overlapping each other. So the reading data initially inputted to the Data Controller PCB is as follows. (1)There occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks. (2)Some image pixels are commonly included (duplicating) in the neighbouring two Image Blocks. Reading areas CIS The image data before the positioning process NOTE The KIP 3000 performs these positioning processes (X overlap & Y offset) according to the setting specified through Scanner Utility. Please refer to [8.12. 4. 4Position] for this setting. K105sm3e1_USC 3-25The Data Controller PCB removes the vertical gap among the Image Block according to the positioning setting (Y offset) specified through Scanner Utility. The image data before the positioning process The image data after the positioning process (Y offset) K105sm3e1_USC 3-26Also the Data Controller PCB removes the duplication of image pixels among the Image Blocks according to the positioning setting (X overlap) specified through Scanner Utility. The image data after the positioning process (Y offset) The image data after the positioning process (X overlap) K105sm4e1_USC 4-1 Chapter 4 Electrical Page 4. 1 General Information 4-2 4. 2 Electrical Components Location 4-3 4. 2. 1 Right side4-3 4. 2. 2 Left side4-7 4. 2. 3 Back side4-8 4. 2. 4 Front side4-12 4. 2. 5 LED Head Frame 4-13 4. 2. 6 Main Frame4-15 4. 2. 7 Developer Unit4-18 4. 2. 8 Fuser Unit 4-19 4. 2. 9 Roll Deck4-21 4. 2.10Cutter Unit4-24 4. 2.11Inner Transport Unit4-25 4. 2.12Scanner Unit4-26 4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply4-30 4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output4-30 4. 3. 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona 4-31 4. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona 4-33 4. 3. 4 Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the Separation Corona 4-35 4. 3. 5 Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the Separation Corona 4-37 4. 3. 6 Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer Biasto the Developer Roller 4-39 4. 3. 7 Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer Biasto the Developer Roller 4-41 4. 3. 8 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gapbetween Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller 4-43 4. 3. 9 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gapbetween Developer Roller and Regulation Roller4-45 4. 3.10Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)4-47 4. 3.11Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning Roller Bias(Toner Collection Process)4-49 K105sm4e1_USC 4-24. 1 General Information This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer, which is located on DC Controller. This microcomputer reads input signals from sensors, and outputs the operation signals to motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on programmed timing. DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5VDC is applied on this DC Controller safely. Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage. 0VDCBlue 5VDCYellow 12VDCBrown 24VDCOrange Signal in to DC Controller (sensors) Purple Signal out from DC Controller Gray SensorMicro Computer (CPU & ROM) DC LoadDriver CAUTION There is a battery (CR2032) on the Motherboard of IPS Controller. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.Asforthewastedisposalofbattery,disposeinaccordancewithlocalstateandfederal relations. K105sm4e1_USC 4-34. 2 Electrical Components Location 4. 2. 1 Right side ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1SW1(POWER-OFF)SwitchAJ8R2004BBCFTurning on and off the machine 2MS1SwitchD2D-3104-3Detecting whether or not the Toner Hatch or the Engine Unit is opened. (It shuts off the AC power to the DCP1 when either of them is opened 3HV4-HV Power SupplyAHKG-067Outputting the high voltage to the Cleaning Roller. 4SSR1Solid State RelayS5C-225HVON / OFF control of the Fuser HV1 HV2 HV3 HV_IM HV_TR HV_AC 5 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT1 BIAS_TRG BIAS_SW HV Power SupplyEUKG845HAOutputting the high voltage to each of the following components. (1) Image Corona (HV1) (2) Transfer Corona (HV2) (3) Separation Corona (HV3) (4) Developer Roller (OUTPUT2) (5) Regulation Roller (OUTPUT3) (6) Toner Supply Roller (OUTPUT1) 6PW5724BPhase Control PCBPW5724BAvoiding the flicker of room lamp This board is used on 230V machine only. 7PW10350-01 OUT1-IN OUT1-OUT PW10350-01 PCBPW10350-01Switching the Toner Supply Roller Bias between high and low This board is used on machines containing sponge type Developer Unit only 2 1 3 45 6 7 K105sm4e1_USC 4-4 NOTE Developer Bias (OUTPUT 2, 3 & 1) is outputted (or stopped) by the signal BIAS_TRG. The polarity of Bias is decided by the signal BIAS_SW K105sm4e1_USC 4-5 (120V machine) (230V machine) 9 8 1112 1314 15 1618 1710 K105sm4e1_USC 4-6 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 8DCP1-DC Power SupplyLEB225F-0524-U Outputting each 24VDC, 5VDC and 0VDC 9F1 F2 F3 -Fuse215315MXPProtecting the 24VDC from the over-current If you replace the fuses, make sure to use the following specified one. (Manufacturer) LITTEL FUSE INC. (Type) 02153 15MXP (250V / 3.15A) 10PW9210-Surge Protection PCBPW9210Protecting the circuit from the surge caused by the thunder 11SW2-Switch (Option)SDDJE1Turning on and off the Dehumidify Heater 12RY2-Relay (Option)G2R-1-T-24VON / OFF control for the Dehumidify Heater (It makes the Dehumidify Heater OFF when the Main Switch is ON, and it makes the heater ON when the switch is OFF.) 13RY1-RelayG7L-2A-TUB (DC24V) Supplying the power to the Lamp (H1). (It stops supplying the power to the Lamp when Switch (MS3) or Thermostat (TS1) is open.) 14LF1-Noise FilterRemoving the noise from the AC lineUsed on 120V machine. 15CB1-BreakerX28-XQ1A-15Protecting the AC line from the over-current Used on 120V machine. 16LF1-Noise FilterRG-208F2Removing the noise from the AC line Used on 230V machine. 17INLET-InletInputting the AC Power Used on 230V machine. 18CB1-BreakerX28-XQ1A-10Protecting the AC line from the over-current Used on 230V machine. K105sm4e1_USC 4-74. 2. 2 Left side ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1PW10520-PW10520 PCBPW10520Overall sequence control 2PW6654B-Driver PCB BPW6654BDriver for the motors, clutches and so on 3MS4-SwitchV-162-1C2510E Detecting whether or not the Toner Hatch or the Engine Unit is opened (The machine does not shut off the AC power even if the MS4 detects either of them is opened.) 4CL1REGIST_CLClutchMIC5NE-45Meeting the image head and leading edge of paper each other 4 3 2 1 K105sm4e1_USC 4-84. 2. 3 Back side ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1BL7-BlowerD12F-24BL 05 Assisting to transport the paper on the Inner Transport Unit 2BL8-FanASFN60372Cooling down the IPS Controller 3DCP2-DC Power SupplyLEA50F-12-XKKD Supplying the DC power to both the UI and the PW10523 4PW10523PC Controller PCBPW10523Shutting down the IPS Controller. 5M1MAMTRDC MotorDRG-6236-196 Driving the Drum, Developer Unit and paper feeding section 6M2HEAT_MDC MotorDRG-6236-196 Driving the Fuser Unit 1 3562 4K105sm4e1_USC 4-9 (Fuser unit is removed.) ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 7BL5FanASFN60372Controlling the temperature on the right area of Fuser Roller 8BL6FanASFN60372Controlling the temperature on the left area of Fuser Roller 9BL9FanEUDC24B8Controlling the temperature on the central area of Fuser Roller 789K105sm4e1_USC 4-10 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 10MS8Switch (Optional in USA)FA2L-BA22It stops supplying the AC power to the Dehumidify Heater when the Roll Deck is opened. 10K105sm4e1_USC 4-11 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 11BL3 & BL4HEAT_BL_L HEAT_BL_R BlowerD12F-24BL 05Exhausting the inside air. (They are equipped with the Ozone Filter.) 12MS2SwitchD2D-3104-3Detecting whether or not the Heater Hatch is opened. (It shuts off the AC power to the DCP1 when the Heater Hatch is opened.) 13MS3SwitchV-162-1C25 10EDetecting whether or not the Heater Hatch is opened. (The machine does not shut off the AC power even if the MS3 detects the Heater Hatch is opened.) 12 11 1113K105sm4e1_USC 4-124. 2. 4 Front side ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1LCDLCDL168200J000Several kinds of message are indicated. 2PW10570PW10570 PCBPW10570Several kinds of service operations are available. 3EC1COUNTCounterE760PC10DC24-551 Counting the total linear meter (linear foot) or square meter (square foot). It is possible to change the counting unit in the Service Mode. 12 3K105sm4e1_USC 4-134. 2. 5 LED Head Frame ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1PW6631ER1Eraser PCB APW6631Removing the negative electric charges from the Drum at the beginning of the Print Process 1K105sm4e1_USC 4-14 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 2LED HEADLED HeadLH6601Creating the Electrostatic Latent Image on the Drum 3PW6693HV-ZD AssyPW6693Keeping the Grid Voltage constant (Control of the surface potential) 2 3 K105sm4e1_USC 4-154. 2. 6 Main Frame ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1PW6631ER2Eraser PCB APW6631Assisting the paper separation by removing the electric charges from the Drum at the time of Separation Process 1K105sm4e1_USC 4-16 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 2M4PRESS_MDC MotorDU2422-1Pressing the Developer Unit to the Drum (Or keeping the Developer Unit away from the Drum) 3PH4PRESS_SSensorGP1A73A000JDetecting the Developer Unit is pressed or kept away 4PH1REGIST_SSensorPS117ED1Detecting the paper at the Registration Area 5PH5MAN_INSensorPS117ED1Detecting the set of cut sheet paper 2 3 4 5 K105sm4e1_USC 4-17 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 6MS5DOOR-OPEN SwitchCS1A-B2CADetecting the Roll Deck Open Error 6K105sm4e1_USC 4-184. 2. 7 Developer Unit ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1TLS1TONER_SSensorTSP15DA10C-01 Detecting whether or not the toner exists in the Developer Unit 2M3TONER_MDC MotorDU2431-2Driving the Toner Hopper to supply the toner to the Developer Unit 12 K105sm4e1_USC 4-194. 2. 8 Fuser Unit ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1TS1Thermostat2450RC-S26-004-181 Preventing over-heat 2TH2TH2Thermistor 2FS-K0114Detecting the temperature on the right area of Fuser Roller 3TH1TH1ThermistorFS-K0113Detecting the temperature on the central area of Fuser Roller 4TH3TH3Thermistor 3Detecting the temperature on the left area of Fuser Roller 14 23 K105sm4e1_USC 4-20 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 5H1Lamp 120V : Z056800010 100V : Z056800020 230V : Z056800030 Heating up the Fuser Roller 6PH3HEAT_EXITSensorGP1A73A000JDetecting the paper mis-feed at the exit area 5 6 K105sm4e1_USC 4-214. 2. 9 Roll Deck ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1CL3FEED_CLClutchMIC5NE-45Feeding the roll paper from both Roll 1 and Roll 2 2CL4R1FD_CLClutchMIC5NE-45Feeding the Roll 1 forward 3CL5R1BK_CLClutchMIC8NE-09Rewinding the Roll 1 4CL6R2FD_CLClutchMIC5NE-45Feeding the Roll 2 forward 5CL7R2BK_CLClutchMIC8NE-09Rewinding the Roll 2 3 2145 K105sm4e1_USC 4-22 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 6H3, H4,H5 & H6 Resister120V1K15WDehumidifying the roll paper 7TS3 & TS4Thermostat2455RM-158-37 Controlling the temperature of Resister (The Resisters turn on when the Thermostat detects some decided temperature, and they turn offwhen it detects another decided temperature.) 667K105sm4e1_USC 4-23 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 8PH6R_EDGESensorPS117ED1Detecting the trailing edge of the roll paper 9PH7R1SET_SSensorPS117ED1Detecting the set of Roll 1 10PH9R2SET_SSensorPS117ED1Detecting the set of Roll 2 11PH8R1ENC_SSensorGP1A73A000JDetecting paper end of Roll 1 12PH10R2ENC_SSensorGP1A73A000JDetecting paper end of Roll 2 10 11 1289 K105sm4e1_USC 4-244. 2.10Cutter Unit ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1M5Cutter Motor-Moving the Cutter Blade 2MS6 & MS7 Cutter Home Position Sensor -Detecting the Home Position of Cutter Blade. 1 22K105sm4e1_USC 4-254. 2.11Inner Transport Unit ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1PH2STRIP_SSensorGP1A73A000JDetecting the paper mis-feed at the Separation Area 1K105sm4e1_USC 4-264. 2.12Scanner Unit ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 1Power BoardPower Board converts the +24V to each +12V, +5V and +3.3V. Also it is the Driver Circuit of the Motor. 2CIS Controller BoardConverting the analog data read by the CIS to the digital data 3SwitchCS1A-B2CAEmergent stop button 12 3K105sm4e1_USC 4-27 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 4Data Controller BoardData Controller Board makes several image processes to the digital data sent from the CIS Controller Board. And then it sends the processed image data to the controller. 5CIS Controller BoardConverting the analog data read by the CIS to the digital data 6SensorTLP1201ADetecting whether or not the Scanner Upper Unit is opened. 7Color Module(installed to machines after S/N 10510001) 4567K105sm4e1_USC 4-28 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 8SensorPS117ND1It detects the insertion of original. Also it detects original widths A4, 11 and 12. 9SensorPS117ND1It detects original widths A3, 17 and 18. 10SensorPS117ND1It detects original widths A2, 22 and 24. 11SensorPS117ND1It detects original widths A1 and 30. 12SensorPS117ND1It detects original widths A0, 34 and 36. 13SensorPS117ND1It detects the original mis-feed. It is also used to detect the leading edge when the original is returned. 89 1112 13 10 K105sm4e1_USC 4-29 ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 14CIS UnitCIPS218CF601CIS Units read the image of original, and then send the analog data to the CIS Controller Board ItemSymbolSignal nameNameTypeFunction 15Motor AssemblyTransporting the original. 141415 K105sm4e2_USC 4-304. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply 4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output It is necessary to check the analog output from High Voltage Power Supply after replacing the following parts. 1.PW10520 PCB (DC Controller) 2.HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA) 3.HV Power Supply PCB (AHKG-067) Please check the analog output for each of the following part, and please adjust if it is out of thespecified range. Each Reference page in the list shows how to check and adjust each item. Check ItemReference pageAnalog Voltage to the Image Corona4-31 Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona4-33 AC Component to the Separation Corona4-35 DC Component to the Separation Corona4-37 Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller4-39 Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller4-41 Bias gap between Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller4-43 Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller4-45 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)4-47 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process)4-49 Please try to replace the PW10520 PCB or HV Power Supply PCB if you have the following kinds of problem. PW10520 PCB (1)When the UI indicates abnormal indication although the UI has no problem. (2)When the electric component such as motor or lamp does not work properly although such component has no problem. HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA) (1)When the output to each Image Corona, Transfer Corona, Separation CoronaDeveloper Roller, Toner Supply Roller and Regulation Roller is abnormal. HV Power Supply PCB (AHKG-067) (1)When the output to the Cleaning Roller is abnormal. Reference K105sm4e2_USC 4-314. 3. 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Image Corona is 1.30 +/-0.05V. Check and adjust the output current in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the CP11 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltagewith the multi-meter. Standard value of the output voltage to the Image Corona is 1.30 +/-0.05V. CAUTION!6606600010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundCP11 K105sm4e2_USC 4-32 3.Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1.30 +/-0.05V. To adjust it, rotate the VR101 with a screwdriver. CAUTION!6606600010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundVR101 K105sm4e2_USC 4-334. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Transfer Corona is specified to each type of paper as follows. Plain paper 1.00 +/-0.05V Tracing paper1.00 +/-0.05V Film1.00 +/-0.05V Check and adjust the output current in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the CP21 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the CP22 pin. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)CP21CP22 NOTE The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment. Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition. K105sm4e2_USC 4-34 2.Select the Test Print Mode, and make a test print using each type of paper (plainpaper, tracing paper & Film) making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and afterthe page 8-130. As the high voltage is supplied to the Transfer Corona during the Test Print, check the voltagewith the multi-meter. Standard values of the output voltages to the Transfer Corona are: Plain paper1.00 +/-0.05V Tracing paper1.00 +/-0.05V Film1.00 +/-0.05V 3.Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1.00 +/-0.05V. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4), select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, andchange the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies 1.00 +/-0.05V. (Refer to [8. 5. 4.12Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)] on the page 8-45 for the detail.) Sub Mode No.Contents 029Transfer Voltage (Plain paper) 030Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper) 031Transfer Voltage (Film) 032Transfer Voltage (Plain paper : Special) 033Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper : Special) 034Transfer Voltage (Film : Special) K105sm4e2_USC 4-354. 3. 4 Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the Separation Corona The standard value of the AC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V. Check and adjust the AC Component in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the CP31 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the CPCOM pin. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltagewith the multi-meter. Standard value of the AC Component to the Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)CP31 CPCOM K105sm4e2_USC 4-36 3.Adjust the AC Component if it does not satisfy 5.00 +/-0.05V. To adjust it, rotate the VR302 with a screwdriver. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)VR302 K105sm4e2_USC 4-374. 3. 5 Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the Separation Corona The standard value of the DC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V. Check and adjust the DC Component in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the CP33 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltagewith the multi-meter. Standard value of the DC Component to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundCP33 K105sm4e2_USC 4-38 3.Adjust the DC Component if it does not satisfy -250 +/-5V. To adjust it, rotate the VR303 with a screwdriver. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundVR303 K105sm4e2_USC 4-394. 3. 6 Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller The Negative Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Print Cycle. The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias is as follows for each type of paper. Plain paper -230 +/-5V against the ground Tracing paper-230 +/-5V against the ground Film-230 +/-5V against the ground Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT2 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundOUTPUT 2 NOTE The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment. Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition. K105sm4e2_USC 4-40 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller during the Test Print, checkthe voltage with the multi-meter. The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias for each type of media is: Plain paper-230 +/-5V against the ground Tracing paper-230 +/-5V against the ground Film-230 +/-5V against the ground If the above values are not satisfied, go to the next step 8 for the adjustment. 3.Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4), select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, andchange the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies -230 +/-5V against the ground. (Refer to [8. 5. 4.10 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)] on the page 8-44 for the detail.) Sub Mode No.Contents 022Developer Bias (Plain paper) 023Developer Bias (Tracing paper) 024Developer Bias (Film) 025Developer Bias (Plain paper : Special) 026Developer Bias (Tracing paper : Special) 027Developer Bias (Film : Special) K105sm4e2_USC 4-414. 3. 7 Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller The Positive Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Cleaning Cycle. The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground. Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT2 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundOUTPUT 2 K105sm4e2_USC 4-42 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. The Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller for some seconds after theprinted paper has been ejected. Check the voltage with the multi-meter during that period. The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground. If this is not satisfied, go to the next step 8 for the adjustment. 3.Adjust the Positive Developer Bias rotating the VR401, so that it should satisfy+350 +/-5V against the ground. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)GroundVR401 K105sm4e2_USC 4-434. 3. 8 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller (This section is applied to machines containing sponge type Developer Unit only.) The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller is as follows. On printing 150 +/-5V Interval of print50 +/-5V Check and adjust it in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT2 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB(EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the TAB2 OUT1-OUT Pin on the PW10350 PCB. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller, check theBias gap between them with the multi-meter. The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller is asfollows. On printing150 +/-5V Interval of print50 +/-5V CAUTION!6606600010TP12TN1OUTP UT1OUTP UT2OUTP UT3HV 1VR101HV2V R201OUTP UT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTP UT3VR501OUTP UT1V R601HV3Vp-pV R302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi- meterCP11( DC volt range)K I PP W1 0 3 5 0 0 1OUT2- INOUT2- OUTTAB1- 1TAB1- 2TAB2OUT1- OUTTAB3OUT1- INTAB2 OUT1-OUT OUTPUT 2 K105sm4e2_USC 4-44 3.Adjust the Bias gap if it does not satisfy the standard value. On printing150 +/-5V Interval of print50 +/-5V To adjust it, rotate the VR601 with a screwdriver. VR601 CAUTION!6606600010TP12TN1OUTP UT1OUTP UT2OUTP UT3HV 1VR101HV2V R201OUTP UT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTP UT3VR501OUTP UT1V R601HV3Vp-pV R302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi- meterCP11( DC volt range)K I PP W1 0 3 5 0 0 1OUT2- INOUT2- OUTTAB1- 1TAB1- 2TAB2OUT1- OUTTAB3OUT1- INK105sm4e2_USC 4-454. 3. 9 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller is 40 +/-5V. Check and adjust it in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT3 pin on the HV Power Supply PCB(EUKG845HA). Also connect the - one to the OUTPUT2 Pin. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller, check theBias gap between them with the multi-meter. The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 40 +/-5V. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 K105sm4e2_USC 4-46 3.Adjust the Bias gap if it does not satisfy 40 +/-5V. To adjust it, rotate the VR501 with a screwdriver. CAUTION!9606660010TP12TN1OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3HV1VR101HV2VR201OUTPUT2VR401Don'tTouchVR402OUTPUT3VR501OUTPUT1VR601HV3Vp-pVR302VR301HV3FrequencyHV3HV2HV3HV3DCCN301 CN302 CN303CP31CPCOMCP33VR303CP21 CP22Multi-meterCP11(DC volt range)VR501 K105sm4e2_USC 4-474. 3.10Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) The Positive Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the Print Process. The standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V. Check and adjust it in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT pin on the HV Power Supply PCB(AHKG-067). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. As the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is supplied during the Test Print, check the voltage value with the multi-meter. Standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V. OUTPUTCN501CN502Multi-meter(DC volt range)GroundVR1VR2 OUTPUT K105sm4e2_USC 4-48 3.Adjust the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy +450 +/-5V. To adjust it, rotate the VR2 with a screwdriver. OUTPUTCN501CN502Multi-meter(DC volt range)GroundVR1VR2 VR2 K105sm4e2_USC 4-494. 3.11Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) The Negative Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the Toner Collection Process, which is done after the completion of Print Process. The standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V. Check and adjust it in the following way. 1.Connect the + cable of the multi-meter to the OUTPUT pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (AHKG-067). Also connect the - one to the ground. And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 2.Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 8Test Print Mode] on and after the page8-130. The Toner Collection Process works for some seconds after the printed paper has beenejected.Check the voltage value with the multi-meter during that period. Standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V. OUTPUTCN501CN502Multi-meter(DC volt range)GroundVR1VR2 OUTPUT K105sm4e2_USC 4-50 3.Adjust the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy -550 +/-5V. To adjust it, rotate the VR1 with a screwdriver. OUTPUTCN501CN502Multi-meter(DC volt range)GroundVR1VR2 K105sm5e1_USC 5-1 Chapter 5 Mechanical page 5. 1 Outer Covers5-3 5. 1. 1 Removal of Side Covers 5-3 5. 1. 2 Removal of Cover 155-5 5. 1. 3 Removal of Cover 145-6 5. 2 Developer Unit5-8 5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit5-8 5. 2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components (after S/N 10510001)5-11 5. 2. 3 Replacement of Developer Unit Components (before S/N 10510001)5-33 5. 2. 4 Replacement of Toner Supply Roller (before S/N 10510001)5-52 5. 2. 5 Replacement of DC Motor5-61 5. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1)5-63 5. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears(Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit)5-64 5. 2. 8 Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller5-70 5. 3 Fuser Unit5-72 5. 3. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit5-72 5. 3. 2 Replacement of Fuser Unit Components5-75 5. 3. 3 Replacement of Roller Pressure 5-89 5. 3. 4 Replacement of Thermistors5-97 5. 3. 5 Replacement of Thermostat5-99 5. 3. 6 Replacement of Exit Sensor5-100 5. 4 Roll Deck5-103 5. 4. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly5-103 5. 4. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4 & CL5) of Roll 15-108 5. 4. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6 & CL7) of Roll 25-112 5. 4. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt (480) for Roll 25-115 5. 4. 5 Replacement of Timing Belt (480) for Roll 15-119 5. 4. 6 Replacement of Timing Belt (330)5-122 5. 4. 7 Replacement of Timing Belt (753)5-123 5. 4. 8 Replacement of Sensors (PH6, PH7 & PH9)5-125 5. 4. 9 Replacement of Sensors (PH8 & PH10)5-127 5. 4.10Replacement of Dehumidify Heater5-131 5. 4.11Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit (Optional in USA) 5-133 5. 4. 11. 1 Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z058080020)5-133 5. 4. 11. 2 Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z058080050)5-151 5. 4.12Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit (Optional in USA) 5-158 5. 5 Photoconductive Drum5-170 5. 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum5-170 5. 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminum Blocks 5-178 5. 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum5-182 5. 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 45-183 K105sm5e1_USC 5-25. 6 LED Head5-185 5. 6. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit5-185 5. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment5-193 5. 6. 2. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image5-193 5. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminum Blocks5-194 5. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers5-203 5. 7 Image Corona5-209 5. 7. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit5-209 5. 7. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire5-216 5. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona5-221 5. 8. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona5-221 5. 8. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires5-223 5. 9 Engine Frame 5-226 5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4)5-226 5. 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1)5-230 5. 9. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6)5-232 5. 9. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4)5-233 5.10 Inner Transport Unit5-235 5.10. 1Removal of the Inner Transport Unit5-235 5.10. 2Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt5-237 5.11 Main Frame5-241 5.11. 1Replacement of DC Motors (M1 & M2), Belt1 & Belt 35-241 5.11. 2Replacement of Clutch (CL1)5-249 5.11. 3Replacement of Blower (BL7)5-252 5.12Scanner Unit5-253 5.12. 1Removal of the Scanner Unit5-253 5.12. 2Replacement of Motor Assembly5-260 5.12. 3Replacement of Belt 60S2M250 and Belt 60S2M2845-263 5.12. 4Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 25-266 5.12. 5Replacement of CIS Assembly5-284 K105sm5e1_USC 5-35. 1 Outer Covers 5. 1. 1 Removal of Side Covers 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove the screws (2) at both sides. 3.Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 1 2 23 3K105sm5e1_USC 5-4 4.Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 4 45 6K105sm5e1_USC 5-55. 1. 2 Removal of Cover 15 1.Remove 4 pieces of screw (1), loosen 4 pieces of screw (2), and then remove the Cover 15 (3). 1 2 3 K105sm5e1_USC 5-65. 1. 3 Removal of Cover 14 1.Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1). 2.Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back, and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front. 3.Remove Cover 14 (4). 1 23 4 K105sm5e1_USC 5-7 4. Remove 3 screws (5). 5. Remove Shield Cover N (6). 556 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-85. 2 Developer Unit 5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit 1.Open the Cover 4 (1). 2.Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free. 1 2 3 23K105sm5e2a_USC 5-9 3.There are Pins (4) at both sides. Pull them up and then slide them inward to remove the Cover 4 (1). 4.Pull up the Lever 2 (5) to open the Engine Unit. 5.Open the Bypass Feeder (6). 4 1 5 6 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-10 6.Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (7). 7.Close the Bypass Feeder, and then open the Developer Press Unit (8). 8.Holding both Side Plates (9), remove the Developer Unit (10) from the machine. 7789 10 NOTE If you replace the whole Developer Unit, it is necessary to adjust the space between developer driving gears. Refer to [5. 2. 7Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit)] on page 5-66. K105sm5e2a_USC 5-115. 2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components (after S/N 10510001) 1.Remove the Developer Unit from the machinemaking reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Disconnect the connector (1). NOTE (1)This section applies to brush type Developer Unit (after S/N 10510001). (2)The following parts are Developer Unit components. A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.This section describes how to replace all of them in one sequent operation. (3)Remove all the toner from Developer Unit before replacing the above parts. ItemNumber of article Remarks Roller Developer1 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal 12 Seal 32 Seal 42 Scraper1 Toner Supply Roller1 Sheet 52 Sheet 62 All of these parts are contained in Developer Maintenance Kit E (Z050980280). 1 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-12 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (2) which fix the Hopper Assembly. 4.Remove the Hopper Assembly (3). 2 23K105sm5e2a_USC 5-13 5.Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (4) to remove the Cover (5). 6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (6), and then remove the Scraper Assembly (7). 54 6 677K105sm5e2a_USC 5-14 7.Remove 10 pieces of screw (8), and then disassemble the Scraper Assembly. Replace Scraper (9) with a new one. 8.Remove all the toner from Developer Unit. NOTE (1) Please install the new Scraper so that one of its 4 edges pointed by an arrow mark should touch the surface of Regulation Roller. (2) The edge must be straight after theinstallation. Otherwise the toner will not bescraped off well. Arrow mark (3) Carry Scraper Assembly ends so that the touching edge to Regulation Roller is in downward direction. If Scraper falls or slips, Seal 5 (P/N: Z054601260) should be applied on Bracket 14 (10) so that Scraper Assembly housing catches Scraper firmly. NOTE Do not reuse the removed toner. 8 89 10 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-15 9.Loosen 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (11) to release the Regulation Roller. NOTE The Bracket 4 (12) is moved up by the spring if you loosen the screws (11). The Regulation Roller (13) is released at this time. When reassemble, make sure to tighten the screws (11) with pressing the Bracket 4 (12) fully to the arrow direction. 131311 1111 12121111 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-1610. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (14), 1 piece of 4x8 screw (15) and Pin 4 (16). Also remove the Bracket 9 (17) and Collar (18). 11. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (19 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (20 : 8.1x14x0.5) andGear Helical 28T (21). 141415 18 16 17 19 192021K105sm5e2a_USC 5-1712. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (22 : E5) to remove Gear Helical 25T (23), Parallel Pin (24 : 2.5 x 12) and Collar 3 (25) from the shaft of Regulation Roller. Also remove the Gear Helical 30T (26) and Parallel Pin (27: 3x14) from the shaft of RollerSupply. 22 24 262722 23 25 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-1813. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (28 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (29 : 8.1x14x0.5) and Gear Helical 28T Assembly (30). 14. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (31) to remove the Holder 2 Assembly (32). 28 3029283132K105sm5e2a_USC 5-1915. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (33) to release the Regulation Roller. NOTE The Bracket 5 (34) is moved up by the spring if you loosen the screws (35). The Regulation Roller (13) is released at this time. When reassemble, make sure to tighten the screws (35) with pressing the Bracket 5 (34) fully to the arrow direction. 1313 3335 3534 34 35 35K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2016. Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (36) and 2 pieces of Retaining Ring-E (37 : E10). Then, remove the Collars (38) and the Bracket 10 Assembly (39). 3736 393838 36K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2117. Remove the Gear Helical 32T (40), the Thrust Washer (41:12.1x20x0.2), the Gear Helical24T (42) and the Parallel Pins (43 : 3x16). 18. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (44 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (45 : 12.2x20x0.5) andCounter Roller (46) on the driving side. 19.Also remove the Counter Roller (47) on the electrode plate side. 40 42434140424144 4644454747K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2220. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (48 : E10) and the Thrust Washers (49 : 12.2x20x0.5).Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw(50) to remove the Bracket 8 Assembly (51). 21. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (52 : E10) to remove the Thrust Washer (53 : 12.2x20x0.5) andthe Bearing (54). 48 50 50 4850495152525354K105sm5e2a_USC 5-23 22. Remove the Roller Developer (55), and replace it with the new one. Paste the Sheet 3 (56 : outside) and Sheet 4 (57 : inside / with double-face tape) to both sidefaces of Roller Developer at this time. NOTE You need to care about the direction of Roller Developer. The Electrode Plate side has 3 ditches on the shaft, and the driving side has 2 ditches. Electrode Plate side Driving side 57563 ditches 5555 2 ditches K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2423. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (11) to remove the Bracket 4 (12) and the Spring (58). 5812 11K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2524. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (35) to remove the Bracket 5 (34) and the Spring (56). 25. Remove the 4x8 Pan Head screw (60) to remove the Flat Washer (61 : M4) and the Bracket 6Assembly (62) 35 34 59 60 626061K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2626. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (63 : E8) to remove the Thrust Washers (59 : 10.1x16x0.5)(64) and Bracket 7 Assembly (65) on the Electrode Plate side. 27. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (66) to remove the Bracket 19 (67). 6363656466 67K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2728. Remove the Regulation Roller (68). NOTE You need to care about the direction of Regulation Roller. The longer shaft should be on the driving side. Electrode Plate side Driving side 68 68 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2829. Remove the Seals 1 (69) at both sides. Replace the Seals 1 (69) with the new ones. 30. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (70 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (71 : 12.2x20x0.5) and Bearing (72) on the driving side. 31. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (73 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (74 : 12.2x20x0.5) and Bearing (75) on the Electrode Plate side. 69 70 70717273737475K105sm5e2a_USC 5-2932. Turn the whole Developer Unit to the arrow mark so that you can see the bottom of the unit. 33.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screws (76) to remove the Bracket Assembly (77). 34. Remove 9 pieces of 4x6 screws (78) to remove the Frame 2 (79). 76 7778 78 78 79K105sm5e2a_USC 5-3035. Remove the Roller Supply (80) sliding to the arrow direction, and replace it with the new one. Paste the Sheet 5 (81 : outside) and Sheet 6 (82 : inside / with double-face tape) to both sidefaces of Toner Supply Roller at this time. NOTE (1) You need to care about the direction of Roller Supply. The Electrode Plate side has 2 ditches on the shaft, and the driving side has 3 ditches. Electrode Plate side Driving side (2) There are Seal 4 (85) at both sides of the Roller Supply. Remove them from the old Roller Supply and then install them to the new Roller Supply. (Be careful not to dispose them.) 2 ditches 3 ditches 80 80838182 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-3136. Remove the 4x8 tapping screws (84) and 4x8 bind screws (85) at both sides, and remove eachSeal L Assembly (86), Seal R Assembly (87) and Collars (88). NOTE When you reinstall both the Seal L Assembly (86), Seal R Assembly (87), do not tighten the 4x8 tapping screws (84) so much as the seals will be transformed as the following bad example. Bad example Good example Seal is transformed.Seal is straight. 84858485 8687 888886848584 85 87 K105sm5e2a_USC 5-3237. There are Seals 3 (89) and Seals 4 (90) at both sides. Strip them off, and replace them with the new ones. NOTE Align both the Seals 3 (89) and Seals 4 (90) atthe bottom side. Alignment 90 899089 K105sm5e2b_USC 5-335. 2. 3 Replacement of Developer Unit Components (before S/N 10510001) 1.Remove the Developer Unit from the machinemaking reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover (2). 1 22NOTE (1)This section applies to sponge type Developer Unit (before S/N 10510001). (2)The following parts are Developer Unit components. A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended. This section describes how to replace all of them in one sequent operation. (3)Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit before replacing the above parts. ItemNumber of article Remarks Roller Developer1 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal 12 Seal 32 Seal 42 Scraper1 All of these parts are contained in Developer Roller Kit (Z050980020).ItemNumber of article Remarks Toner Supply Roller1 Sheet 52 Sheet 62 All of these parts are contained in Supply Roller Kit (Z050980030). K105sm5e2b_USC 5-34 3.Disconnect the connector (3). 4.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (4) which fix the Hopper Assembly. 34 4K105sm5e2b_USC 5-35 5.Remove the Hopper Assembly (5). 6.Remove the 4x6 screws (6) at both sides, and then remove the Scraper Assembly (7). 5677K105sm5e2b_USC 5-36 7.Remove 10 pieces of screw (8), and then disassemble the Scraper Assembly. Replace the Scraper (9) with the new one. 8.Remove all the toner from Developer Unit. NOTE (1)Please install the new Scraper so that one ofits 4 edges pointed by an arrow mark shouldtouch the surface of Regulation Roller. (2)The edge must be straight after theinstallation. Otherwise the toner will not bescraped off well. Arrow mark (3) Carry Scraper Assembly ends so that the touching edge to Regulation Roller is in downward direction. If Scraper falls or slips, Seal 5 (P/N: Z054601260) should be applied on Bracket 14 (10) so that Scraper Assembly housing catches Scraper firmly. 9 NOTE Do not reuse the removed toner. 88 10 K105sm5e2b_USC 5-379.Loose 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (11) to release the Regulation Roller. NOTE The Bracket 4 (12) is moved up by the spring if you loosen the screws (11). The Regulation Roller (13) is released at this time. When reassemble, make sure to tighten the screws (11) with pressing the Bracket 4 (12) fully to the arrow direction. 11 121111 1313K105sm5e2b_USC 5-3810. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (14) and 1 piece of 4x10 screw (15), and remove the Pin 4 (16),Collar (17) and Bracket 9 (18). NOTE The direction of Collar (17) is as shown. 14161617 1817 15 1415 17K105sm5e2b_USC 5-3911. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (19 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (20 : 8.1x14x0.5) andGear Helical 35T (21). 12. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (22 : E5) to remove Gear Helical 25T (23), ParallelPin (24 : 2.5 x 10) and Collar 3 (25). Also remove Gear Helical 30T (26) and Parallel Pin (27 : 3x16). 19 2223 24 25 2627202119 21 22 2326K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4013. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (28 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (29 : 8.1x14x0.5), 28T Gear Assembly (30) and Collar (31). 14. Remove 2 (or 3) pieces of 3x6 screw (32) to remove the Holder 2 Assembly (33). 28293031323328K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4115. Loose 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (34) to release the Regulation Roller. NOTE The Bracket 5 (35) is moved up by the spring if you loosen the screws (34). The Regulation Roller (13) is released at this time. When reassemble, make sure to tighten the screws (34) with pressing the Bracket 5 (35) fully to the arrow direction. 3435 3434 1335 3434 1334K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4216. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (36), 1 piece of 4x12 screw (37) and 2 pieces of RetainingRing-E (38 : E10), and remove Collars (39) and Bracket 10 Assembly (40). NOTE The direction of Collars (39) is as shown. 363839 40 3739 383637 39K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4317. Remove Gear Helical 32T (41), Gear Helical 24T (42) and Parallel Pins (43 : 3x16). 18. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (44 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (45 : 12.2x20x0.5) andCounter Roller (46) on the driving side. 19.Also remove the Counter Roller (47) on the electrode plate side. 41 424344 45 46 4741424744K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4420. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (48 : E10) to remove Thrust Washers (49 : 12.2x20x0.5) andBearings (50) at both sides. 21. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (51) to remove the Bracket 8 (52). 48 49 50 48495051 52 4848K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4522. Remove the Roller Developer (53), and replace it with the new one. Paste the Sheet 3 (54 : outside) and Sheet 4 (55 : inside / with double-face tape) to both sidefaces of Roller Developer at this time. NOTE You need to care about the direction of Roller Developer. The Electrode Plate side has 3 ditches on the shaft, and the driving side has 2 ditches. (The shaft of the Electrode Plate side is longer than that of driving side.) Electrode Plate side Driving side 53 5355 543 ditches 2 ditches K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4623. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (11) to remove the Bracket 4 (12) and the Spring (56). 11 12 56K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4724. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (34) to remove the Bracket 5 (35) and the Spring (57). 25. Remove the Pan Head Screw (58 : 4x8) and the Flat Washer (59 : M4), and remove theBracket 6 Assembly (60) on the driving side. 34355758 34 60 5860 59K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4826. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (61 : E9) to remove the Thrust Washer (62 : 10.1x16x0.5) andBracket 7 Assembly (63) on the Electrode Plate side. 27. Remove the Regulation Roller (64). NOTE You need to care about the direction of Regulation Roller. The longer shaft should be on the driving side. Electrode Plate side Driving side 61626364 6461K105sm5e2b_USC 5-4928. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (65 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (66 : 12.2x20x0.5),Bearing (67) and Collar 2 (68) on the driving side. 29. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (69 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (70 : 12.2x20x0.5),Bearing (71) on the Electrode Plate side. 65 6667686970716569K105sm5e2b_USC 5-5030.Remove the Roller Supply (72) sliding to the arrow direction, and replace it with the new one. Paste the Sheet 5 (73 : outside) and Sheet 6 (74 : inside / with double-face tape) to both side faces of Toner Supply Roller at this time. 72 NOTE (1) You need to care about the direction of Developer Roller. The Electrode Plate side has 2 ditches on the shaft, and the driving side has 3 ditches. Electrode Plate side Driving side (2) There are Seal 4 (75) at both sides of the Roller Supply. Remove them from the old Roller Supply and then install them to the new Roller Supply. (Be careful not to dispose them.) 72 75 : Reuse74732 ditches3 ditches K105sm5e2b_USC 5-5131. Remove both the Seal L Assembly (74) and Seal R Assembly (75), and replace them withthe new one. 32. Put back all the parts in the reversed order. 747475 75K105sm5e3_USC 5-525. 2. 4 Replacement of Toner Supply Roller for Developer Unit (before S/N 10510001) 1.Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (2) to remove the Cover (3). NOTE (1)This section applies to sponge type Developer Unit (before S/N 10510001). (2)This section describes how to replace all of the following parts in one operation. A periodic replacement for them is recommended. (3)Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.ItemNumber of article Remarks Toner Supply Roller1 Sheet 52 Sheet 62 All of these parts are contained in Supply Roller Kit (Z050980030). 1332 K105sm5e3_USC 5-53 3.Disconnect the connector (4). 4.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (5) which fix the Hopper Assembly. 45 5K105sm5e3_USC 5-54 5.Remove the Hopper Assembly (6). 6.Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit. 6 NOTE Do not reuse the removed toner. K105sm5e3_USC 5-55 7.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) and 1 piece of 4x10 screw (8), and remove the Pin 4 (9),Collar (10) and Bracket 9 (11). 7 8 9 1011 98 7 NOTE The direction of Collar (10) is as shown. 1010 K105sm5e3_USC 5-56 8.Remove the Retaining Ring-E (12 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (13 : 8.1x14x0.5) andGear Helical 35T (14). 9.Remove the Retaining Ring-E (15 : E5) to remove Gear Helical 25T (16), ParallelPin (17 : 2.5 x 10) and Collar 3 (18). Also remove Gear Helical 30T (19) and Parallel Pin (20 : 3x16). 15 19161718202112 13141214 16 15K105sm5e3_USC 5-5710. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (22 : E7) to remove Thrust Washer (23 : 8.1x14x0.5), 28T Gear Assembly (24) and Collar (25). 11. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (26 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (27 : 12.2x20x0.5) andCounter Roller (28) on the driving side. 12. Remove 2 (or 3) pieces of 3x6 screw (29) to remove the Holder 2 Assembly (30). 22 2324 2526 27 28293022 26K105sm5e3_USC 5-5813. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (31), 1 piece of 4x12 screw (32) and 2 pieces of RetainingRing-E (33 : E10), and remove Collars (34) and Bracket 10 Assembly (35). 313334353234 NOTE The direction of Collars (34) is as shown. 343332 31 31K105sm5e3_USC 5-5914. Remove Gear Helical 32T (36), Gear Helical 24T (37) and Parallel Pins (38 : 3x16). 15.Also remove the Counter Roller (39) on the electrode plate side. 16. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (40 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (41 : 12.2x20x0.5),Bearing (42) and Collar 2 (43) on the driving side. 17. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (44 : E10) to remove Thrust Washer (45 : 12.2x20x0.5),Bearing (46) on the Electrode Plate side. 40 4142433637383637 39394445464044K105sm5e3_USC 5-6018.Remove the Roller Supply (47) sliding to the arrow direction, and replace it with the new one. Paste the Sheet 5 (48 : outside) and Sheet 6 (49 : inside / with double-face tape) to both side faces of Toner Supply Roller at this time. NOTE (1) You need to care about the direction of Developer Roller. The Electrode Plate side has 2 ditches on the shaft, and the driving side has 3 ditches. Electrode Plate side Driving side (2) There are Seal 4 (50) at both sides of the Roller Supply. Remove them from the old Roller Supply and then install them to the new Roller Supply. (Be careful not to dispose them.) 47 50 : Reuse48492 ditches3 ditches K105sm5e4_USC 5-615. 2. 5 Replacement of DC Motor 1.Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 2 (2). 2.Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (4), and then remove the motorassembly. 3.Pressing the stoppers (5) inside, remove the Joint R (6). 2 3 4 4 5 61 K105sm5e4_USC 5-62 4.Remove 3 pieces of 3x20 screw (7) to remove the Bracket 19 (8). Replace the DC Motor (9) with the new one. 897 K105sm5e4_USC 5-635. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1) 1.Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Disconnect the connector (2), and then remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (3) to remove the Sensor (4). Replace the Sensor (4) with the new one. 1243 K105sm5e4_USC 5-645. 2. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit) The Developer Unit is driven by the Gear Helical 34T on the machine and the Gear Helical 28T on the Developer Unit. There must be a little mechanical play between these gears. (In another word there must be a little space between them.) If there is no space between these gears, the gear may be broken. In this case it is necessary to add Adjustment Plates to keep a space. Not correct Correct Add Adjustment Plates. There is not enoughSome space is kept between space between gears. gears. (Gears may be broken) Refer to the next page how to add the Adjustment Plates. Gear Helical 34T Gear Helical 28T NOTE You do not have to adjust the space between gears basically as it has been adjusted in the factory. But please do it only when you replace the whole Developer Unit. K105sm5e4_USC 5-65 1.Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Remove 2 screws (2) to remove each Bracket 32 (3) on the left and Bracket 33 (4) on the right. You will find Adjustment Plate (5) and Adjustment Plate 2 (6). 12 3 2 4345 6K105sm5e4_USC 5-66 3.On the left side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate (5) as required, cover them withthe Bracket 32 (3), and then fix with 2 screws (2). NOTE The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine. Spacer Z053101200 (thickness is 0.05mm) Spacer 5 Z053101350 (0.1mm) Spacer 3Z053101330 (0.2mm) 235 K105sm5e4_USC 5-67 4.On the right side, add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate 2 (6) as required, cover them withthe Bracket 33 (4), and then fix with 2 screws (2). NOTE The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine. Spacer 2 Z053101210 (thickness is 0.05mm) Spacer 6 Z053101360 (0.1mm) Spacer 4Z053101340 (0.2mm) 236K105sm5e4_USC 5-68 5.Put back the Developer Unit (1) to the machine. 6.There is the Gear Helical 28T (7) on the Developer Unit side, and also there is the GearHelical 34T (8) on the machine side.(They are contacted each other when the Developer Unit is on the machine.) (The bottom of the Engine Unit) Holding the Gear Helical 28T (7) firmly with one hand, move the Gear Helical 34T (8) withanother hand whether there is any mechanical play between these gears. Hold the Gear Helical 28T with one hand. Move the Gear Helical 34T with another hand. 178 K105sm5e4_USC 5-69 7.There must be a little mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 34T (8).(In another word there must be a little space between them.) If the gear could not be moved at all when you check them on the former procedure 6, it meansthere is not enough space between gears. The gear may be broken in this case. In this case, add more Adjustment Plates by the way instructed at the procedures 3 and 4. Add Adjustment Plates There is not enoughThe space between gearsspace between gears. becomes wider. (Gears are not movable) (Gears become movable) K105sm5e4_USC 5-705. 2. 8 Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller If the pressure of Regulation Roller is weak, the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Developer Roller in the above procedure 27. Pressurize the Regulation Roller in the correct way as shown below in this case. (You will not be able to pressurize it successfully by the usual way of pressurization.) (Brush type Developer Unit is shown for illustration.) 1.On the right side (Electrode Plate side) ofthe unit, press and hold the Bracket 5 (1) tothe arrow direction completely, and fix it withthe screws (2). 2.On the left side of the unit (gear side), confirm that the Bracket 4 (3) is fixed with thescrews (4) being completely pressedto the arrow direction. Also confirm that the screw (5) is loosened and the Gear Helical 20T (6) is installed. 3.Fully press down and hold the top of the Bracket 4 (3). With holding, rotate the Developer Roller twice with the Developer Handle (7). Check that the toner layer on the Developer Roller gets thinner. 1 2234 4 5637 K105sm5e4_USC 5-71 4. Remove both the Retaining Ring-E (8) and the Gear Helical 20T (6). 5. Tighten the screw (5) to fix the Bracket 6 (9). 6. Reinstall the Gear Helical 20T (6) and the Retaining Ring-E (8). 6 & 8 8659 866 & 8K105sm5e5_USC 5-725. 3 Fuser Unit 5. 3. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 5 pieces of screw (2) which fix the Cover 3. 1 222K105sm5e5_USC 5-73 3.Remove the Cover 3 (3). 4.Disconnect 5 connectors (4). 5.There are 2 pieces of Bracket (5) on the back of the machine. Remove the upper 4x6 screw (6) and loosen the lower 4x6 screw (7), then turn the Bracket (5)as the following photo. 5 3445 6 7 K105sm5e5_USC 5-74 6.Close the Engine Unit. 6.Remove the Fuser Unit (8). 8 NOTE It is impossible to remove the Fuser Unit if the Engine Unit is open. K105sm5e5_USC 5-755. 3. 2 Replacement of Fuser Unit Components 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 5 pieces of screw (2) which fix the Cover 3. NOTE The following parts are Fuser Unit components. A periodic replacement for them is recommended. This section describes how to replace all of them in one sequent operation. Roller Fusing1 Bush2 Nail Stripping (Upper)13 Nail Lower6 All of these parts are contained in Fuser Maintenance Kit (Z050980060) 1 222K105sm5e5_USC 5-76 3.Remove the Cover 3 (3). 4.Disconnect 5 connectors (4). 5.Open the Cover Assembly (5) 5 344K105sm5e5_USC 5-77 6.Remove the 4x6 screw (6) to remove the Plate 2 (7) on the right of machine. 7.Remove the Cover Assembly (5). 5 67 NOTE (1)Please remove the Plate 2 (7) while holding the Cover Assembly. Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. (2)There is the Plate on the left side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate 2. You may remove it instead of Plate 2 (7). K105sm5e5_USC 5-78 8.Remove the 4x6 screw (8) to remove each Nail Stripping Assembly (9). 9.Disassemble the Nail Stripping Assembly as the following photo. Replace the Nail Stripping (10) with the new one. 10. There are 2 pieces of Bracket (11) on the back of the machine. Remove the upper 4x6 screw (12) and loosen the lower 4x6 screw (13), then turn theBracket (11) as the following photo. 8 9 911 11 1213 10 K105sm5e5_USC 5-7911. Close the Engine Unit. 12. Remove the Fuser Unit (14) from the machine. 1414 NOTE It is impossible to remove the Fuser Unit if the Engine Unit is open. K105sm5e5_USC 5-8013. Loosen the 4x6 screw (15), and then remove the Cover 4 (16) on the connector side. (Connector side) 14. Loosen the 4x6 screw (17), and then remove the Cover 5 (18) on the connector side. (Gear side) NOTE Make sure to fit the hook (19) of eachCover 4 (16) and Cover 5 (18) to the notch (20)when reassemble. 15 1617 18 1920 1618K105sm5e5_USC 5-8115. Disconnect the connectors (21) at both sides. Remove the 4x6 screws (22) to remove the Heater Lamp Holders (23) (Connector side) (Gear side) 2121 22232223K105sm5e5_USC 5-8216. Carefully pull out the Lamp (24). 17. Open the Wire Saddle (25) to release the wires. (Connector side) 18. Remove the 3x6 screw (26) to release the Holder 5 (27). (Connector side) 24 24 25 26 27 NOTE (1) You do not have to care about the direction (left and right) of the Lamp. (2) Do not touch the glass part of the Lamp with bare hand. K105sm5e5_USC 5-8319. Loosen the 4x6 screw (28) on the connector side to release the Cover 2 (29). (Connector side) 20. Also loosen the 4x6 screw (30) on the gear side to release the Cover 1 (31). (Gear side) 28 3029 31 K105sm5e5_USC 5-8421. Remove the 4x6 screw (32) to remove the Bracket 6 (33) on the connector side. (Connector side) 22. Remove the 4x6 screw (34) to remove the Bracket 5 (35) on the connector side. (Gear side) NOTE When reassemble, make sure to slide eachBracket 6 (33) and Bracket 5 (35) fully to thearrow direction. The folded plate part (36) must be fitted into thenotch as the right photo. 3234333536 NotchK105sm5e5_USC 5-8523. Open the Fuser Upper Unit (37), and then bring it up to separate from the Fuser Lower Unit. 24. Remove the Retaining Ring-E (38 : E7) to remove the Gear 28T (39). 37 37373839K105sm5e5_USC 5-8625. On the gear side, remove the KL Clip (40) and then remove Pin 11 (41), Gear 48T (42)and Bush (43). Replace the Bush (43) with the new one. (Gear side) 26. On the connector side, remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (44) to remove Collar (45) and Bush (46). Replace the Bush (47) with the new one. (Connector side) NOTE Please fit the projected part (47) of the Bush tothe notch (48) at the time of reassembly. 40 4142434444454647 48 K105sm5e5_USC 5-8727. Remove the Roller Fusing (49), and replace it with the new one. 28. Remove the 4x6 screws (50) at both sides. 29. Remove the Guide Plate 2 Assembly (51). 495050 51 NOTE You do not have to care about the direction (left and right) of the Roller Fusing. K105sm5e5_USC 5-8830. Remove the 4x6 screw (52) to remove each Nail Lower Assembly (53). 31. Rotate the Nail Lower (54) quarter evolution, and then remove it from the bracket. Replace the Nail Lower (54) with the new one. 32. Replace all the parts in reverse order. 52 5354K105sm5e6_USC 5-895. 3. 3 Replacement of Roller Pressure 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 5 pieces of screw (2) which fix the Cover 3. 3.Remove the Cover 3 (3). 1 2223K105sm5e6_USC 5-90 4. Disconnect 5 connectors (4). 5.Open the Cover Assembly (5) 6.Remove the 4x6 screw (6) to remove the Plate 2 (7) on the right of machine. 5 67 NOTE (1)Please remove the Plate 2 (7) while holding the Cover Assembly. Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. (2)There is the Plate on the left side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate 2. You may remove it instead of Plate 2 (7). 44 K105sm5e6_USC 5-91 7.Remove the Cover Assembly (5). 8.There are 2 pieces of Bracket (8) on the back of the machine. Remove the upper 4x6 screw (9) and loosen the lower 4x6 screw (10), then turn the Bracket (8) as the following photo. 5 8 9 10 8 K105sm5e6_USC 5-92 9. Close the Engine Unit. 10.Remove the Fuser Unit (11) from the machine. 11. Open the Wire Saddle (12) to release the wires. (Connector side) 12 NOTE It is impossible to remove the Fuser Unit if the Engine Unit is open. 1111 K105sm5e6_USC 5-9312. Remove the 3x6 screw (13) to release the Holder 5 (14). (Connector side) 13. Remove the 4x6 screw (15) to remove the Bracket 6 (16) on the connector side. (Connector side) 13 1415 1614K105sm5e6_USC 5-9414. Remove the 4x6 screw (17) to remove the Bracket 5 (18) on the connector side. (Gear side) 15. Open the Fuser Upper Unit (20), and then bring it up to separate from the Fuser Lower Unit. 17 1820 2019 NOTE When reassemble, make sure to slide eachBracket 6 (16) and Bracket 5 (18) fully to thearrow direction. The folded plate part (19) must be fitted into thenotch as the right photo. 19 NotchK105sm5e6_USC 5-9516. Remove the 4x6 screws (21) at both sides. 17. Remove Guide Plate 2 Assembly (22). 2121 2222 K105sm5e6_USC 5-9618. Remove the 4x6 screws (23) to remove the Guide Plate (24). 19. Remove the Roller Pressure Assembly (26). 19. Remove the Retaining Ring-C (27 : C15) to remove the Collars (28) and Bearings (29) fromboth sides. Replace the Roller Pressure (30) with the new one. NOTE 4x6 screws (23) are attached with the Collar (25). 2323 242625 27 292830K105sm5e6_USC 5-975. 3. 4 Replacement of Thermistors 1.Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5. 3. 1Removal of theFuser Unit] on the page 5-74. 2.Remove the Clump (2) removing the 4x6 screw. Also open the Wire Saddle (3) to release the wires. 3.Pull out 2 connectors (4) from the Holder 5 (5). 4.Remove 3 pieces of Wire Stopper Brackets (6)removing 1 piece of 4x6 screw for each. 1 2 3 4 65K105sm5e6_USC 5-98 5.Remove the 4x6 screw (7) to remove each Bracket Assembly (8) with Thermistor. 6.Remove the 3x8 screw (9) to remove the Thermistor (10). Replace the Thermistor (10) with the new one. NOTE Be careful of the direction of Thermistor whenreassemble. The projection (11) nearer to the harness shouldbe inserted to the positioning hole (12). 7 8891011K105sm5e6_USC 5-995. 3. 5 Replacement of Thermostat 1.Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5. 3. 1Removal of theFuser Unit] on the page 5-74. 2.Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2) to remove the Holder (3) with the Thermostat. 3.Remove 2 pieces of 3x4 screw (4) to remove the Thermostat (5). Replace the Thermostat (5) with the new one. 2 34 51 K105sm5e6_USC 5-1005. 3. 6 Replacement of Exit Sensor 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 5 pieces of screw (2) which fix the Cover 3. 3.Remove the Cover 3 (3). 1 2223K105sm5e6_USC 5-101 4.Open the Cover Assembly (4) 5.Remove the 4x6 screw (5) to remove the Plate 2 (6) on the right of machine. 6.Remove the Cover Assembly (4). 4 4 56 NOTE (1)Please remove the Plate 2 (6) while holding the Cover Assembly. Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. (2)There is the Plate on the left side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate 2. You may remove it instead of Plate 2 (6). K105sm5e6_USC 5-102 7.Disconnect the connector (7), and then remove the screw (8) to remove the Exit SensorAssembly (9). 8.Pressing the stoppers (10) inside, remove the Exit Sensor (11) from the bracket. Replace the Exit Sensor (11) with the new one. 7 8 910 11K105sm5e7_USC 5-1035. 4 Roll Deck 5. 4. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 12K105sm5e7_USC 5-104 3.Remove the Cover 1 (3). NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part (4) to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1 (3). 3 4K105sm5e7_USC 5-105 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (5). 5.Remove the Cover 3 (6). NOTE (1)Be careful not to catch the wires of CutterMotor when you put back the Cover 3 (6). (2)Make sure that the step part (7) on the lowerside of the Cover 3 (6) is inside of theplate (8). 5 578 6 K105sm5e7_USC 5-106 6.Disconnect the connector (9) of the Cutter Motor. 7.Remove the 4x6 screws (10) at both sides. 9 1010K105sm5e7_USC 5-107 8.Remove the Cutter Assembly (11), and then replace it with the new one. NOTE (1)Put the Cutter Assembly with the Cutter Motor up. If you put it with the Cutter Motor down, you will break the Cutter Motor Harness. GoodNo good (2)There is the Height Guide (12) on the right side. Please fix the Cutter Assembly aligning the plate (13) and the central line of HeightGuide (12) each other. 11 1213Harness may be broken. K105sm5e7_USC 5-1085. 4. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3, CL4 & CL5) of Roll 1 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 12K105sm5e7_USC 5-109 3.Remove the Cover 1 (3). 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (5). NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part (4) to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1 (3). 3 45 5K105sm5e7_USC 5-110 5.Remove the Cover 3 (6). NOTE (1)Be careful not to catch the wires of CutterMotor when you put back the Cover 3 (6). (2)Make sure that the step part (7) on the lowerside of the Cover 3 (6) is inside of theplate (8). 78 6 K105sm5e7_USC 5-111 6.Disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Grip Ring (10) to remove the Clutch (11 : CL3). Replace the Clutch (11 : CL3) with the new one. 7.Disconnect the connector (12), and then remove the Grip Ring (13) to remove the Clutch (14 : CL4). Replace the Clutch (14 : CL4) with the new one. 8.Disconnect the connector (15), and open the WireSaddles (16) to release the wires. 9.Remove 4x6 the screw (17) to remove the Bracket 8 (18), Bush (19) and Clutch (20 : CL5). Replace the Clutch (20 : CL5) with the new one. 911 12 1314 15 1617 18192010K105sm5e7_USC 5-1125. 4. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6 & CL7) of Roll 2 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 122K105sm5e7_USC 5-113 3.Remove the Cover 7 (3). 4.Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove the Grip Ring (7) to remove the Clutch (8 : CL6). Replace the Clutch (8 : CL6) with the new one. NOTE Make sure that the step part (4) on the lower side of the Cover 7 (3) is inside of the plate (5). 3 45 67 8 K105sm5e7_USC 5-114 5.Disconnect 2 connectors (9), and remove the 4x6 screw (10). Pull out the Bracket 8 (11) from the shaft. 6.Pull out both the Bush (12) and the Clutch (13 : CL7). Replace the Clutch (13 : CL7) with the new one. 910 11 12 12 13 K105sm5e7_USC 5-1155. 4. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt (480) for Roll 2 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 12K105sm5e7_USC 5-116 3.Remove the Cover 1 (3). 4.Remove 9 pieces of 4x6 screw (5). NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part (4) to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1 (3). 3 4555 5K105sm5e7_USC 5-117 5.Remove the Cover 3 (6) and the Cover 7 (7). NOTE (1)Be careful not to catch the wires of CutterMotor when you put back the Cover 3 (6). (2)Make sure that the step part (8) on the lower side of each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 7 (7) isinside of the plate (9). Cover 3s sideCover 7s side 8 9 89 67 K105sm5e7_USC 5-118 6.Loosen the 4x6 screw (10) to make the Pulley 3 (11) movable. Also loosen the upper 4x6 screw (12) and remove the lower 4x6 screw (13) to make theBracket 17 Assembly (14) movable. Remove the Timing Belt 480 (15) and replace it with the new one. 1012 13 111415 15 NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tension. As the Spring 7 (16) gives a proper tension to the Timing Belt 480, tighten the screw (10). 16 10K105sm5e7_USC 5-1195. 4. 5 Replacement of Timing Belt (480) for Roll 1 1.Remove the Cutter Assembly (1) making reference to [5. 4. 1Replacement of CutterAssembly] on the page 5-105. 2.Disconnect 5 connectors (2), open 5 Wire Saddles (3), and then put the harness (4) aside. 3.Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (5) to remove the Bracket (6). 1 6 22 3 3 45 5K105sm5e7_USC 5-120 4.Remove the Spring Coil (7). 5.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8), and then pull out the Bracket 13 (9). 6.Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (10) to remove the Bracket 9 (11). 78 910 1110 K105sm5e7_USC 5-121 7.Loosen the 4x6 screw (12), slide the Pulley 3 (13) to the arrow mark, and then remove the Timing Belt 480 (14). Replace the Timing Belt 480 (14) with the new one. 12 1314 NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tension. As the Spring Coil 6 (15) gives a proper tension to the Timing Belt 480, tighten the screw (12). 12 15K105sm5e7_USC 5-1225. 4. 6 Replacement of Timing Belt (330) 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Remove the Retaining Ring-E (2 : E7) to remove the Collar (3). 3.Remove the Timing Belt 330 (4), and replace it with the new one. 2 3 41K105sm5e7_USC 5-1235. 4. 7 Replacement of Timing Belt (753) 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Loosen the 4x6 screw (2). 21K105sm5e7_USC 5-124 3.Pressing down the Pulley 3 (3), remove the Timing Belt 753 (4). Replace the Timing Belt 753 (4) with the new one. 3 4 NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tension.As the Spring 7 (5) gives a proper tension to the Timing Belt 753, tighten the screw (2). 25 K105sm5e8_USC 5-1255. 4. 8 Replacement of Sensors (PH6, PH7 & PH9) 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Remove both Spool Assemblies (2). 3.Remove the 4x6 screw (3) to remove the Bracket 5 (4). Also remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (5) to remove the Bracket 4 (6). 2 3 5 461K105sm5e8_USC 5-126 4.Disconnect the connectors (7) and remove the 3x12 screws (8) to remove each Sensor (9 : PH6 & PH7). Replace each Sensor (9 : PH6 & PH7) with the new one. 5.Remove the 4x6 screw (10) to remove the Bracket 20 (11). 6.Disconnect the connectors (12) and remove the 3x12 screws (13) to remove the Sensor (14 : PH9). Replace the Sensor (14 : PH9) with the new one. 8 877 11121314 9 10PH6 PH7 K105sm5e8_USC 5-1275. 4. 9 Replacement of Sensors (PH8 & PH10) 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 12K105sm5e8_USC 5-128 3.Remove the Cover 1 (3). 4.Remove both Spool Assemblies (5). 5.Remove 9 pieces of 4x6 screw (6). NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part (4) to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1 (3). 463 5 666 K105sm5e8_USC 5-129 6.Remove the Cover 3 (7) and the Cover 7 (8). NOTE (1)Be careful not to catch the wires of CutterMotor when you put back the Cover 3 (7). (2)Make sure that the step part (9) on the lower side of each Cover 3 (7) and Cover 7 (8) isinside of the plate (10). Cover 3s sideCover 7s side 9 91010 78 K105sm5e8_USC 5-130 7.Disconnect the connectors (11). 8.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (12) to remove the Cover 5 (13). Also remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (14) to remove the Cover 8 (15). 9.Remove the 4x6 screw (16) to remove each Bracket 12 (17). 10. Pressing the stoppers (18) inside, remove each Sensor (19 : PH8 & PH10). Replace the Sensor (19 : PH8 & PH10) with the new one. 111112 13 14 15 16 17 1819K105sm5e8_USC 5-1315. 4.10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater 1.Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2.Remove both Spool Assemblies (2). 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (3). 12 33 K105sm5e8_USC 5-132 4.Remove each Cover 2 (4). 5.Disconnect the connectors (5) and remove 4x6 screws (6), and then remove each Dehumidify Heater (7). Replace the Dehumidify Heater (7) with the new one. 46 567 K105sm5e9_USC 5-1335. 4.11 Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit (Optional in USA) 5. 4. 11. 1 Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z058080020) 1.Confirm the following parts are included in the kit. ItemNumber of articleItemNumber of article Cover 6 Assembly1Cover 4 Assembly1 Case Assembly1Seal1 Seal 22Switch Label Label 1 1 Bracket 23 Assembly1Bracket Connector 2 Assembly1 Cover1Switch1 K105sm5e9_USC 5-134 ItemNumber of articleItemNumber of article Relay1Bush2 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw2Snap Band4 4x6 Bind Screw (Fe+Ni) Tooth Washer 2 2 4x6 Bind Screw20 3x6 Bind Screw5Wire Saddle1 K105sm5e9_USC 5-135 2.Pull up the Lever (1), and draw out the Roll Deck (2). 3.There are 6 screw holes (3) inside of the machine. Put 3 pieces of 4x6 bind screw (4) to the upper 3 screw holes. 1 NOTE (1) Do not tighten the screws but loosen them as far as possible at this time, because youwill hang the Cover 4 Assembly to these screws on the next procedure. (2) The lower 3 screws holes should be empty at this time. You will put the screws there on the later procedure.2334empty K105sm5e9_USC 5-136 4.Hang the Cover 4 Assembly (5) to 3 pieces of 4x6 bind screws you have put at the formerprocedure 3. 5.Put 3 more pieces of 4x6 screws (4) to the lower 3 pieces of screw holes. Then tighten 6 pieces of 4x6 screws (4) to fix the Cover 4 Assembly (5). NOTE There are 3 pieces of open screw holes (6) on the Cover 4 Assembly (5). Please fit these open screw holes (6) to the 4x6 bind screws (4). 55 46 445 5 K105sm5e9_USC 5-137 6.Install the Cover 6 Assembly (7) to the plate underthe Roll Deck with 3 pieces of 3x6 bind screws (8). 7787 K105sm5e9_USC 5-138 7.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (10), and remove the Cover 2 (11). NOTE Install the Cover 6 with its sponge side (9)directing upside as the right photo. 910 11 K105sm5e9_USC 5-139 8.Put the Case Assembly (12). NOTE Insert the connector (13) of the Case Assembly under the plate. 12 1213 K105sm5e9_USC 5-140 9.Fix the Case Assembly (12) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (14) and 8 pieces of4x6 Bind Screw (15). 10. Replace the Cover 2 (11). 1414151511K105sm5e9_USC 5-14111. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 Bind Screw (16), and remove the Cover 9 (17). 12. Fit 2 pieces of Bush (18) to the square holes on the right. 161717 1818 K105sm5e9_USC 5-14213. Fit 4 pieces of Snap Band (19) to the concerning holes on the Slide Rail. Also fit the Wire Saddle (20) to the Side Plate. 14. Install the Bracket 23 Assembly (21) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Bind Screw (22). 19 1920 192021 2122K105sm5e9_USC 5-14315. Put the harness (23) through the square hole, from the upper side to the bottom side. 16. Put the harness (23) through the square hole, from the bottom side to the upper side. 17. There are connectors J109 (24) and J125. Connect the connector J109 (24) to the Dehumidify Heater, and hold the harness with theWire Saddle (20). NOTE Another connector J125 will be used if you install 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit. 23 2323 23 24 2420K105sm5e9_USC 5-14418. Install the Cover (25) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Bind Screw (26) to hide the harness. 19. Tie the Harness firmly with Snap Bands (19). 20. Replace the Cover 9 (17). 25 2526 25 1919 1717 K105sm5e9_USC 5-14521. Pull up the Levers (27) to open the Engine Unit. (Please leave the Roll Deck open.) 22. Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 Bind Head Screw (28). 23. Remove the Right Side Cover (29). 27 2828 2829K105sm5e9_USC 5-14624. Cut off the following part (30) of the Right Side Plate to make a notch for the DehumidifyHeater Switch. 25. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 Bind Screw (31) to remove the Cover 5 (32). 303132 K105sm5e9_USC 5-14726. Install the Bracket Connector 2 Assembly (33) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Bind Screws (34). 27. Apply both the Switch Label (35) and Label (36). After that fit the Switch (37) to the square hole. (The white dot should be upside.) 33 3334353637 35 36 37K105sm5e9_USC 5-14828. Put all the harness (38) of the Bracket Connector 2 Assembly through the square hole (39),from the inside to the out side. 29. Connect the connectors (40). 30. Fix the Ground Wires with 2 pieces of Tooth Washer Screw (41) 383940 41 K105sm5e9_USC 5-14931. There are 2 Relay Cables (42) to which nothing isconnected. Release them from the Edge Saddle. 34. Connect the above mentioned Relay Cables (42) to the Relay (43). Also connect 2 more Relay Cables (44) which come from the Bracket Connector 2 Assembly. 35. Fix the Relay (43) with 2 pieces of 3x6 Bind Screw (45) NOTE You need to connect each Relay Cable to the designated terminal. Refer to the following picture. RY2-5 RY2-1 RY2-2 RY2-4 4243 4244 4343 45 4543 K105sm5e9_USC 5-15036. Replace the Cover 5 (32). 37. Replace the Right Side Cover (29). Close the Engine Unit. 38. Apply the Seal (46) to the upper edge of Roll Deck Cover. Also apply 2 pieces of Seal 2 (47) to both side edges. 46 47 3229464747K105sm5e9_USC 5-1515. 4. 11. 2 Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z058080050) 1.Confirm the following parts are included in the kit. ItemNumber of articleItemNumber of article Cover 51Case Assembly1 AC Paper Harness 21Bush1 Cover 24x6 Bind Screw10 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw23x6 Pan Head Screw4 2.Pull up the Lever (1), and draw out the Roll Deck (2). 1 2K105sm5e9_USC 5-152 3.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (3), and remove the Cover 2 (4). 4.Put the Case Assembly (5). NOTE Insert the connector (6) of the Case Assembly under the plate. 3 4 55 6 K105sm5e9_USC 5-153 5.Fix the Case Assembly (6) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (7) and 8 pieces of4x6 Bind Screw (8). 8 877K105sm5e9_USC 5-154 6.Fix the Cover 5 (9) under the under the Case Assembly with 4 pieces of 3x6 Pan HeadScrew (10). 9 1091010K105sm5e9_USC 5-155 6.Replace the Cover 2 (4). 7.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 Bind Screw (11) to remove the Cover (12). 8.Fit the Bush (13) to the square hole (14) from rear to front. 4 12 11 12 13 14 13K105sm5e9_USC 5-156 9.Connect the AC Paper Harness 2 (15) to the connector (16). 10. Connect J114 side (18) of the AC Paper Harness 2 to the Dehumidify Heater. NOTE There are labels at both sides of the AC PaperHarness 2. Please connect J125 side (17) to the connector. 15 15 1615 17 18 K105sm5e9_USC 5-15711. Install the Cover 2 (19) with 2 pieces of 4x6 Bind Screw (20) to hide the harness. 12. Finally replace the Cover (12) to hide the harness. 19 1920 19 12 12 K105sm5eA_USC 5-1585. 4.12 Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit (Optional in USA) It is possible to install two Roll Deck Units to the KIP 3000 in maximum. If your KIP 3000 is installed with only one unit, it is possible to add one more unit optionally. 1. Confirm that Roll Deck 2 Kit includes the following parts. Roll Deck 2 Kit ItemPart nameNumber of articleItemPart nameNumber of article 1Roll Deck 2 Assembly17Plate 9 Assembly 11 2Roll Deck 2 Drive Assembly18Plate 9 Assembly 21 3Spool Assembly19Bracket 17 Assembly1 4Timing Belt 753110Spring 72 5Timing Belt 4801114x6 Tooth Washer Screw2 6Cover 71124x6 Bind Screws11 NOTE After installing the Kit it is necessary to make the KIP 3000 recognize the Roll Deck 2 in the Service Mode, which you can do in the Item Number 058 of the Adjustment Mode. Refer to [8.5.4.29Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)] on the page 8-56. 1 3 2 45 679 11 8 1012 K105sm5eA_USC 5-1592.Remove both Cover 2 (1) and Cover 3 (2) making reference to [5. 1. 1Removal of SideCovers] on the page 5-3. Close the Engine Unit. 3.Draw out the Roll Deck (3). 4.Remove the lower 4x6 screws (4) and loosen the upper 4x6 screws (5) at both sides. 1234 : Remove5 : Loosen4 : Remove5 : LoosenK105sm5eA_USC 5-160 5.Rotate both the Brackets 26 (6) in a 180 degrees arc as the arrow mark. NOTE This is the limited position of Bracket 26 (6). You can not open the Roll Deck so widely in thissituation because the Stopper restricts to do so. This is the free position of Bracket 26 (6). You can open the Roll Deck widely in thissituation. 6 Limited position Free position K105sm5eA_USC 5-161 6.Fix the Brackets 26 (6) at the free position with the 4x6 screws (4) and (5) you have removedor loosened at the former step 3. NOTE Please note that the position of 4x6 screws (4) varies if you change from limited position to free position. 4 5 45K105sm5eA_USC 5-162 7.Mount the Roll Deck 2 Assembly (7) onto the Rails (8). 8.Fix the Roll Deck 2 Assembly to both Rails with 2 pieces of 4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (9). 7 789 9K105sm5eA_USC 5-163 9.Loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (10), and then remove the Cover 1 (11). 10.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (12), and thenremove the Cover 3 (13). 11. Joint both the Roll Deck 1 Assembly and Roll Deck 2 Assembly with 2 pieces of 4x6screw (14). 12121311 10 14 14K105sm5eA_USC 5-16412. Mount the Roll Deck 2 Drive Assembly (15) onto the Roll Deck. 13. Fix the Roll Deck 2 Drive Assembly (15) with 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (16), 14. Attach the Bracket 17 Assembly (17) with 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (18). 15 1515 16 16171718 18 K105sm5eA_USC 5-16515. Attach the Plate 9 Assembly 1 (19) with one piece of 4x6 Bind Screw (20). Then hook the Spring 7 (21). NOTE (1)Do not tighten the screw (20) at this time because the Plate 9 Assembly 1 (19) must bemovable when you stretch the Belt in the next step. (2)Plate 9 Assembly 1 and Plate 9 Assembly 2look similar, but you can distinguish betweenthem because the Plate 9 Assembly 1 has alonger shaft than Plate 9 Assembly 2. Plate 9 Assembly 1 (Longer shaft) Plate 9 Assembly 2 (Shorter shaft) 19212021 19 K105sm5eA_USC 5-16616. Stretch the Timing Belt 480 (22) between gears. Then, tighten the 4x6 screw (20) to fix the Plate 9 Assembly 1. NOTE (1)If it is hard to stretch the Timing Belt 480 (22), loosen the upper one of screw (18) andremove the lower one (18) to make theBracket 17 Assembly (17) movable. You will be able to stretch the belt if you doso. (2)You do not have to adjust the belt tensionespecially. As the Spring 7 (21) gives enough tension tothe Timing Belt 480, just tighten thescrew (20). 22 20181822202117K105sm5eA_USC 5-16717. Attach the Plate 9 Assembly 2 (23) with the 4x6 screw (24). Then hook another piece of Spring 7 (25). NOTE (1)Do not tighten the screw (24) at this time because the Plate 9 Assembly 2 (23) must bemovable when you stretch the Belt in the next step. (2)Plate 9 Assembly 1 and Plate 9 Assembly 2look similar, but you can distinguish betweenthem because the Plate 9 Assembly 1 has alonger shaft than Plate 9 Assembly 2. Plate 9 Assembly 1 (Longer shaft) Plate 9 Assembly 2 (Shorter shaft) 2323252524K105sm5eA_USC 5-16818. Stretch the Timing Belt 753 (26) among gears and pulleys. Then, tighten the screw (24) to fix the Plate 9 Assembly 2. 19. Put back the Cover 3 (13). NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tensionespecially. As the Spring 7 (25) gives enough tension tothe Timing Belt 753, just tighten the screw (24). 2626 24132425 K105sm5eA_USC 5-16920. Attach the Cover 7 (27) with 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (28). 21. Set the Roll Spool (31) to the Roll Deck Unit finally. NOTE Make sure that the step part (29) on the lower side of the Cover 7 (27) is inside of theplate (30). 2727 2828312930 K105sm5eB_USC 5-1705. 5 Photoconductive Drum 5. 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove the 4x6 screws (2) at both sides. 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (3) at both sides. 1 223 3K105sm5eB_USC 5-171 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). 6.Close the Engine Unit. 4 45 6K105sm5eB_USC 5-172 7.Remove the Guides 3 (7). 8.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 9.Disconnect the connector (10), and open the WireSaddle (11) to release the harness. 10. Open the Cover 4 (12). 7889 1112 10K105sm5eB_USC 5-17311. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). 12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. 13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Lock position Unlock position 1516 17141313 1413 13K105sm5eB_USC 5-17414. Open the LED Head Frame (18). 15. Pull up the Lever 2 (20) to open the Engine Unit. NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if youwill close the LED Head Frame. 1920 18 K105sm5eB_USC 5-17516. Remove the 4x6 screw (21), and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23). NOTE The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you openthe Engine Unit. It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit. 21 23222423 K105sm5eB_USC 5-17617. Remove the Collar (25) from the left Drum Shaft. 18. There are 2 pieces of screw (26) on the left which fix the Block (27). Loosen these screws and rotate the Block (27) as the arrow marks. 26 26 27 NOTE The new (spare) Drum Assembly does not include the Collar (25).So please reuse it. 25 K105sm5eB_USC 5-17719. Similarly loosen 2 pieces of screw (28) on the right and rotate the Block 2 (29) as thearrow marks. 20. Remove the Photoconductive Drum (30), and replace it with the new one. 28 282930 NOTE The Aluminium Block (27) and (29) maintain the focus of the LED Head. Therefore it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive Drum. Please fix them making reference to [5.5.2How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on thepage 5-178. K105sm5eB_USC 5-1785. 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft. As they maintain the focus of LED Head, it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive Drum. Aluminium Blocks Print out the Test Pattern No.3 to check if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct position. The density of halftone is uniform as the following left image if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct positions (focus is good). But the density of halftone is different among image blocks as the following right image if blocks are not fixed correctly (focus is not good). Good No good (Gray looks uniform)(Gray looks not uniform) Density of halftone is differentamong image blocks. If the focus of LED Head is not good, fix the Aluminium Blocks properly making reference to the next page. K105sm5eB_USC 5-179There are Aluminium Blocks (1) at both sides, and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (2). Left sideRight side Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly. a)Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left side first, and then that of the right side. b)When you tighten 2 screws (2) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the upper one first, and then the lower one. The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as A, B, Cand D necessarily. Left side Aluminium Blocks Right side Go to the next page as the above method is shown. Drum A B CD NOTE The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements. 122122 K105sm5eB_USC 5-180 1.Rotate the Left Aluminium Block (3) fully to the arrow direction (A) and also press it down asthe arrow (B), and then tighten the upper screws (4) firstly and then the lower one (5)secondary. Left side (Seen from the inside of machine)(Seen from the outside of machine) NOTE There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape notch. The LED focus will become defective if there is any space. CorrectIncorrect Space A B A B3345K105sm5eB_USC 5-181 2.Similarly rotate the Right Aluminium Block (6) fully to the arrow direction (C) and also press itdown as the arrow (D), and then tighten the upper screws (7) firstly and then the lower one (8)secondary. 3.Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform. If it is still not uniform, fix the Aluminium Blocks again. Good No good (Gray looks uniform)(Gray looks not uniform) C D CD6 687K105sm5eB_USC 5-1825. 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum 1.Remove the Photoconductive Drum from themachine making reference to [5. 5. 1Replacementof the Photoconductive Drum] on the page 5-170. 2.Wipe the surface of Photoconductive Drum with a dry cloth. 3.If the toner strongly sticks on the surface and it is impossible to remove it, wipe with the clothimpregnated with the alcohol. 4.After using the alcohol, wipe all surface of Drum with a cloth impregnated with water so thatthere should be no unevenness of cleaning. 5.Wipe all surface of Drum with a dry cloth, and dry the Drum leaving in a dark place for about10 minutes. 6.Put back the Drum to the machine. NOTE (1)A defective image may be printed right after the cleaning (about 10 to 20 sheets of A0),but it will be fixed naturally as the time passes. (2)Wipe the surface always to one direction. You will damage the Drum if you wipe in other ways. Good No goodNo goodNo good K105sm5eB_USC 5-1835. 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 6 pieces of 4x6 screw (2) which fix the Cover2. 2 21 2K105sm5eB_USC 5-184 3.Remove the Cover 2 (3). 4.Remove the Belt 4 (4). 34 NOTE Belt 4 is automatically unfastened if only you open the Engine Unit. K105sm5eC_USC 5-1855. 6 LED Head 5. 6. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove the 4x6 screws (2) at both sides. 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (3) at both sides. 1 223 3K105sm5eC_USC 5-186 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). 6.Close the Engine Unit. 4 45 6K105sm5eC_USC 5-187 7.Remove the Guides 3 (7). 8.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 9.Disconnect the connector (10), and open the WireSaddle (11) to release the harness. 10. Open the Cover 4 (12). 7889 1112 10K105sm5eC_USC 5-18811. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). 12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. 13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Lock position Unlock position 1516 17141313 1413 13K105sm5eC_USC 5-18914. Open the LED Head Frame (18). NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if youwill close the LED Head Frame. 1918 K105sm5eC_USC 5-19015. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right. 16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make thePlate (23) enough movable. 2021 21 NOTE You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is a part required only before the delivery of machine.22 23K105sm5eC_USC 5-19117. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block. Then remove the Image Corona Unit (25). 18. Disconnect 3 connectors (26). 24 2325 25 25 26K105sm5eC_USC 5-19219. Remove the screw (27) to remove the Bracket 2 (28). 20. Move the right end of LED Head Unit (29) a little to the front side, and then slide the whole unitto the right. Replace the LED Head Unit (29) with the new one. 29 27 28 2829 NOTE It is necessary to check and adjust the focus of LED Head after its replacement. Refer to [5. 6. 2LED focus adjustment] on the page 5-193. K105sm5eC_USC 5-1935. 6. 2 LED focus adjustment Please adjust the focus of LED Head after the replacement of LED Head. Also adjust it if you have lost the correct focus by some reason. Adjust the focus by the following 3 steps. (1)Check of the Test Pattern Image (2)Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks (3)Focus Adjustment with Spacers 5. 6. 2. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image Print out the Test Pattern No.3 in the Service Mode, and check its halftone image. If the density of halftone is uniform as the following left image, you do not have to make anything because the focus is correctly adjusted. But it is different among image blocks as the following right image, it is necessary to adjust the focus.Go to [5. 6. 2. 2Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks] on the next page in this case. Good No good (Adjustment is required.) Density of halftone is differentamong image blocks. K105sm5eC_USC 5-1945. 6. 2. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft, which adjust the distance between LED Head and Drum. If the LED focus is not correct, at first it is necessary to place them at the correct positions in the following way. Aluminium Blocks 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove the 4x6 screws (2) at both sides. 1 22K105sm5eC_USC 5-195 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (3) at both sides. 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). 6.Close the Engine Unit. 3 34 45 6K105sm5eC_USC 5-196 7.Remove the Guides 3 (7). 8.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 9.Disconnect the connector (10), and open the WireSaddle (11) to release the harness. 10. Open the Cover 4 (12). 7889 1112 10K105sm5eC_USC 5-19711. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). 12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. 13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Lock position Unlock position 1516 17141313 1413 13K105sm5eC_USC 5-19814. Open the LED Head Frame (18). 15. Pull up the Lever 2 (20) to open the Engine Unit. NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if youwill close the LED Head Frame. 1918 20 K105sm5eC_USC 5-19916. Remove the 4x6 screw (21), and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23). NOTE The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you openthe Engine Unit. It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit. 21 23222423 K105sm5eC_USC 5-20017. There are Aluminium Blocks (25) at both sides, and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (26). Left sideRight side Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly. a)Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left side first, and then that of the right side. b)When you tighten 2 screws (26) to fix each Aluminium Block, always tighten the upper one first, and then the lower one. The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. Tighten in the order as A, B, Cand D necessarily. Left side Aluminium Blocks Right side Go to the next page as the above method is shown. Drum A B CD NOTE The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements. 252626 252626K105sm5eC_USC 5-201 17-1.Rotate the Left Aluminium Block (27) fully to the arrow direction (A) and also press it down as the arrow (B), and then tighten the upper screws (28) firstly and then the lower one (29) secondary. Left side (Seen from the inside of machine)(Seen from the outside of machine) NOTE There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape notch. The LED focus will become defective if there is any space. CorrectIncorrect Space A B A B27272829K105sm5eC_USC 5-202 17-2.Similarly rotate the Right Aluminium Block (30) fully to the arrow direction (C) and also press it down as the arrow (D), and then tighten the upper screws (31) firstly and then the lower one (32) secondary. 18.Reassemble the machine in the reversed order. 19.Print out the Test Pattern No.3, and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform. Good No good (Gray looks uniform)(Gray looks not uniform) Density of halftone is different If it is still not uniform although you have fixed the Aluminium Blocks correctly, it is necessary to make focus adjustment with Spacers. Go to [5. 6. 2. 3Focus Adjustment with Spacers] on the next page in this case. C D CD 30 303132K105sm5eC_USC 5-2035. 6. 2. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers There may be the case that the focus of LED is not correct even if you have placed the Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft correctly. This is because the height of the LED is mechanically different between left and right by some reason. In this case adjust the height by adding or removing the Spacers. 1.Remove the Guides 3 (1). 2.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (2) to remove the Cover 10 (3). 3.Disconnect the connector (4), and open the WireSaddles (5) to release the harness. 1 2 23 45 K105sm5eC_USC 5-204 4.Open the Cover 4 (6). 5.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) and 2 pieces of washer screw (8). 6.Slide the Scanner Unit (9) fully backward. 69 877 87 7K105sm5eC_USC 5-205 7.There are 2 pieces of Stopper (10) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (11) and then slide the Stoppers (10) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Lock position Unlock position 10 11K105sm5eC_USC 5-206 8.Open the LED Head Frame (12). NOTE The Stopper 2 (13) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if youwill close the LED Head Frame. 1312 K105sm5eC_USC 5-207 9.There are Spacers (14) on each Aluminium Block at both sides. The height of the LED Head can be adjusted by adding more Spacer or removing some ofthem. Remove the screw (15), and remove all Spacers (14) at first. And then adjust the height of LED Head adding or removing the Spacers (14). NOTE (1)The number of Spacers initially installed is individually different machine to machine. (2)There are 3 kinds of spacers such as 0.1mm, 0.08mm and 0.05mm in thickness. Please find the best combination by making several times of trial. (3)Basically thinner Spacers (0.08mm &0.05mm ones) must be held between the0.1mm Spacer as the right picture. 1415 0.1mm 0.08mm & 0.05mm 1414 K105sm5eC_USC 5-208 NOTE (4)It is quite not clear which of addition or removal of Spacer is effective to solve the focus problem. (Even if the defective image caused by the focus problem looks same, for example, it is fixed by addition in some case but in another case it is fixed by removal. Only the way to find the best focus is just trial. Please try both removal and addition to find which way the image becomes better. After finding the better way, try several combinations of Spacers to find the best height. Removal of Spacer Addition of Spacer (Worse result) (Better result) Addition of Spacer is the better way. Try several combinations of Spacers by adding the Spacers gradually. K105sm5eD_USC 5-2095. 7 Image Corona 5. 7. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove the 4x6 screws (2) at both sides. 3.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (3) at both sides. 1 223 3K105sm5eD_USC 5-210 4.Remove 5 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 5.Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). 6.Close the Engine Unit. 4 45 6K105sm5eD_USC 5-211 7.Remove the Guides 3 (7). 8.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 9.Disconnect the connector (10), and open the WireSaddle (11) to release the harness. 10. Open the Cover 4 (12). 7889 1112 10K105sm5eD_USC 5-21211. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). 12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. 13. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides, which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Lock position Unlock position 1516 17141313 1413 13K105sm5eD_USC 5-21314. Open the LED Head Frame (18). NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if youwill close the LED Head Frame. 1918 K105sm5eD_USC 5-21415. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right. 16. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make thePlate (23) enough movable. 2021 21 NOTE You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly, because it is a part required only before the delivery of machine.22 23K105sm5eD_USC 5-21517. Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block. Move the right end of Image Corona (25) a little to the front side, and then slide the whole unitto the right. 24 2325 25 25 K105sm5eD_USC 5-2165. 7. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire 1.Remove the Image Corona Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 7. 1Removal ofthe Image Corona Unit] on the page 5-209. 2.Loosen the Set Screw (2) with hexagon wrench. The Block 3 (3) moves to the arrow mark and the Grid Plate is unfastened. 231 1K105sm5eD_USC 5-217 NOTE Check the following when reassembling. (1) The side edge of Block 3 (3) should stop at 0.5mm short of the side face (4) of the corona block for a proper tension. Rotate a hexagon wrench in either direction with pressing down Grid Plate (5). 0.5mm0.5mm (2) Carry Image Corona Unit (1) by both corona blocks so that Grid Plate (5) faces the floor. Make sure that Grid Plate (5) has no excess slack (in less than 1mm) on the middle of the housing. 5Correct: no slack in Grid PlateIncorrect: slack in Grid Plate553 45 3 5press down4 5 1 1K105sm5eD_USC 5-2183.Remove the Grid Plate (5). 4.Loosen 3 pieces of 3x6 screw (6), and then remove Corona Housing (7) and PlateElectrode (8). 5 67 8 NOTE If Grid Plate is dirty, wash it with the neutral detergent and then with water. Dry it well after washing. K105sm5eD_USC 5-219 5.Remove the Flush Head Screw (9), and remove each Cover (10) and Cover 2 (11). 6.Loosen the screws (12) to lower the Height Adjuster. (It becomes easy to remove the Corona Wire as it is unfastened by this treatment.) 99 11 10 1212 K105sm5eD_USC 5-220 7.Remove the Spring (13), and remove the Corona Wire (14). Replace the Corona Wire (14) with the new one. NOTE (1)Please keep 11mm between CoronaWire (14) and bottom plate of the Corona Unitafter the replacement. 11mm (2)Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of HeightAdjuster (15). Also fit the beads (16) into the correctpositions. 13 1415 16 K105sm5eE_USC 5-2215. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona 5. 8. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Holding both Corona Blocks (2), remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (3) from themachine. 1 22 K105sm5eE_USC 5-222 3 NOTE There is the Drum above the Transfer / Separation Corona. Do not touch it. K105sm5eE_USC 5-2235. 8. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires 1.Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1)making reference to [5. 8. 1Removal of theTransfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-212. 2.There are 5 pieces of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) on the housing. Remove them pressing the stoppers (4) with such tool as a screwdriver. 142 NOTE Do not replace the position of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) at the time of reassembly. 3 K105sm5eE_USC 5-224 3.Remove both Covers 3 (5) pulling their sides outward. 5 5K105sm5eE_USC 5-2254.Remove the Wire Springs (7), and remove the Corona Wires (8). Replace the Corona Wires (8) with the new ones. 7 8 78 NOTE (1)Keep a specified distance between each Corona Wire and bottom plate of the housing. There are 2 types of Tr/St Corona Assy, they differs from the position and the number ofplastic sheets on the housing. A specified distance depends on the Assy type. 1 sheet type 2 sheets type To adjust the distance, rotate the screws (9)with a flathead screwdriver. (2)Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of HeightAdjuster (10). Also fit the beads (11) into the correctpositions. 10 11 9Transfer Separation10mm 11mmTransfer Separation11mm 11mm K105sm5eE_USC 5-2265. 9 Engine Frame 5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 1.Open the Cover 4 (1). 2.Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free. 1 2 3 23K105sm5eE_USC 5-227 3.There are Pins (4) at both sides. Slide them inside to remove the Cover 4 (1). 4.Open the Bypass Feeder (5). 5.Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (6). 4 1 5 66K105sm5eE_USC 5-228 6.Close the Bypass Feeder, and then open the Developer Press Unit (7). 7.Disconnect the connector (8) and remove 3 pieces of screw (9), and remove the DC Motor (10). Replace the DC Motor (10) with the new one. 78 9 10K105sm5eE_USC 5-229 8.Remove the 4x6 screw (11), release the harness from the Edge Saddle (12), and disconnectthe connector (13). 9.Pressing the stoppers (14) with such tool as a screwdriver, remove the Developer PressSensor (15). Replace the Developer Press Sensor (15) with the new one. 11 1213 K105sm5eE_USC 5-2305. 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1) 1.Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 1Removal of theDeveloper Unit] on the page 5-8. 2.Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2), and then turn over the Bracket 11 (3). 12 3K105sm5eE_USC 5-231 3.Remove the screw (4) and disconnect the connector (5) to remove each Sensor (6 : ManualSet Sensor or Registration Sensor). Replace the Sensor (15) with the new one. 45 6 6K105sm5eE_USC 5-2325. 9. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6) 1.Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1Removal of theFuser Unit] on the page 5-72 2.Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 pieces of screw (3), and remove each Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6). Replace the Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6) with the new one. 1 234K105sm5eE_USC 5-2335. 9. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4) 1.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 10 (2). 2.Open the Cover Assembly (3). 3.Moving the stopper levers (4) to the inside, remove each Duct 5 (5) with Filter 2. 11 2 34 5 K105sm5eE_USC 5-234 4.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (6), and then slide the Duct 6 (7) to the left. 5.Remove 3 pieces of 4x35 screw (8). 6.Remove the Blower (9 : BL3 & BL4) moving as the following photos. 6 7 7 9 9 8 K105sm5eE_USC 5-2355.10 Inner Transport Unit 5.10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit 1.Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 3. 1Removal of theFuser Unit] on the page 5-72. 2.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 2 1 K105sm5eE_USC 5-236 3.Disconnect the connector on the left (3), and then remove the Inner Transport Unit (4). 3 4 K105sm5eE_USC 5-2375.10. 2Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt 1.Remove the Inner Transport Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.10. 1 Removalof the Inner Transport Unit] on the page 5-235. 2.There are Shafts (2) under the Belt (3). Remove these Shafts (2). 11 23K105sm5eE_USC 5-2383. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4). 4. Loosen 8 pieces of 4x6 screw (5). 5. Remove the Guide Plate(6). 6.Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (7) and disconnect the connector (8) to remove the Exit SensorAssembly (9). 4455 67 8 9 K105sm5eE_USC 5-2397.Pressing the Stoppers (10) inward, remove the Sensor (11) from the Sensor Bracket. Replace the Sensor (11) with the new one. 8.Remove 6 pieces of Retaining Ring-E and Bush (12 : E5). 10 1112 12K105sm5eE_USC 5-2409.Remove the Rollers (13), and remove the Belts (14). Replace the Belts (14) with the new ones. 1413 NOTE Be careful of the outside/inside of the Belt (14). The smooth and shiny side of it should be inside. Outside Inside K105sm5eF_USC 5-2415.11 Main Frame 5.11. 1Replacement of DC Motors (M1 & M2), Belt1 & Belt 3 1.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (1), loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2), and then remove theCover 15 (3). 2.Disconnect 4 connectors (4). 3.Pull up the Lever 2 (5) to open the Engine Unit. 45 1 2 3 K105sm5eF_USC 5-242 4.Remove 6 pieces of 4x6 screw (6) which fix the Cover 2. 5.Remove the Cover 2 (7). 6 667 K105sm5eF_USC 5-243 6.Loosen the 4x6 screw (8), move the Pulley 3 (9) toward the arrow mark, and then remove the Belt 1 (10). Replace the Belt 1 (10) with the new one. 89 10 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 1, do as follows. If you do not make the following works, the Belt 1 may slip because the tension is not correct. a)Giving the spring tension to the Belt 1, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. b)Turn on the machine, and then turn it off some seconds later. The Belt 1 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time. c)Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. The slack of Belt 1 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. Then tighten the screw again. K105sm5eF_USC 5-244 7.Loosen the 4x6 screw (11), move the Pulley 3 (12) toward the arrow mark, and then removethe Belt 3 (13). Replace the Belt 3 (13) with the new one. 11 13 12 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 3, do as follows. If you do not make the following works, the Belt 3 may slip because the tension is not correct. a)Giving the spring tension to the Belt 3, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. b)Turn on the machine, and then turn it off some seconds later. The Belt 3 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time. c)Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. The slack of Belt 3 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. Then tighten the screw again. K105sm5eF_USC 5-245 8.Remove 2 pieces of each Retaining Ring-E (E7) and Bush (14), remove the 4x6 screw (15),and then remove the Plate 7 (16). 141516K105sm5eF_USC 5-246 9.Loosen the 4x6 screw (17), move the Pulley 3 (18) toward the arrow mark, and then removeone more piece of Belt 1 (19). Replace the Belt 1 (19) with the new one. 17 1819 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 1, do as follows. If you do not make the following works, the Belt 1 may slip because the tension is not correct. a)Giving the spring tension to the Belt 1, tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. b)Turn on the machine, and then turn it off some seconds later. The Belt 1 is driven by the motor, and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time. c)Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. The slack of Belt 1 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. Then tighten the screw again. K105sm5eF_USC 5-24710. Remove 6 pieces of 4x10 screw (20) to remove the Plate 6 Assembly (21). 202021K105sm5eF_USC 5-24811. Remove the Set Screws (22) to remove each Pulley 5 (23) and Pulley 4 (24). 12. Remove 4 pieces of 4x10 screws (25) to remove each DC Motor (26 : Main) (27 : Fuser). Replace each DC Motor (26 & 27) with the new one. NOTE Keep 8.9mm between the bracket and each Pulley 5 (21) and Pulley 4 (22) at the time of reassembly. 8.9mm 8.9mm 22 23 24 26 2725 25 25 25 K105sm5eF_USC 5-2495.11. 2Replacement of Clutch (CL1) 1.Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2.Remove 6 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 5 2 22K105sm5eF_USC 5-250 3.Remove the Cover 2 (3). 4.Loosen the 4x6 screw (4), move the Pulley 3 (5) toward the arrow mark, and then remove the Belt 1 (6). Replace the Belt 1 (6) with the new one. 3 45 6K105sm5eF_USC 5-251 5.Remove 2 places each Retaining Ring-E (E7) and Bush (7), remove the 4x6 screws (8), andthen remove the Plate 8 (9). 6.Remove the Hex. Cap Screw (10) to removethe Pulley 13 (11). 7.Disconnect the connector (12), and remove the 4x6 screw (13) to remove both the Clutch (14)and the Bracket Clutch (15). Replace the Clutch (14) with the new one. 11 1112 13 14 107 89 K105sm5eF_USC 5-2525.11. 3Replacement of Blower (BL7) 1.Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (1), loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2), and then remove theCover 15 (3). 2.Disconnect the connector (4), remove the 4x6 screw (5), and then remove the BracketBlower (6). 3.Remove 3 pieces of 4x35 screw (8) to remove the Blower (9). Replace the Blower (9) with the new one. 9 8 45 61 2 3 K105sm5eG_USC 5-2535.12 Scanner Unit 5.12. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit 1.Remove the Guides 3 (1). 2.Remove 8 screws (2) on both front and rear side of the machine. 3.Remove Cover 14 (3). 1 22 3 K105sm5eG_USC 5-254 4.Remove 3 screws (4). 5.Remove Shield Cover N (5). 6.Remove 2 screws (6) to remove Cover 10 (7) 6 7 44 5 K105sm5eG_USC 5-255 7.Pull up Lever 2 (8) to open the Engine Unit. 8.Remove 5 screws (9). 8 999K105sm5eG_USC 5-256 9.Remove Cover 2 (10). 10. Open Cover 4 (11). 11. Remove 4 screws (12) to remove Bracket Right (13) on the right. 12. Remove 4 screws (14) to remove Bracket Left (15) on the left. 1112131214141510K105sm5eG_USC 5-25713. Loosen 4 screws (16) and remove 4 screws (17) to remove Cover 15 (18). 14. Disconnect the USB Connector (19) from the IPS, which runs from the Scanner Unit. 15. Open the Wire Saddles (20) to release the USB Cable (19). 16. Disconnect the connector (21), and open the WireSaddles (22) to release the USB Cable and theDC harness. 1617 1819 2019 20 21 22K105sm5eG_USC 5-25817. Close the Engine Unit. 18. Remove 4 screws (23) which fix the Scanner Unit. (Right side) (Left side) CAUTION Be sure to close the Engine Unit before removing the screws which fix the Scanner Unit. Otherwise the Scanner Unit may fall down and damage. 23 23 K105sm5eG_USC 5-25919. Remove the Scanner Unit (24) from the machine. CAUTION Please carry the Scanner Unit by 2 persons as it is heavy. 2424 K105sm5eH_USC 5-2605.12. 2Replacement of Motor 1.Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5.12. 1Removal of theScanner Unit] on the page 5-253. 2.Pull up the Levers (2) and open the Scanner Upper Unit. NOTE The Flap Stay (3) holds the Scanner Upper Unit when opened. If you will close the Scanner Upper Unit, move it a little to open side first, and then move toclose side. Move to open side first. Then move to close side. 1 2 23K105sm5eH_USC 5-261 3.Remove 4 pieces of 3x6 screw (4). 4.Remove P1 Sheet Guide (5). 5.Disconnect the connector (6) 445 6K105sm5eH_USC 5-262 6.Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove the Motor Assembly (8). Replace the Motor Assembly (8) with the new one. NOTE It is possible to adjust the tension of Belt 60S2M284 (9) by moving the motor left and right. (Screws (7) must be loosed at this time.) Prepare the Tension Gage (10) and the Scale (11) like the following photo, and adjust the tension so that the bend of belt becomes 3mm when 150gf +/-50g is given. Please satisfy the following requirements when you adjust the tension. 1.Confirm that the Belt 60S2M284 (9) and Motor Pulley are surely in gear with each other. If you adjust the tension although they are not in gear, the Belt 60S2M284 (9) may betoo much loosed as soon as you start machine operation. 2.Adjust the tension when the Scanner Upper Unit is closed. You can not adjust the tension properly if it is opened. 150gf +/-50g 3mm 7 8 89 710 11 K105sm5eH_USC 5-2635.12. 3Replacement of Belt 60S2M250 and Belt 60S2M284 1.Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5.12. 1Removal of theScanner Unit] on the page 5-253. 2.Loosen 2 piecers of screw (2), and then bring down the Tension Pulleys (3) to unfasten theBelt. 2331 K105sm5eH_USC 5-264 3.Remove the Belt 60S2N250 (4), and replace it with the new one. NOTE It is possible to adjust the tension of Belt 60S2M250 (4) by moving the Tension Pulleys (3) up and down. (Screws (2) must be loosed at this time.) Prepare the Tension Gage (5) and the Scale (6) like the following photo, and adjust the tension so that the bend of belt becomes 3mm when 150gf +/-50g is given. Please satisfy the following requirements when you adjust the tension. 1.Confirm that the Drive the Belt 60S2M250 (4) and Pulley Assemblies (7) are surely ingear with each other. If you adjust the tension although they are not in gear, the Belt 60S2M250 (4) may betoo much loosed as soon as you start machine operation. 2.Adjust the tension when the Scanner Upper Unit is closed. You can not adjust the tension properly if it is opened. 150gf +/-50g 3mm 4 23 3 772 5 6 K105sm5eH_USC 5-265 4.Loosen 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8), and then slide the Motor Pulley (9) to the arrow direction tounfasten the Belt. 5.Remove the Belt 60S2M284 (10), and replace it with the new one. NOTE It is possible to adjust the tension of Belt 60S2M284 (10) by moving the Motor Pulley (9) left and right. (Screws (8) must be loosed at this time.) Adjust the tension so that the bend of belt becomes 3mm when 150gf +/-50g is given. Please satisfy the following requirements when you adjust the tension. 1.Confirm that the Drive the Belt 60S2M284 (10) and Motor Pulley (9) are surely in gearwith each other. If you adjust the tension although they are not in gear, the Belt 60S2M284 (10) may betoo much loosed as soon as you start machine operation. 2.Adjust the tension when the Scanner Upper Unit is closed. You can not adjust the tension properly if it is opened. 8 9 150gf +/-50g 3mm 810 109K105sm5eH_USC 5-2665.12. 4Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 2 1.Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5.12. 1Removal of theScanner Unit] on the page 5-253. 2.Pull up the Levers (2) and open the Scanner Upper Unit. NOTE The Flap Stay (3) holds the Scanner Upper Unit when opened. If you will close the Scanner Upper Unit, move it a little to open side first, and then move toclose side. Move to open side first. Then move to close side. 1 2 23 NOTE If you will clean the Drive Rollers 1 and 2, use alcohol. Water is not recommended because it is not good for the rubber roller. K105sm5eH_USC 5-267 3.Remove the screw (4) of the Flap Stay, and then open the Scanner Upper Unit fully. 4.Loosen 2 pieces of screw (5), and then bring down the Tension Pulleys (6) to unfasten theBelt. 56 64 K105sm5eH_USC 5-268 5.Remove the Belt 60S2N250 (7). NOTE It is possible to adjust the tension of Belt 60S2M250 (7) by moving the Tension Pulleys (6) up and down. (Screws (5) must be loosed at this time.) Prepare the Tension Gage (8) and the Scale (9) like the following photo, and adjust the tension so that the bend of belt becomes 3mm when 150gf +/-50g is given. Please follow the following requirements when you adjust the tension. 1.Confirm that the Drive the Belt 60S2M250 (7) and Pulley Assemblies (10) are surely ingear with each other. If you adjust the tension although they are not in gear, the Belt 60S2M250 (7) may betoo much loosed as soon as you start machine operation. 2.Adjust the tension when the Scanner Upper Unit is closed. You can not adjust the tension properly if it is opened. 150gf +/-50g 3mm 7 56 6 10105 8 K105sm5eH_USC 5-269 6.Remove the 3x12 screw (11) to remove each Pulley Assembly (10). 10 NOTE Be careful of the direction of Pulley Assemblies.11 10K105sm5eH_USC 5-270 7.Remove the POM Washer (12). 8.Remove 2 pieces of Bearing (13). 12134 NOTE The POM Washer is used only on the shaft of Drive Roller 1. K105sm5eH_USC 5-271 9.Remove the Pan Head Screw 4x8 (14) to remove P4 Pivot Washer (15) and P4 TwinLink 1 (16). 14 161516 14K105sm5eH_USC 5-27210. Remove the Pan Head Screw 4x8 (17) to remove P4 Pivot Washer (18) and P4 TwinLink 1 (19). 18 1917 17K105sm5eH_USC 5-27311. Remove 2 pieces of POM Washer (20). 12. Remove 2 pieces of Bearing (21). 2021K105sm5eH_USC 5-27413. Remove the 2 pieces of each Retaining Ring-E (22 : E6), Polyslider Washer (23) andBearing (24) on the right of the scanner unit. 222223242324K105sm5eH_USC 5-27514. Remove the Pan Head Screw 4x8 (25) to remove P4 Pivot Washer (26) and P4 TwinLink 1 (27). 2526 272725 K105sm5eH_USC 5-27615. Remove the Pan Head Screw 4x8 (28) to remove P4 Pivot Washer (29) and P4 TwinLink 1 (30). 28 30283029 K105sm5eH_USC 5-27716. Remove 2 pieces of Bearing (31). 17. Remove the P4 Sheet Guide (32). NOTE When reassemble, fit notches (33) of the P4 Sheet Guide (32) to the roller shafts (34). 33 3234 3132 K105sm5eH_USC 5-27818. Remove 6 pieces of screw (35). 353535K105sm5eH_USC 5-27919. Remove the P2 Sheet Guide (36). 20. There are 4 pieces of Holders (37) which hold the Drive Rollers 1 & 2. Remove 2 pieces of screw (38) from each Holder (37). 36373838K105sm5eH_USC 5-28021. Rotate 4 pieces of Holder (37) 90 degrees arc revolution, and remove them. 37 K105sm5eH_USC 5-28122. Pressing down Roller Holder Assy (39), slide the Drive Roller 1 (40) to the left, and then remove it. Replace the Drive Roller 1 (39) with the new one. NOTE The longer shaft of the Drive Roller 1 shall be placed at the left side. LeftRight 403940K105sm5eH_USC 5-28223. Pressing down Roller Holder Assy (41), slide the Drive Roller 2 (42) to the left, and thenremove it. Replace the Drive Roller 2 (43) with the new one. NOTE (1)The longer shaft of the Drive Roller 1 shall be placed at the left side. LeftRight 414242K105sm5eH_USC 5-283 NOTE (2)The pattern of Drive Rollers 1 and 2 aredifferent.Do not replace their position each other. Drive Roller 2 Drive Roller 1 K105sm5eI_USC 5-2845.12. 5Replacement of CIS Assembly 1.Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machinemaking reference to [5.12. 1Removal of theScanner Unit] on the page 5-253. 1 NOTE (Before S/N 10510001) P/N for CIS Assembly is Z058300800. (After S/N 10510001) CIS Assembly is classified into 4 classes depending on wavelength variations of their LED. Class C: (P/N: Z058300860) Class D: (P/N: Z058300830) Class G: (P/N: Z058300840) Class H: (P/N: Z058300850) All the 5 pieces of CIS Assembly on a certain scanner should be the same class to assure even image quality (brightness, color quality and etc) among image blocks. Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class mixing. Otherwise even image quality can not be expected. Installed CIS class can be checked with a label on the rear of the scanner. Label K105sm5eI_USC 5-285 2.Disconnect 2 connectors (2), open the Wire Saddles (3) to release the harnesses. 3.Disconnect the USB Connector (4), and open the Nylon Bands (5) to release the USB Cable. NOTE To open the Nylon Band (5), move up thestopper (6) with such tool as a minus screwdriver. 4 5236 K105sm5eI_USC 5-286 4.Remove 4 screws (7) to release Data Controller PCB.(You do not have to disconnect any connector from Data Controller PCB.) 77K105sm5eI_USC 5-287 5.Disconnect all of the Flexible Cables (8) from each CIS Controller Board. (Handle with great care not to break the Flexible Cable at this time!) 88K105sm5eI_USC 5-288 NOTE (1)Insert Flexible Cable (8) fully to the CISController PCB terminal when you connect it. If not connected firmly, the scan image maygo wrong. (But be sure to handle it with great care asit is easily broken. (2)Each Flexible Cable is fixed with the tapes (9). Strip off the tape (9) to make the Flexible Cable free. (3)The central one of Flexible Cable is running under the Data Controller PCB and the CISController PCB.Remove the Ring (10), strip off the tape (11) under the Data ControllerPCB, and then put the Flexible Cable aside. 89 10 11 K105sm5eI_USC 5-289 6.Remove 8 pieces of 3x6 screw (12). 7.Remove Base Plate (13). 1212 NOTE Carefully remove Base Plate (13) not to damage Flexible Cables at this time! 13 13 K105sm5eI_USC 5-2908. Carefully remove Flexible Cables (15) from CIS Assembly (14). 9. Remove 4 screws (16) and remove CIS Assembly (14). Replace CIS Assembly (14) with a new one. P/N: Z10830001 10. Replace all the parts in position. NOTE There are screws (17) around the Counter Roller,which are locked with the paint. Do not loosen or tighten these screws (17), as they maintain the focus adjustment! (Focus has been adjusted in the factory.) You will spoil the focus adjustment if you loosen or tighten it! 14171416 15 1614 17 NOTE Be sure to perform scanner adjustments (Shading, Calibration (if supported), Feed Distance and Position) after replacing CIS Assembly. See [8.12 Scanner Utility] on page 8-172 for adjustment. K105sm5eJ5-2915.12. 6Replacement of Gap Roller 1.Remove the Guides 3 (1). NOTE (1) Fine adjustment is required after replacing Gap Roller. Please follow the instruction as good image can not be expected if the adjustment is not successful. (2) 2 of all the 8 Gap Rollers are slightly wider, 2 types of Gap Roller replacement kits are provided. 1 Gap Rollers Gap Rollers Gap Roller Replacement Kit 2: Z058000760 Gap Roller Replacement Kit: Z058000750 K105sm5eJ5-292 2.Remove 8 pieces of 4x6 screw (2) on both front side and back side of machine. 3.Remove the Cover 14 (3). 4.Remove 3 pieces of screw (4). 5.Remove the Shield Cover N (5). 44 5 22 3 K105sm5eJ5-293 6.Disconnect 2 connectors (6) of the DC Harness, and open the Wire Saddles (7) to release theharness. 7.Disconnect the USB Cable (8), and open the Nylon Bands (9) to release the USB Cable. NOTE To open the Nylon Band (9), move up thestopper (10) with such tool as a minusscrewdriver. 8 96710 K105sm5eJ5-294 8.Remove 4 pieces of screw (11) to unfix the Data Controller PCB.(You do not have to disconnect any connector from the Data Controller PCB.) 1111K105sm5eJ5-295 9.Disconnect the 5 pieces of Flexible Cable (12) from each CIS Controller Board. (Handle with great care not to break the Flexible Cable at this time!) 1212K105sm5eJ5-296 NOTE (1)Insert the Flexible Cable (12) fully to theterminal when you connect it. If not connected firmly, the scan image maybecome abnormal. (But make sure to handle it with great care asit is easily broken. (2)Each Flexible Cable is fixed with the tapes (13). Strip off the tape (13) to make the Flexible Cable free. (3)The central one of Flexible Cable is running under the Data Controller PCB and the CISController PCB.Remove the Ring (14), strip off the tape (15) under the Data ControllerPCB, and then put the Flexible Cable aside. 14 15 121313 K105sm5eJ5-29710. Remove 8 pieces of 3x6 screw (16). 11. Remove the Base Plate (17). 12. Remove 2 screws (18) and remove the GapRoller Assembly (19). 1616 NOTE Carefully remove the Base Plate (17) not to break the Flexible Cable at this time! 17 17 181918 K105sm5eJ5-29813. Remove 4 screws (20), and replace the GapRoller (21) with the new one. NOTE Gap Rollers shaft (22) is shaped like D, and its flat face should be aligned with the sloping edge (23) of the bracket as the following Correct case. (Correct) (Wrong: Flat face and sloping edge are not aligned with each other.) 20232020212220K105sm5eJ5-29914. Turn 4 screws (20) lightly just to hold the InsideBracket (24) temporarily. (Inside Bracket (24) must be slid to front and rearby hand.) 15. Install the Gap Roller Assembly (19) to the scanner unit with 2 screws (18). (Turn these screws tightly.) 20 2020 2024 181918 NOTE Be careful of the direction of Gap Roller Assembly (19). Rear side Front sideK105sm5eJ5-30016. 4 Gap Roller Assemblies (25) and 2 POM Roller Assemblies (26) belong to 3 front CIS. If you replaced any of these 4 Gap Roller Assemblies (25) on the front, you must adjust therest of 3 Gap Roller Assemblies (25) and 2 POM Roller Assemblies (26). Therefore loosen the screws (27) of all these assemblies.(Do not loosen screws so much. Just holding the Inside Bracket temporarily is enough.) And 4 Gap Roller Assemblies (28) belong to 2 rear CIS. If you replaced any of these 4 Gap Roller Assemblies (28) on the front, you must adjust therest of 3 Gap Roller Assemblies (28). Similarly loosen the screws (29) of all other assemblies. 2528 2626 28Rear CISFront CIS 29 27282526262727K105sm5eJ5-30117. Open the scanner upper unit. 18. Put 3 pieces (for the front) or 2 pieces (for the rear) of Adjustment Plastic Sheet (30: 0.3mmthick) between Feed Roller and Scan Glass. NOTE Do not put the Adjustment Plastic Sheet (30) under the Gap Roller! 3030When adjusting the Gap Roller on the front When adjusting the Gap Roller on the rear K105sm5eJ5-30219. Slide the Inside Bracket (31) gently in the direction of arrow until it is stopped. When stopped, turn the screws (27) or (29) to fix the Inside Bracket (31). 292927 27 NOTE (1)Fix the Inside Bracket of Gap Roller Assemblies and POM Roller Assemblies on the front side in the following order. 1st2nd3rd4th5th6th 31 31K105sm5eJ5-303 20. Open the scanner upper unit and removeAdjustment Plastic Sheets (30). Close the scanner upper unit. NOTE (2)Fix the Inside Bracket of Gap Roller Assemblies on the rear side in the following order. 1st2nd3rd4th 30 K105sm5eJ5-30421. Insert the Confirmation Plastic Sheet (32: 0.1mm thick) between Feed Roller and Scan Glassto check if the gap is correct at everywhere.If not correct, repeat from the step 16. 22. Replace all the parts in position. 32 32 NOTE Be sure to perform scanner adjustments (Shading, Calibration (if supported), Feed Distance and Position) after replacing Gap Rollers. See [8.12 Scanner Utility] on page 8-172 for adjustment. K105sm6e1_USC 6-1 Chapter 6 Maintenance page 6. 1Recommended Periodic Maintenance 6-2 6. 2PM Parts Kits6-3 6. 3PM Procedure 6-4 KIP 3000 PM Schedule r2-Please keep this form with the KIP 3000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an 'X' in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.Part / Description QtyPart Number Square Feet X 1000Code40Complete80Complete120Complete160Complete200Complete240Complete280Complete320Complete360Complete400CompleteDocument Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C CDocument Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C CPhotoreceptor 1 SUP3000-101 RMain Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C C C R C C C R C CTransfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C C C R C C C R C CSeparation Wire 1 SUP3000-106 # C C C R C C C R C CGrid Screen # C C C C CLED Head # C C C C C C C C C CDeveloper Space Discs # C C C C CDeveloper Roller - Kit 1 Z050980020 C RSupply Roller - Kit 1 Z050980030 R RRoll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C CKnife @ C CFilters - Kit 1 Z050980050 @ C C C C C C C R C CFuser - Kit 1 Z050980060 C RFuser Fingers C C C C C C C C CPressure Roller C CThermostat C CThermistor C CExterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry@ = Clean with vacuumSubject to change without noticeL = LubricateC = CleanI = Inspect R = ReplaceA = Adjust positionPage 1 KIP 3000 PM Schedule r2-Please keep this form with the KIP 3000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an 'X' in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.Part / Description QtyPart Number Square Feet X 1000Code440Complete480Complete520Complete560Complete600Complete640Complete680Complete720Complete760Complete800CompleteDocument Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C CDocument Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C CPhotoreceptor 1 SUP3000-101 RMain Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C R C C C R C C C RTransfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C R C C C R C C C RSeparation Wire 1 SUP3000-106 # C R C C C R C C C RGrid Screen # C C C C CLED Head # C C C C C C C C C CDeveloper Space Discs # C C C C CDeveloper Roller - Kit 1 Z050980020 C R CSupply Roller - Kit 1 Z050980030 R R RRoll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C CKnife @ C C CFilterS - Kit 1 Z050980050 @ C C C C C R C C C CFuser - Kit 1 Z050980060 C R CFuser Fingers C C C C C C C C CPressure Roller C C CThermostat C C CThermistor C C CExterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry@ = Clean with vacuumSubject to change without noticeI = InspectA = Adjust positionC = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate Page 2 KIP 3000 Plus -PM Schedule - SN 10510000 and higher r1-Please keep this form with the KIP 3000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an 'X' in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.Part / Description Qty Part Number Square Feet X 1000Code40Complete80Complete120Complete160Complete200Complete240Complete280Complete320Complete360Complete400CompleteDocument Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C CDocument Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C CPhotoreceptor 1 SUP3000-101 RMain Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C C C R C C C R C CTransfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C C C R C C C R C CSeparation Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C C C R C C C R C CGrid Screen # C C C C CLED Head # C C C C C C C C C CDeveloper Space Discs # C C C C CDeveloper Roller - Kit 1 Z050980280 R RRoll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C CKnife @ C CFilters - Kit 1 Z050980050 @ C C C C C C C R C CFuser - Kit 1 Z050980060 C RFuser Fingers C C C C C C C C CPressure Roller C CThermostat C CThermistor C CExterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry@ = Clean with vacuumSubject to change without noticeL = LubricateC = CleanI = Inspect R = ReplaceA = Adjust positionPage 1 KIP 3000 Plus -PM Schedule - SN 10510000 and higher r1-Please keep this form with the KIP 3000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an 'X' in the Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.Part / Description Qty Part Number Square Feet X 1000Code440Complete480Complete520Complete560Complete600Complete640Complete680Complete720Complete760Complete800CompleteDocument Glass ( scanner ) # C C C C C C C C C CDocument Rollers ( scanner ) # C C C C CPhotoreceptor 1 SUP3000-101 RMain Charge Wire 1 SUP9810-104 # C R C C C R C C C RTransfer Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C R C C C R C C C RSeparation Wire 1 SUP3820-106 # C R C C C R C C C RGrid Screen # C C C C CLED Head # C C C C C C C C C CDeveloper Space Discs # C C C C CDeveloper Roller - Kit 1 Z050980280 C R RRoll Compartment & Interior @ C C C C C C C C C CKnife @ C C CFilterS - Kit 1 Z050980050 @ C C C C C R C C C CFuser - Kit 1 Z050980060 C R CFuser Fingers C C C C C C C C CPressure Roller C C CThermostat C C CThermistor C C CExterior Covers / GUI # C C C C C C C C C C# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry@ = Clean with vacuumSubject to change without noticeI = InspectA = Adjust positionC = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate Page 2K105sm6e1_USC 6-46. 3Service Kit The following service kits are assigned taking the serviceability into consideration. Kit Name (Part Number) Contained PartsQuantityRemarks Toner Cartridge Kit1Start Up Kit (Z050980010) Starting Toner (500g)1 during installation Roller Developer1 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal 12 Seal 32 Seal 42 Scraper1 Roller Supply1 Sheet 52 Developer Maintenance Kit E (Z050980280) Sheet 62 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal 12 Seal 32 Seal 42 Sheet 52 Developer Seal Kit B (Z050980160) Sheet 62 Developer Unit: Brush Type (after S/N 10510001) Roller Developer1 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal L Assy1 Seal R Assy1 Developer Roller Kit (Z050980020) Scraper1 Roller Supply1 Sheet 52 Supply Roller Kit (Z050980030) Sheet 62 Sheet 32 Sheet 42 Seal L Assy1 Seal R Assy1 Sheet 52 Developer Seal Kit (Z050980070) Sheet 62 Developer Unit: Sponge Type (before S/N 10510001) Corona Wire 1 Assy1Corona Wire Kit (Z050980040) Corona Wire2 Filter1Filter Kit (Z050980050) Filter 22 Roller Fusing1 Bush2 Nail Stripping13 Fuser Maintenance Kit (Z050980060) Nail Lower6 Toner Cartridge Kit (Z050970010) Toner Cartridge (300g)2 Photoconductive Drum (Z054700010) Photoconductive Drum1 KIP 3000 Preventative Maintenance Procedure every 40,000 square feet Step #1 - Prepare Machine. Ask User on Printer Performance / Image Quality Run Test Print Locate the KIP 3000 PM Schedule FormAnd check as each item completed.Replace noted items as this procedure progresses. Remove Drum (into Box) Remove side and top covers. Step #2 - Corona Units Clean Grid Screen (Simple Green, then rinse with water) let dry on paper towel. Clean 1st Charge wires and case (Glass cleaner) Clean transfer / separation wires and case. (Glass cleaner) Step #3 - LED Print Head. Clean Selfoc lens. (Glass cleaner.) Step #4 - Clean Interior of Printer. Separation fans / air guides. Transport belts. Transfer guide plates etc. Step #5 - Development Unit. Clean spacing rollers. Vacuum any toner dust from ends of developer unit. Vacuum around toner hopper inlet. Clean /` lube gears ( only as needed with G501 grease / Lithium grease.) Step #6 - Paper Decks. Vacuum paper dust. Inspect media spools. Step #7 - Air Flow. Vacuum Ozone Filters. Confirm all fans and blowers are clean. Step #8 - Fuser Section. Clean upper Nails. Clean lower Nails. Clean and lube gears. (as needed with High temp. grease) Step #9 - Cutter Assembly. Clean paper dust. Step #10 Run test pattern #1 and #3 and verify print quality. (save prints) Step #11 Scanner Clean all glass Clean original rollers Step #12 Clean Panels and Covers.Step #13 Make copies Step #14 Speak with key operator on your evaluation / status. K105sm7e1_USC 7-1 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Page 7. 1 Troubleshooting -Printer Errors7-3 7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors 7-3 7. 1. 1. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0101)7-3 7. 1. 1. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0102)7-4 7. 1. 1. 3 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0103) & Early (L-0303)7-5 7. 1. 1. 4 Reg. Jam Delay (J-0104), Stay (J-0204)Early (J-0304), Remained (J-1004)7-6 7. 1. 1. 5 Internal Jam Delay (J-0106), Stay (J-0206)Early (J-0306), Remained (J-1006)7-6 7. 1. 1. 6 Fuser Jam Delay (J-0107), Stay (J-0207)Early (J-0307), Remained (J-1007)7-7 7. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100)7-7 7. 1. 1. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200)7-7 7. 1. 1. 9 Deck Open7-7 7. 1. 1.10Deck Jam7-8 7. 1. 1.11Manual Set NG7-9 7. 1. 1.12Toner Empty7-10 7. 1. 1.13The door opened during the print 7-10 7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors7-11 7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004)7-13 7. 1. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001)7-14 7. 1. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003)7-15 7. 1. 2. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010)7-15 7. 1. 2. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011)7-16 7. 1. 2. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012)7-16 7. 1. 2. 7 Counter Error (E-020)7-17 7. 1. 2. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033)7-17 7. 1. 2. 9 Developer Bias Output Error (E-034)7-18 7. 1. 2.10Cutter Error (E-040)7-18 7. 1. 2.11FPGA Error (E-050)7-19 7. 1. 2.12Developer Error (E-070)7-19 7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality Defects7-20 7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment7-20 7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality Defects7-21 7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light7-21 7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light7-23 7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light7-24 7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven 7-25 7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image7-25 7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) 7-26 7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical)7-26 7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical)7-27 7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image7-28 7. 2. 2.10Dirt on the back of the print7-29 7. 2. 2.11Defective fusing7-29 7. 2. 2.12Defective image placement, No Leading Edge7-30 7. 2. 2.13Jitter7-30 K105sm7e1_USC 7-27. 2. 2.14Image looks not sharp7-31 7. 2. 2.15Uneven image density (vertical)7-31 7. 2. 2.16Completely white (No image)7-32 7. 2. 2.17Completely black7-32 7. 2. 2.18Crease of paper7-33 7. 2. 2.19Double image7-34 7. 2. 2.20Dirt on the print (Offset)7-35 7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects7-36 7. 3. 1 Countermeasures -scanner operation7-36 7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport)7-36 7. 3. 1. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position7-36 7. 3. 1. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop)7-36 7. 3. 1. 4 Original is mis-fed 7-37 7. 3. 1. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on 7-37 7. 3. 1. 6 Scanner is not recognized7-37 7. 3. 2 Countermeasures - scanner image quality7-38 7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black7-38 7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines7-38 7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines7-39 7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks7-39 7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks7-39 7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good7-39 7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right7-39 7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration7-40 K105sm7e1_USC 7-37. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors 7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors 7. 1. 1. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0101) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Installation of roll paper 1Is the roll paper correctly installed to the Roll Deck 2? NoInstall it correctly. Roll 2 Set Sensor (PH9) 2Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 090 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Is the status H when the roll paper is set? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 2 Set Sensor. 3.Replace the Roll 2 Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Roll 2 Feed Clutch (CL6) 3Check the operation of Roll 2 Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch) Does the clutch operate when you change the output signal from L to H? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 2 Feed Clutch. 2.Replace the Roll 2 Feed Clutch if there is no problem with the wire. No1.Check the driving belts of the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. 3.Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire. Main Motor (M1)4Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation. (Signal Code : 090) 1.Set the leading edge of roll 2 between feeding rollers. (Leading edge must not pass over the Roll 2 Set Sensor.) 2.Close the Roll Deck. Does the status change from L to H when the machine is transporting the paper? Yes1.Remove the whole Roll Deck, and then re-install it to the machine correctly. Roll 2 Set Sensor Delay: Paper arrives the sensor much later than required timing. Stay: Paper exists on the sensor for longer time than required. Early: Paper arrives the sensor much earlier than required timing. Remained: Paper has already existed on the sensor when turning on the machine. Reference K105sm7e1_USC 7-47. 1. 1. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0102) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Installation of roll paper 1Is the roll paper correctly installed to the Roll Deck 2? NoInstall it correctly. Roll 1 Set Sensor (PH7) 2Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 089 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) Is the status H when the roll paper is set? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 1 Set Sensor. 3.Replace the Roll 1 Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Roll 1 Feed Clutch (CL4) 3Check the operation of Roll 1 Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch) Does the clutch operate when you change the output signal from L to H? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 1 Feed Clutch. 2.Replace the Roll 1 Feed Clutch if there is no problem with the wire. No1.Check the driving belts of the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. 3.Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire. Main Motor (M1)4Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation. (Signal Code : 089) 1.Set the leading edge of roll 1 between feeding rollers. (Leading edge must not pass over the Roll 1 Set Sensor.) 2.Close the Roll Deck. Does the status change from L to H when the machine is transporting the paper? Roll 1 Set Sensor Yes1.Remove the whole Roll Deck, and then re-install it to the machine correctly. K105sm7e1_USC 7-57. 1. 1. 3 Feeding Jam Delay (J-0103) & Early (L-0303) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Does the paper mis-fed occur between Roll 1 Set Sensor and Feed Sensor? YesRemove the mis-fed paper. Feed Sensor (PH6) 2Check the status of Feed Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 092 (Feed Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Feed Sensor. 3.Replace the Feed Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Cutter Home Position Sensor (MS6 & MS7) 3Check the status of Cutter Home Position Sensors in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code 078 (Cutter Home Position SensorRight) 079 (Cutter Home Position SensorLeft) Is the status H when the Cutter is at each home position? And is it L when the Cutter is not at the home position? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Cutter Home Position Sensor. 2.Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensors if there is no problem with the wire. Driving mechanism4Check the operation of Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 10 (Feed Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck, and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each Feed Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Feed Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective. K105sm7e1_USC 7-67. 1. 1. 4 Reg. Jam Delay (J-0104), Stay (J-0204)Early (J-0304), Remained (J-1004) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Registration Roller? YesRemove the mis-fed paper. Registration Sensor (PH1) 2Check the status of Registration Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 084 (Registration Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Registration Sensor. 2.Replace the Registration Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Engine Unit3Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is locked? (Is the pressure around the Registration Roller correct?) No1.Close the Engine Unit firmly. 2.Adjust the pressure around the Registration Roller. Driving mechanism4Check the operation of Registration Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 11 (Registration Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck, and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each Registration Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Registration Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective. 7. 1. 1. 5 Internal Jam Delay (J-0106), Stay (J-0206)Early (J-0306), Remained (J-1006) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Does the paper mis-fed occur around the separation area? YesRemove the mis-fed paper. Separation Sensor (PH2) 2Check the status of Separation Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 010 (Separation Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Separation Sensor. 2.Replace the Separation Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit installed to the machine correctly? YesInstall the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit correctly. Transfer / Separation Corona 3 Is the Corona Wire broken?YesReplace the Corona Wire. HV Power Supply4Is the output from the HV Power Supply to the Separation Corona correct? NoReplace the HV Power Supply. K105sm7e1_USC 7-77. 1. 1. 6 Fuser Jam Delay (J-0107), Stay (J-0207)Early (J-0307), Remained (J-1007) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Does the paper mis-fed occur around the fuser area? YesRemove the mis-fed paper. Exit Sensor (PH3)2Check the status of Exit Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 011 (Exit Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Exit Sensor. 2.Replace the Exit Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. 7. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Opening the Roll Deck 1Did you open the Roll Deck before the completion of printing? (Roll paper will be rewound after printing. J-1100 will be indicated if you open the deck at that time.) YesWait until the roll paper is completely rewound. Lock of Roll Deck2Is the Roll Deck firmly locked?NoClose it firmly. 7. 1. 1. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Opening the Exit Cover 1Did you open the Exit Cover during printing? YesDo not open it during printing. 7. 1. 1. 9 Deck Open CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Roll Deck1Is the Roll Deck opened?YesClose it firmly. Switch (MS5)2Check the status of the following signal in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open Signal) Is the status L when the Roll Deck is closed? And is it H when the Roll Deck is opened? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Switch (MS5). 2.Replace the Switch (MS5) if there is no problem with the wire. K105sm7e1_USC 7-87. 1. 1.10 Deck Jam CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Does the paper mis-fed occur in the Roll Deck? YesRemove the mis-fed paper. Installation of roll paper 2Is the roll paper correctly installed to the Roll Deck 2? NoInstall it correctly. Roll 1 Set Sensor (PH7) Roll 2 Set Sensor (PH9) 3Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 089 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) 090 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Is the status of each sensor H when you set the roll paper? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to each sensor. 3.Replace the concerning sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Roll 1 Feed Clutch (CL4) Roll 2 Feed Clutch (CL6) Roll 1 Back Clutch (CL5) Roll 2 Back Clutch (CL7) 4Check the operation of the following clutches in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch) 07 (Roll 1 Back Clutch) 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch) 09 (Roll 2 Back Clutch) Does each clutch operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to each clutch. 2.Replace the concerning clutch if there is no problem with the wire. No1.Check the driving belts of the Roll Deck. 2.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. 3.Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire. Main Motor (M1)5Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation. Signal Code : 089 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) 090 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) 1.Set the leading edge of each roll paper between the concerning feeding rollers. (Leading edge must not pass over each Roll 1 (2) Set Sensor.) 2.Close the Roll Deck. Does the status change from L to H when the machine is transporting the paper? Roll 1 Set Sensor Roll 2 Set Sensor Yes1.Remove the whole Roll Deck, and then re-install it to the machine correctly. K105sm7e1_USC 7-97. 1. 1.11 Manual Set NG CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed1Have you already set the cut sheet paper to the Bypass Feeder before you turned on the machine? YesRemove the paper. Manual Set Sensor2Check the status of Manual Feed Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 008 (Manual Set Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Manual Set Sensor. 2.Replace the Manual Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Registration Sensor 3Check the status of Registration Sensor in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 084 (Registration Sensor) Is the status L when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it H when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Registration Sensor. 2.Replace the Registration Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Engine Unit4Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is locked? (Is the pressure around the Registration Roller correct?) No1.Close the Engine Unit firmly. 2.Adjust the pressure around the Registration Roller. Driving mechanism5Check the operation of Registration Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 11 (Registration Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck, and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each Registration Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Registration Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective. K105sm7e1_USC 7-107. 1. 1.12Toner Empty CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Toner Cartridge1Is there enough toner in the Toner Cartridge? NoReplace the Toner Cartridge. Toner Supply Motor (M3) 2Check the operation of Toner Supply Motor by the following 2 ways. 1.Turn on the machine, and check the action of Toner Supply Motor at that time. 2.Select the Factory Adjustment Mode, and carry out the Sub Mode No.05. Press the [ * ] Key when the machine is operating. (The Toner Supply Motor rotates when you are pressing the [ * ] Key.) Does the Toner Supply Motor operate correctly in both cases? (Refer to the page 8-141 as for the Factory Adjustment Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wires among Toner Supply Motor, Driver PCB B and PW10520 PCB. 2.Replace the Toner Supply Motor if there is no problem with the wire. NoReplace the Toner Sensor.Toner Sensor (TLS1) 3Confirm that the Toner Sensor is not buried in the toner. Then check the status of Toner Sensor in the Input/Output Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 091 (Toner Sensor) Is the status H when the Toner Sensor is covered with the toner? And is it L when the sensor is not covered? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) YesReplace the PW10520 PCB. 7. 1. 1.13The door opened during the print CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Mis-feed of paper1Is there a paper anywhere in the machine? YesOpen the Exit Cover and the Engine Unit, and then remove the paper. (Cut the paper manually if it has not been cut yet.) Switch (MS5)2Check the status of the following signal in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open Signal) Is the status L when the Roll Deck is closed? And is it H when the Roll Deck is opened? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) No1.Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Switch (MS5). 2.Replace the Switch (MS5) if there is no problem with the wire. K105sm7e1_USC 7-117. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors The followings are the names of Service Call Errors and the conditions that those errors occur. Error CodeError IndicationConditions E-000Fuser Temperature Rising ErrorThe temperature of Fuser does not rise up to 50oC. E-001Fuser Over Temperature ErrorThe temperature of fuser rises over 230oC. E-002Fuser Low Temperature Error1.The temperature of fuser at the time of turning on was 50 to 100oC, but it does not rise up to 100oC within 80 seconds after that. 2.The temperature of fuser at the time of turning on was higher than 100oC, but it does not rise up to the setting temperature within 150 seconds after that. E-003Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error The difference of temperature between center and side of fuser becomes 50oC or more. E-004Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error The Lamp of fuser lights (Signal HEAT1 is H) to heat up the Fuser Roller in the ready condition, but even 1oC of temperature rise can not be accomplished within 15 seconds. E-010Main Motor ErrorThe Main Motor Output Detection Signal (MAINM_LD) continues to be H for 3 seconds or longer when the Main Motor is rotating. E-011Fuser Motor ErrorThe Fuser Motor Output Detection Signal (HEATM_LD) continues to be H for 3 seconds or longer when the Fuser Motor is rotating. E-012Developer Press Motor ErrorThe Developer Press Sensor Signal (PRESS_S) does not change to L within 30 seconds after turning on. E-020Counter ErrorThe Counter Connection Detection Signal (COUNT_OPN) continues to be L for 1 second or longer after turning on. E-031Image Corona Output ErrorThe Image Corona Output Detection Signal (IM_LD) continues to be L for 1 second or longer when the Image Corona is ON. E-032Separation Corona Output ErrorThe Separation Corona Output Detection Signal (AC_LD) continues to be L for 1 second or longer when the Separation Corona is ON. E-033Transfer Corona Output ErrorThe Transfer Corona Output Detection Signal (TR_LD) continues to be L for 1 second or longer when the Transfer Corona is ON. K105sm7e1_USC 7-12 Error CodeError IndicationConditions E-034Developer Bias Output ErrorThe Developer Bias Output Detection Signal (BIAS_LD) continues to be L for 1 second or longer when the Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Unit. E-040Cutter Error1.The Cutter Home Sensor Signal (MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not change to H within 100 millisecond since the Cutter has started the operation. 2.The Cutter Home Sensor Signal (MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not change to L within 1 second since the Cutter has started the operation. E-050FPGA ErrorInitialization of FPGA is failed after turning on. E-070Developer Error1.The Connector J-253 is not connected. 2.The Switch (MS4) is open condition, which detects open/close of Engine Unit or Toner Hatch. K105sm7e1_USC 7-137. 1. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004) E-000 : Fuser Temperature Rising Error E-002 : Fuser Low Temperature Error E-004 : Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Error clearance1Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to the page 8-145 as for the Error Clear Mode.) YesWait until the Fuser Unit is enough cooled down.Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Wires2Are wires among Lamp (H1), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Lamp (H1)3Unplug the machine, and then check the resistance of Lamp (H1) with the multi-meter. Is it 15 ohm or lower? NoReplace the Lamp. Thermistors(TH1 & TH2) 4Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to the page 8-12 as for the Information Mode.) NoReplace the concerning Thermistor. Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange line (J220-4). Is it 24V?NoReplace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires. DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse 5 Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? YesReplace the Fuse. Relay (RY1)6Select the Device Operation Mode, and then change the signal of the following signal to H. Signal Code : 22 (Fuser Relay) And check the resistance between the following points. Between RY1-2 and RY1-4 Between RY1-6 and RY1-8 Is the each resistance almost 0 ohm? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Relay. K105sm7e1_USC 7-14 CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment YesReplace the Solid State Relay Solid State Relay (SSR1) 7Select the Device Operation Mode, and then change the signal of the following signals to H. Signal Code : 22 (Fuser Relay) 21 (Fuser Lamp 1) Then check the voltage between J105-1 and J105-2. Is it 0V? Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) CAUTION Change the signal of 21 (Fuser Lamp 1) to L after checking! NoReplace the PW10520 PCB. 7. 1. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Error clearance1Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to the page 8-145 as for the Error Clear Mode.) YesWait until the Fuser Unit is enough cooled down.Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Wires2Are wires among Lamp (H1), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Solid State Relay (SSR1) 3Does the error occur again even if you have cleared it in the Error Clear Mode? YesReplace the Solid State Relay. Thermistors(TH1 & TH2) 4Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to the page 8-12 as for the Information Mode.) NoReplace the concerning Thermistor. K105sm7e1_USC 7-157. 1. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Error clearance1Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to the page 8-145 as for the Error Clear Mode.) YesWait until the Fuser Unit is enough cooled down.Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Wires2Are wires among Lamp (H1), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Thermistors(TH1 & TH2) 3Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to the page 8-12 as for the Information Mode.) NoReplace the concerning Thermistor. 7. 1. 2. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Is the wire between Main Motor and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect it properly. Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange line (J220-4). Is it 24V?NoReplace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires. DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse 2 Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? YesReplace the Fuse. Main Motor (M1)3Check the operation of Main Motor in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 00 (Main Motor) Does the Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Main Motor. K105sm7e1_USC 7-167. 1. 2. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Is the wire between Fuser Motor and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect it properly. Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange line (J220-4). Is it 24V?NoReplace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires. DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse 2 Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? YesReplace the Fuse. Fuser Motor (M2)3Check the operation of Fuser Motor in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 01 (Fuser Motor) Does the Fuser Motor operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Fuser Motor. 7. 1. 2. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Are the wires among Developer Press Sensor (PH4), PW10520 PCB, Driver PCB B (PW6654) and Developer Press Motor (M4) connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Developer Press Motor (M4) Driver PCB B (PW6654) 2Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again. Is the Developer Unit moved to the Drum side? NoReplace the Developer Press Motor or Driver PCB B. Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 3Select the Signal Code 088 (Developer Press Sensor Signal) in the Device Status Mode, and then turn on the machine again. Does the status change from H to L after turning on? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) NoReplace the Developer Press Sensor. K105sm7e1_USC 7-177. 1. 2. 7 Counter Error (E-020) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Is the wire between Counter and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect it properly. Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange line (J220-5). Is it 24V?NoReplace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires. DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse 2 Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? YesReplace the Fuse. Counter3Check the operation of Counter in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 26 (Counter) Does the Counter operate correctly? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Counter. 7. 1. 2. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033) E-031 : Image Corona Output Error E-032 : Separation Corona Output Error E-033 : Transfer Corona Output Error CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Are wires among Image Corona, HV Power Supply PCB and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean each Corona Wire, Grid Plate and housing. Image Corona2 Is the Corona Wire broken?YesReplace the Corona Wire. Is the Transfer Corona dirty?YesClean each Corona Wire and housing. Transfer Corona3 Is the Corona Wire broken?YesReplace the Corona Wire. Is the Separation Corona dirty?YesClean each Corona Wire and housing. Separation Corona4 Is the Corona Wire broken?YesReplace the Corona Wire. HV Power Supply5Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply? YesOK K105sm7e1_USC 7-187. 1. 2. 9 Developer Bias Output Error (E-034) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Are wires among Developer Unit, HV Power Supply PCB and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect them properly. Is the toner spill out from the Developer Unit? (Or is there any similar problem?) YesClean each Corona Wire, Grid Plate and housing. Developer Unit2 Is the high voltage of Regulation Roller leaking? (The resistance between the central part of Regulation Roller and the Ground is5 mega ohm or smaller if leaking.) YesReplace the Regulation Roller. HV Power Supply3Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply? YesOK 7. 1. 2.10Cutter Error (E-040) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Is the wire between Cutter Unit and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect it properly. Cutter Home Position Sensors (MS6 & MS7) 2Check the status of the following signals in the Device Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 078 (Cutter Home Position Right) 079 (Cutter Home Position Left) Is the status L when the Cutter is at each home position? (Refer to the page 8-9 as for the Device Status Mode.) NoReplace the Cutter Unit. Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 3Check the operation of Cutter in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 27 (Cutter Motor 1) 28 (Cutter Motor 2) Does the Cutter operate? (Refer to the page 8-16 as for the Device Operation Mode.) NoReplace the Cutter Unit. Multi-meter GND K105sm7e1_USC 7-197. 1. 2.11FPGA Error (E-050) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment PW10520 PCB1Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW10520 PCB? YesOK 7. 1. 2.12Developer Error (E-070) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Wires1Is the wire between Developer Unit and PW10520 PCB connected properly? NoConnect it properly. Switch (MS4)2Is the actuator of Switch correctly pressed down when you close the Engine Unit or Toner Hatch? NoAdjust the positions of Switch (or Toner Hatch and Engine Unit). K105sm7e2_USC 7-207. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality 7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment The followings are the settings specified to the image creation components. When a defective image is printed out, please check whether or not these settings are satisfied for the beginning. ComponentChecking pointDesignated voltage Way of adjustmentHeight of Corona Wire Image CoronaCP11 (+) CPCOM (-) 1.3 +/-0.05VDC VR101 Transfer CoronaCP21 (+) CP22 (-) 1.0 +/-0.05VDCVR201Service Mode 04-029 (Plain) 04-030(Tracing) 04-031(Film) Separation Corona (AC) CP31 (+) CPCOM (-) 5.0 +/-0.05VVR302 Separation Corona (DC) CP33 (+) Ground (-) -250 +/-5VDCVR303 Negative Developer Roller Bias OUTPUT2 (+) Ground (-) -230 +/-5VDCService Mode 04-022 (Plain) 04-023(Tracing) 04-024(Film) Positive Developer Roller Bias OUTPUT2 (+) Ground (-) +350 +/-5VDCVR401 (Brush type) Same voltage with Developer Roller Bias -Toner Supply Roller Bias (On printing) TAB2 OUT1-OUT (+) OUTPUT2 (-) (Sponge type) -150 +/-5VDC VR601 (Brush type) Same voltage with Developer Roller Bias -Toner Supply Roller Bias (print interval) TAB2 OUT1-OUT (+) OUTPUT2 (-) (Sponge type) -50 +/-5VDC VR601 Regulation Roller Bias OUTPUT3 (+) OUTPUT2 (-) -40 +/-5VDCVR501 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias OUTPUT (+) Ground (-) +450 +/-5VDCVR2 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias OUTPUT (+) Ground (-) -550 +/-5VDCVR1 11mm 10 or 11 mm 11mm NOTE There are 2 types of Tr/St Corona Assy, they differs from the position and the number of plastic sheets on the housing. A specified height for a corona wire depends on the Assy type. Transfer Separation10mm 11mmTransfer Separation11mm 11mm1 sheet type2 sheets type K105sm7e2_USC 7-217. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality 7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.2.1Basic Image Adjustment] on the page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? YesOK LED Head2Is the Lens Array of LED Head dirty?YesClean it. Paper3Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean each Corona Wire, Grid Plate and housing, or replace the Corona Wire if it is too dirty. Image Corona4 Is the input voltage to the Image Corona correct? NoReadjust the input voltage making reference to [4. 3. 2Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona] on the page 4-31. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. Eraser Lamp5Does the Eraser Lamp light properly?No1.Check the wire connected to the Eraser Lamp. 2.Check or replace the Eraser Lamp. Separation Lamp6Does the Separation Lamp light properly? No1.Check the wire connected to the Separation Lamp. 2.Check or replace the Separation Lamp. Is the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty? YesClean each Corona Wire and housing, or replace the Corona Wire if it is too dirty. Transfer Corona7 Is the input voltage to the Transfer Corona correct? NoReadjust the input voltage making reference to[4. 3. 3Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on the page 4-33. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. Contact points of Developer Bias 8Is each Electrode Plate on the right of the Developer Unit surely contacted to the Electrode Plate on the machine side? NoTry to install the Developer Unit so that they are contacted each other. And supply the conductive grease to the Electrode Plates. HV Power Supply PCB 9Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply PCB? YesOK K105sm7e2_USC 7-22 CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Installation of Developer Unit 10Is the driving gear on the left of the Developer Unit surely fitted to the driving mechanism on machine side? NoCheck whether or not the Cam of Developer Press Unit surely presses the Developer Unit. Check the concerning gears. NoCheck the whole Developer Unit to find the cause. Developer Unit11Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? YesReplace the Photoconductive Drum. K105sm7e2_USC 7-237. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.2.1Basic Image Adjustment] on the page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? YesOK YesGo on to the step 3.2Turn off the machine in the middle of printing, and then check the toner image on the Drum. Is the toner image looks normal? NoGo on to the step 7. Is the Transfer/Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? NoInstall it correctly.Transfer Corona3 Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona leaking? YesClean the Transfer Corona. Paper4Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Lead Wire5Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm, which connects the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona? NoReplace the Lead Wire. Input voltage to the Transfer Corona 6Is a correct voltage supplied from the HV Power Supply to the Transfer Corona? NoReadjust the input voltage making reference to[4. 3. 3Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on the page 4-33. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. Dirt of the LED Head 7Is the LED Head dirty?YesClean it. 8Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? NoCheck the whole Developer Unit to find the cause. Developer Unit 9Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touch the Drum Unit?) NoRemove the Developer Unit, and then install it to the machine correctly. Check the Developer Press Unit. Installation of Developer Unit 10Is the driving gear on the left of the Developer Unit surely fitted to the driving mechanism on machine side? NoCheck whether or not the Cam of Developer Press Unit surely presses the Developer Unit. Check the concerning gears. No1.Check the wire or the connector connected to the Toner Sensor. 2.Check the Toner Sensor. Toner Sensor11Is there enough toner in the Developer Unit? YesReplace the Photoconductive Drum. K105sm7e2_USC 7-247. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.2.1Basic Image Adjustment] on the page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? YesOK Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Paper2 Do you have the problem only when you use a film? YesChange the setting of Item No.067 (Transfer Assist Setting) in the Adjustment Mode of Service Mode, so that the Separation Lamp works for the film. YesGo on to the step 4.3Turn off the machine in the middle of printing, and then check the toner image on the Drum. Is the toner image looks normal? NoGo on to the step 8. Is the Transfer/Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? NoInstall it correctly.Transfer Corona4 Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona leaking? YesClean the Transfer Corona. Lead Wire5Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm, which connects the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona? NoReplace the Lead Wire. Input voltage to the Transfer Corona 6Is a correct voltage inputted from the HV Power Supply to the Transfer Corona? NoReadjust the input voltage making reference to[4. 3. 3Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on the page 4-33. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. Driving mechanism of Developer Unit 7Is the Developer Unit driving normally?NoCheck the driving mechanism. Developer Unit8Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touch the Drum Unit?) NoRemove the Developer Unit, and then install it to the machine correctly. Lead Wire9Is the Lead Wire to supply the Developer Bias correctly connected? NoConnect the Lead Wire correctly. Developer Bias10Is the Developer Unit supplied with the Developer Bias correctly? NoCheck the contact points of Developer Bias, and also check the HV Power Supply. K105sm7e2_USC 7-257. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean the Image Corona, or replace the Corona Wire. Image Corona1 Is the height of Corona Wire different between left and right? YesAdjust the height properly. Installation of Developer Unit 2Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touch the Drum Unit?) NoRemove the Developer Unit, and then install it to the machine correctly. Check the Developer Press Unit. LED Head3Is the Lens Array dirtyYesClean it. Eraser Lamp4Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp light properly during the print? No1.Replace the Eraser Lamp. 2.Replace the PW10520 PCB. Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? NoClean the Regulation Roller.Developer Unit5 Is the toner accumulating evenly in the Developer Unit? NoLevel the machine correctly. 7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.4.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.2.1Basic Image Adjustment] on the page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? YesOK Developer Unit2Is the Developer Roller insulated from the ground? NoCheck the Developer Roller and connector. Image Corona3Is the foggy image printed even if you print a completely white pattern? YesCheck the output voltage from the HV Power Supply to the Image Corona. If it is not correct, readjust it. Developer Bias4Is the Developer Unit supplied with a correct Developer Bias during the print? NoCheck the output voltage from the HV Power Supply to the Developer Unit. If it is not correct, readjust it. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB Photoconductive Drum 5Have you used the Photoconductive Drum longer than its part life? YesReplace the Photoconductive Drum. K105sm7e2_USC 7-267. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.4.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Light from the outside 1Is any light from the outside thrown onto the Drum? YesInstall the outer cover correctly. Image Corona2Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean the Image Corona, or replace the Corona Wire. Developer Unit3Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? NoCheck if the Regulation Roller is fixed at the proper position. If not, fix it at the correct position. 7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.4.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Is there something like filament on the Grid Plate, which is contacted to the Drum? YesRemove it.Image Corona1 Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean the Image Corona, or replace the Corona Wire. Foreign substance2Is there some foreign substance on each Corona Unit or LED Head, which is contacted to the Drum? YesRemove it. Photoconductive Drum 3Is there any black line or damage on the Drum, of which position corresponds with the black line on the print? YesClean the Drum making reference to [5. 5. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. Replace the Drum if it is damaged.Be sure to find the cause of the damage. K105sm7e2_USC 7-277. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Image Corona1Is there something like filament on the Grid Plate, which is contacted to the Drum? YesRemove it. Dirt of the LED Head 2Can you fix the problem if you clean the LED Head? YesOK Transfer/Separation Corona 3Is there any foreign substance or dirt on the Transfer/Separation Corona? YesClean the Transfer / Separation Corona. Developer Unit4Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? NoCheck whether or not there is damage or foreign substance on the Regulation Roller. Entrance of Fuser Unit 5Is there any foreign substance or dirt around the entrance area of the Fuser Unit? YesClean it off Photoconductive Drum 6Is there any damage on the Drum, which runs to the direction of Drum rotation. YesClean the Drum making reference to [5. 5. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. Replace the Drum if it is damaged.Be sure to find the cause of the damage. K105sm7e2_USC 7-287. 2. 2. 9 Void of image Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.7.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Print out the Test Patter No.7 (halftone).Can you find void of image on the print? YesGo to the step 2. Paper2Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Does the void of image appear on the print constantly Keeping about 144mm of interval? Yes1.Clean the Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller. 2.Wipe the Developer Roller with a dry cloth. 3.Replace the Developer Roller if it is damaged. Developer Unit3 Is the void of image mainly runs vertically as follows? Yes1.Check if there is enough toner in the Developer Unit. 2.Also select the Device Status Mode and check the Toner Sensor Signal (Signal Code : 091). It must be L when the toner is not covering the Toner Sensor. If not, replace the Toner Sensor. Photoconductive Drum 4Does the void of image appear on the print constantly Keeping about 251mm of interval? YesClean the Drum making reference to [5. 5. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. Replace the Drum I it is damaged.Be sure to find the cause of the damage. K105sm7e2_USC 7-297. 2. 2.10Dirt on the back of the print Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.4.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.2.1Basic Image Adjustment] on the page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? YesOK Transfer Guides2Are Transfer Guides of the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty with the toner? YesClean them. After that, check the distance between Transfer Guide and Drum. (It should be 0.6 to 0.7mm.) Developer Unit3Is too much toner accumulating under the Developer Roller? YesClean the Developer Unit. Inner Transport Unit4Is the Inner Transport Unit dirty with the toner? YesClean it, and also find where the toner came. Is the Guide Plate at the entrance of Fuser Unit dirty with the toner? YesClean it.Fuser Unit5 Are Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller dirty with the toner? YesClean them 7. 2. 2.11Defective fusing Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.3.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Fuser Unit1Is the Fuser Roller properly heated up after turning on the machine? NoRefer to [7. 1. 2. 1Fuser Error (E-001, E-002 &E-004)] to check the Fuser Unit. Is the type of paper selected on the UI same with that of actually installed paper? NoSelect the correct paper type on the UI. Paper2 Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Yes1.Is there any part which is burnt? Replace that part if burnt. 2.Check if the Pressure Roller correctly pressed to the Fuser Roller. Fusing temperature setting 3Does the fusing temperature specified in the Service Mode suits with the weight (gram/square meter) of paper? NoAdjust the fusing temperature correctly. K105sm7e2_USC 7-307. 2. 2.12Defective image placement, No Leading Edge Correct leading margin is 5mm (+/-2mm). Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.6.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Setting of Leading Registration 1Is the Leading Registration properly adjusted in the Service Mode? NoAdjust it properly. Feed rollers2Have you used the feeding rollers for very long term? YesReplace them. Registration Clutch3Does the Registration Clutch operate correctly without slipping? NoReplace the Registration Clutch. 7. 2. 2.13Jitter Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.6.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Photoconductive Drum and its driving mechanism 1Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 251mm of interval? Yes1.Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (80T & 50T). 2.Check if there is any foreign substance between Drum and Counter Rollers of Developer Unit. Developer Roller2Does the void of image appear on the print constantly Keeping about 144mm of interval? YesIf the Developer Roller is damaged, replace it. Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 6.0mm of interval? YesCheck if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (32T, 22T & 24T) on the right side. Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 6.4mm of interval? YesCheck if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (28T, 30T, 35T & 25T) on the left side. Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 8.6mm of interval? YesCheck if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (25/34T & 16/30T) on the left side. Developer Unit3 Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 16.1mm of interval? YesCheck if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (16T) on the left side. K105sm7e2_USC 7-317. 2. 2.14Image looks not sharp Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.8.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Dirt of the LED Head 1Is the LED Head dirty?YesClean it. YesOKInstallation of LED Head 2Remove the LED Head, and then re-install it to the machine. Is the problem fixed? NoAdjust the gap between LED Head and Drum by adding or removing the thin plates on the Aluminium Block at both sides of the Drum. Transfer / Separation Corona 3Is the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty? YesClean it. 7. 2. 2.15Uneven image density (vertical) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.6.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Image Corona1Is the Image Corona dirty?YesClean it. Transfer/Separation Corona 2Is the Transfer/Separation Corona dirty? YesClean it. 3Remove the LED Head, and then re-install it to the machine. Is the problem fixed? YesOK 4Is the density of any image block different from that of other blocks? YesAdjust the gap between LED Head and Drum by adding or removing the Spacers on the Aluminium Block. Installation of LED Head 5Is the width of abnormal density area about 8mm as follows? 8mm YesReplace the LED Head. K105sm7e2_USC 7-327. 2. 2.16Completely white (No image) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Developer Press Unit 1Is the Developer Unit correctly pressed to the Drum? NoCheck the Developer Press Unit. Driving mechanism of Developer Unit 2Does the Developer Roller rotate during the print? NoCheck the driving mechanism of Process Unit. Developer Bias3Is each Electrode Plate on the right of the Developer Unit surely contacted to the Electrode Plate on the machine side? NoTry to install the Developer Unit so that they are contacted each other. And supply the conductive grease to the Electrode Plates. Are connectors of signal cable firmly connected to the LED Head? NoConnect them firmly.LED Head4 Turn off the machine in the middle of printing, and then check the toner image on the Drum. Is there any toner image on the Drum? NoReplace the LED Head. Is the Transfer Corona Wire broken?YesReplace it. Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit correctly installed to the machine? NoInstall it correctly. Transfer/Separation Corona 5 If the high voltage leaking from the Transfer Corona? YesCheck the Transfer / Separation Corona to find the cause for leaking. Is the connection of Lead Wire correct?NoConnect it correctly.Lead Wire of Transfer Corona 6 Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm, which connects the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona? NoReplace the Lead Wire. HV Power Supply7Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply? YesOK PW10520 PCB8Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW10520 PCB? YesOK 7. 2. 2.17Completely black Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.4.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Is the Image Corona Wire broken?YesReplace it. Is the tension of the Corona Wire correct? NoReplace it. Is the Corona Wire correctly stretched with the spring? NoCheck whether or not the spring is transformed. Is a proper high voltage supplied to the Image Corona? NoAdjust the high voltage, or replace the HV Power Supply PCB Image Corona orHV Power Supply PCB 1 Is the housing of Image Corona insulated from the ground? NoReplace the Zener PCB. PW10520 PCB2Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW10520 PCB? YesOK K105sm7e2_USC 7-33 7. 2. 2.18Crease of paper Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 and No.8.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment 1Make a continuous printing. Can you find the crease on the 2nd or later prints? YesGo to the following 8. Is the type of paper selected on the UI same with that of actually installed paper? NoSelect the correct paper type on the UI. Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Paper2 Is the Dehumidify Heater ON although the air is not humid. YesTurn off the Dehumidify Heater. Lamp (H1) of Fuser3Does the Lamp light correctly?NoReplace it. Blower (Separation)4Is the Blower working properly during the print to help paper transportation? NoReplace it. Blower(Fuser Cooler) 5Is the Blower working properly during the print to cool down the Fuser? NoReplace it. Fuser Entrance Guide 6Is the Fuser Entrance Guide transformed? Or Is there anything on the Fuser Entrance Guide? YesClean or replace it. Fusing pressure (Nip) 7Print the Test Patter No.20 with a tracing paper (36 or A0), and turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Remove the print from the machine and check the nip width. Is it 7.0 +/-0.5mm? (Measure at 2 mm from the edge.) 2mm 2mm 7.0 +/-0.5mm Fuser Motor speed8Is the paper slackened during the transportation when you make a long print? YesMake the Fuser Motor speed faster. K105sm7e2_USC 7-347. 2. 2.19Double image Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Is the type of paper selected on the UI same with that of actually installed paper? NoSelect the correct paper type on the UI. Paper1 Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Yes1.If the paper was humidified, instruct the customer of the way store the paper. 2.If the paper was not the specified one, explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Lamp (H1) of Fuser2Does the Lamp light correctly?NoReplace it. Blower (Separation)3Is the Blower working properly during the print to help paper transportation? NoReplace it. Blower(Fuser Cooler) 4Is the Blower working properly during the print to cool down the Fuser? NoReplace it. Fuser Entrance Guide 6Is the Fuser Entrance Guide transformed? Or Is there anything on the Fuser Entrance Guide? YesClean or replace it. Fusing pressure (Nip) 7Print the Test Patter No.20 with a tracing paper (36 or A0), and turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Remove the print from the machine and check the nip width. Is it 7.0 +/-0.5mm? (Measure at 2 mm from the edge.) 2mm 2mm 7.0 +/-0.5mm K105sm7e2_USC 7-357. 2. 2.20Dirt on the print (Offset) Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.2.If necessary use other Test Patterns. CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Paper1Is the type of paper selected on the UI same with that of actually installed paper? NoSelect the correct paper type on the UI. Developer Unit or Transfer/Separation Corona 2Does the paper has dirt before it enters the Fuser Unit? YesCheck the Developer Unit or Transfer/Separation Corona to find the cause. YesDecrease the setting value of fusing temperature (-3 to -5).Fuser Unit3Clean the Fuser Roller. Do you still have the problem even after the cleaning? NoOK K105sm7e2_USC 7-367. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects 7. 3. 1 Countermeasures -Scanner operation 7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Sensor1Is the original detected?(Is it shown on the UI?) NoCheck the sensor which detects the leading edge of original. If broken replace it. Check this sensor. USB Cable2Is the USB Cable connected correctly?NoConnect it correctly. Data Controller Board 3Can you fix the problem if you replace the Data Controller Board? YesOK 7. 3. 1. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Foreign substance1Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit? YesRemove it. Motor2Does the Motor rotate?NoCheck the Motor, and replace it if broken. +24VDC3Is +24VDC supplied to the scanner?NoCheck the DC Power Supply on the printer part. Replace it if broken. Data Controller Board 4Can you fix the problem if you replace the Data Controller Board? YesOK 7. 3. 1. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop) CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Sensor1Is any sensor broken?YesReplace it. K105sm7e2_USC 7-377. 3. 1. 4 Original is mis-fed CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Foreign substance1Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit? YesRemove it. 7. 3. 1. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Foreign substance1Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit, which blocks the light of sensor? YesRemove it. 7. 3. 1. 6 Scanner is not recognized CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment USB Driver1Does the PC recognize USB?1Check the USB Driver in Device Manager. USB Cable2Is there any problem with the USB cable, such as breakage, short-circuit and damage of connector pin? YesReplace the USB Cable. DC Power Supply3Is the DC Power Supply on the printer part normal? NoReplace the DC Power Supply. Data Controller Board 4Prepare another PC which can recognize another type of USB Scanner. Is it also impossible to recognize the scanner (of KIP 3000) with this PC? YesReplace the Data Controller PCB. K105sm7e2_USC 7-387. 3. 2 Countermeasures Scan Image Quality 7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Calibration1Can you fix the problem if you make Shading and Calibration? (Refer to [8.12.4.1Shading] and [8.12.4.2Calibration].) YesOK Cable of CIS2Is the cable of each CIS connected properly? NoConnect it properly, or replace the cable if it is broken. LED of CIS3Is the LED of each CIS lighting?No1.Check the DC Power Supply (+24V) of the printer part. Replace it if broken. 2.Replace the CIS. 3.Replace the Data Controller Board. 7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Scan Glass1Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? YesClean it. If damaged, replace the whole CIS unit with a new one. Calibration2Can you fix the problem if you make Shading and Calibration? (Refer to [8.12.4.1Shading] and [8.12.4.2Calibration].) YesOK Feeding rollers3Are feeding rollers dirty?YesClean them. CIS4Can you fix the problem if you replace the CIS? YesOK 7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Scan Glass1Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? YesClean it. If damaged, replace the whole CIS unit with a new one. Calibration2Can you fix the problem if you make Shading and Calibration? (Refer to [8.12.4.1Shading] and [8.12.4.2Calibration].) YesOK Feeding rollers3Are feeding rollers dirty?YesClean them. CIS4Can you fix the problem if you replace the CIS? YesOK K105sm7e2_USC 7-397. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Calibration1Can you fix the problem if you make Position? (Refer to [8.12. 4. 4Position].) YesOK 7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Calibration1Can you fix the problem if you make Position? (Refer to [8.12. 4. 4Position].) YesOK 7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Scan Glass1Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? YesClean it. If damaged, replace the whole CIS unit with a new one. Resolution2Is the resolution setting proper?NoAdjust it properly. 7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right CauseChecking order Checking ResultTreatment Calibration1Can you fix the problem if you make Shading and Calibration? (Refer to [8.12.4.1Shading] and [8.12.4.2Calibration].) YesOK K105sm7e3_USC 7-407. 4Touch Screen Calibration If the cursor position in the screen does not correctly match the tapped position on the panel, the touch screen should be calibrated so that the cursor is located directly underneath your finger or a stylus. 1. Press [?] at the bottom right on the screen. 2. Press [Service] to enter Service Configuration screen. K105sm7e3_USC 7-413. A password entry window will pop up.Type 8495107 and press [Enter]. 4. Service Configuration screen is displayed. Press [OK]. 5. Make sure that a wrench symbol is indicated at the top right of the screen.Press [Reset] to close UI operation window. K105sm7e3_USC 7-426. Tap Diagnostics folder twice as a double-click. Run the shortcut TouchScreen Configure Utility for touch screen calibration. 7. Select [Tools] tab. K105sm7e3_USC 7-438. Press [Draw Test] to check that the touch screen correctly detects a tapped position. 9. Test screen will appear. NOTE Using a stylus is recommended for easy and accurate touch screen calibration. Do not use any sharp instrument. K105sm7e3_USC 7-4410. Tap a certain point and check the cursor appears directly underneath a stylus. For example, suppose you tap the point shown the next figure. The cursor will appear just underneath the tapped point in a correct condition (calibration is not necessary). If the cursor appears an unintended position, the touch screen should be calibrated. Tap this cross Cursor Tap point Tap point Cursor Cursor matches the tap point Cursor does not match the tap point K105sm7e3_USC 7-4511. Tap [Quit] to close Test screen. 12. Press [4 Points Calibration]. 13. On Calibration screen, a blinking X symbol on the bottom left can be seen. Press the X until it stops blinking with a beep. NOTE Press the X symbol for several seconds before the progress bar at the bottom reaches the end. K105sm7e3_USC 7-4614. The X disappears and the next one will come in the following order: bottom right, top right, top left. Perform the same way for the other 3 points. 15. When all the 4 points are pressed successfully, Calibration screen disappears and the following dialog appears. Press [OK]. 16. Press [OK] to finish touch screen calibration. K105sm7e3_USC 7-4717. Run the shortcut Restart KIP UI for KIP UI operation. K105sm8e1_USC 8-1 Chapter 8 Service Mode and Utility Software Page 8. 1 Outline of Service Mode8-6 8. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode8-6 8. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode8-7 8. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode8-8 8. 2 Device Status Mode8-9 8. 2. 1 Function8-9 8. 2. 2 Indication and Operation8-9 8. 2. 3 Device Signal List 8- 10 8. 3 Information Mode8-12 8. 3. 1 Function8-12 8. 3. 2 Indication and Operation8-12 8. 4 Device Operation Mode8-16 8. 4. 1 Function8-16 8. 4. 2 Indication and Operation8-16 8. 5 Adjustment Mode8-18 8. 5. 1 Function8-18 8. 5. 2 Indication and Operation8-18 8. 5. 3 Setting Item list8-20 8. 5. 4 Explanation for each Setting Item8-34 8. 5. 4. 1 Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001)8-34 8. 5. 4. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003)8-34 8. 5. 4. 3 Side Margin (Left & right) (Sub Mode No. 004)8-35 8. 5. 4. 4 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No.008 to 010)8-36 8. 5. 4. 5 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block (No.011 to 013)8-38 8. 5. 4. 6 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Blocks(No.014 & 015)8-40 8. 5. 4. 7Cut Length 1 (length information provided)(No.016)8-41 8. 5. 4. 8Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No.017)8-41 8. 5. 4. 9Cut Length 3 (Compensation of a long print) (No.018)8-42 8. 5. 4.10 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027)8-44 8. 5. 4.11 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution (No.028)8-45 8. 5. 4.12 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034)8-45 8. 5. 4.13 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035)8-46 8. 5. 4.14 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037)8-46 8. 5. 4.15 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038)8-47 8. 5. 4.16 Fuser Temperature (No.039 to 044)8-48 8. 5. 4.17 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045)8-49 8. 5. 4.18 Warm Sleep Fuser Temperature (No.046)8-49 8. 5. 4.19 Fuser Temperature Overshoot Value (No.047)8-50 8. 5. 4.20 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049)8-51 8. 5. 4.21 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050)8-52 8. 5. 4.22 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051)8-52 K105sm8e1_USC 8-28. 5. 4.23 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)8-53 8. 5. 4.24 Feed Clutch (CL3) OFF time applied to long print (No.053)8-54 8. 5. 4.25 Switch timing of Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.054)8-55 8. 5. 4.26 Metric or Inch (No.055)8-56 8. 5. 4.27 Language (No.056)8-56 8. 5. 4.28 Interface Communication Setting (No.057)8-56 8. 5. 4.29 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058)8-56 8. 5. 4.30 Counter Value (No.059)8-57 8. 5. 4.31 Maximum Length (No.060)8-57 8. 5. 4.32 Stacking Device setting (No.061)8-57 8. 5. 4.33 Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062)8-58 8. 5. 4.34 Operation of Central Fuser Fan (No.063 & 064)8-58 8. 5. 4.35 Drum Reverse Rotation Period (No.065)8-59 8. 5. 4.36 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)8-59 8. 5. 4.37 Automatic Adjustment of Cut Length (Long print) (No.069)8-60 8. 5. 4.38 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.070 to 075)8-61 8. 5. 4.39 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.076 to 081)8-63 8. 5. 4.40 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.082 to 087)8-64 8. 5. 4.41 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.088 to 093)8-65 8. 5. 4.42 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.094 to 099)8-66 8. 5. 4.43 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.100 to 105)8-67 8. 5. 4.44 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.106 to 111)8-68 8. 5. 4.45 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.112 to 117)8-69 8. 5. 4.46 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.118 to 123)8-70 8. 5. 4.47 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.124 to 129)8-71 8. 5. 4.48 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.130 to 135)8-72 8. 5. 4.49 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.136 to 141)8-73 8. 5. 4.50 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.142 to 147)8-74 8. 5. 4.51 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.148 to 153)8-75 8. 5. 4.52 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.154 to 159)8-76 8. 5. 4.53 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.160 to 165)8-77 8. 5. 4.54 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.166 to 171)8-78 8. 5. 4.55 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.172 to 177)8-79 8. 5. 4.56 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.178 to 183)8-80 8. 5. 4.57 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.184 to 189)8-81 8. 5. 4.58 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.190 to 195)8-82 8. 5. 4.59 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.196 to 201)8-83 K105sm8e1_USC 8-38. 5. 4.60 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.202 to 207)8-84 8. 5. 4.61 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.208 to 213)8-85 8. 5. 4.62 Compensation of cut length for roll width 11 (No.214 to 219)8-86 8. 5. 4.63 Compensation of cut length for roll width 12 (No.220 to 225)8-86 8. 5. 4.64 Compensation of cut length for roll width 15 (No.226 to 231)8-87 8. 5. 4.65 Compensation of cut length for roll width 17 (No.232 to 237)8-87 8. 5. 4.66 Compensation of cut length for roll width 18 (No.238 to 243)8-88 8. 5. 4.67 Compensation of cut length for roll width 22 (No.244 to 249)8-88 8. 5. 4.68 Compensation of cut length for roll width 24 (No.250 to 255)8-89 8. 5. 4.69 Compensation of cut length for roll width 30 (No.256 to 261)8-89 8. 5. 4.70 Compensation of cut length for roll width 34 (No.262 to 267)8-90 8. 5. 4.71 Compensation of cut length for roll width 36 (No.268 to 273)8-90 8. 5. 4.72 Compensation of cut length for roll width A3 (No.274 to 279)8-91 8. 5. 4.73 Compensation of cut length for roll width A2 (No.280 to 285)8-91 8. 5. 4.74 Compensation of cut length for roll width A1 (No.286o 291)8-92 8. 5. 4.75 Compensation of cut length for roll width A0 (No.292 to 297)8-92 8. 5. 4.76 Compensation of cut length for roll width B1 (No.298 to 303)8-93 8. 5. 4.77 Compensation of cut length for roll width 880 (No.304 to 309)8-93 8. 5. 4.78 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315)8-94 8. 5. 4.79 Fuser Motor Speed (No.316 to 321)8-94 8. 5. 4.80 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327)8-94 8. 5. 4.81 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.328 to 333)8-65 8. 5. 4.82 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.334 to 339)8-96 8. 5. 4.83 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.340 to 345)8-97 8. 5. 4.84 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.346 to 351)8-98 8. 5. 4.85 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.352 to 357)8-99 8. 5. 4.86 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.358 to 363)8-100 8. 5. 4.87 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.364 to 369)8-101 8. 5. 4.88 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.370 to 375)8-102 8. 5. 4.89 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.376 to 381)8-103 8. 5. 4.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.382 to 387)8-104 8. 5. 4.91 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.388 to 393)8-105 8. 5. 4.92 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.394 to 399)8-106 8. 5. 4.93 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.400 to 405)8-107 8. 5. 4.94 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.406 to 411)8-108 8. 5. 4.95 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.412 to 417)8-109 8. 5. 4.96 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.418 to 423)8-110 8. 5. 4.97 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.424 to 429)8-111 8. 5. 4.98 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.430 to 435)8-112 K105sm8e1_USC 8-48. 5. 4.99 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / 30) (No.436 to 441)8-113 8. 5. 4.100 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / 30) (No.442 to 447)8-114 8. 5. 4.101 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / 30) (No.448 to 453)8-115 8. 5. 4.102 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / 30) (No.454 to 459)8-116 8. 5. 4.103 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / 30) (No.460 to 465)8-117 8. 5. 4.104 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / 30) (No.466 to 471)8-118 8. 5. 4.105 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / 30) (No.472 to 477)8-119 8. 5. 4.106 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / 30) (No.478 to 483)8-120 8. 5. 4.107 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / 30) (No.484 to 489)8-121 8. 5. 4.108 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / 30) (No.490 to 495)8-122 8. 5. 4.109 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / 30) (No.496 to 501)8-123 8. 5. 4.110 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / 30) (No.502 to 507)8-123 8. 5. 4.111 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.508 to 510)8-124 8. 5. 4.112 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.511 to 513)8-124 8. 5. 4.113 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.514 to 516)8-124 8. 6 Running Mode8-125 8. 6. 1 Function8-125 8. 6. 2 Indication and Operation8-125 8. 7 Jam/Error Mask Mode8-127 8. 7. 1 Function8-127 8. 7. 2 Indication and Operation8-127 8. 8 Test Print Mode8-130 8. 8. 1 Function8-130 8. 8. 2 Indication and Operation8-130 8. 8. 2. 1 Print Start Mode8-132 8. 8. 2. 2 Deck Selection8-132 8. 8. 2. 3 Paper Length8-133 8. 8. 2. 4 Print Count8-134 8. 8. 2. 5 Image Pattern8-135 8. 8. 2. 6 Manual Type8-136 8. 8. 2. 7 Manual Size8-136 8. 8. 2. 8 Roll 1 Size 8-137 8. 8. 2. 9 Roll 1 Size Setting 8-137 8. 8. 2.10Manual Size8-138 8. 8. 2.11Roll 2 Size Setting 8-138 8. 8. 2.12Mirror8-139 8. 8. 2.13Nega/Posi8-139 8. 8. 2.14Scale8-140 8. 9 Factory Adjustment Mode (Factory Use Only)8-141 8. 9. 1 Function8-141 8. 9. 2 Indication and Operation8-141 K105sm8e1_USC 8-5 8.10 Clear Mode8-143 8.10. 1 Function8-143 8.10. 2 Indication and Operation8-143 8.10. 2. 1 RAM Clear Mode8-145 8.10. 2. 2 Error Clear Mode8-145 8.10. 2. 3 Jam History Clear Mode8-146 8.10. 2. 4 Error History Clear Mode8-146 8.10. 2. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode8-147 8.10. 2. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode8-148 8.11 User Mode8-149 8.11. 1 Construction of the User Mode8-149 8.11. 2 Selecting each sub mode8-149 8.11. 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode)8-150 8.11. 4 Deck Information Mode8-151 8.11. 4. 1 Function8-151 8.11. 4. 2 Indication and Operation8-151 8.11. 5 Setting Mode 18-153 8.11. 5. 1 Function8-153 8.11. 5. 2 Indication and Operation8-153 (1)Material setting8-153 (2)Size setting8-155 8.11. 6 Setting Mode 28-157 8.11. 6. 1 Function8-157 8.11. 6. 2 Indication and Operation8-157 (1)Selection of each Sub Mode 8-157 (2)ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode8-159 (3)Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode8-160 (4)ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode8-161 (5)Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode8-162 (6)ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF8-163 (7)Timer setting of Auto Power OFF8-164 (8)Transfer Assist setting8-165 (9)Smoothing setting8-166 (10)Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting8-167 (11)Full Image Mode setting8-168 (12)Low Temperature Mode setting8-169 8.11. 7 Command Mode8-170 8.11. 7. 1 Function8-170 8.11. 7. 2 Indication and Operation8-170 8.12 Scanner Utility8-172 8.12. 1 Scanner Utility Installation 8-172 8.12. 1. 1Installing USB Driver8-172 8.12. 1. 2Installing Scanner Utility8-177 8.12. 2 Starting Scanner Utility8-179 8.12. 3 Displaying Scanner Information8-180 8.12. 4 Scanner Adjustment8-181 8.12. 4. 1 Shading8-181 8.12. 4. 2 Calibration8-187 8.12. 4. 3 Feed Distance8-191 8.12. 4. 4 Position8-201 8.12. 5 Updating Firmware8-215 K105sm8e1_USC 8-68. 1 Outline of Service Mode 8. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode 1.Remove the cover from the front face of the machine to access the Sub UI. 2.Confirm that the machine is OFF. Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key. You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation, so it becomes possible to enterthe Service Mode. 3.Press and hold the [ * ] key, and then press the keys in the order as [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ]to enter the Service Mode. All segments on the LCD light when you enter the Service Mode. All segments light. 4.Keep your finger away from the [ * ] key, and the ROM version is indicated. ROM version is indicated. 5.Then, select the necessary Sub Mode making reference to [1. 2Selecting each Sub Mode] onthe next page. NOTE It is impossible to enter the Service Mode if the key operation is locked. ROM Ver . 1. 6FPGA Ver . 0. 3Pr i nt er r eadyR1: 36MENU ENTER K105sm8e1_USC 8-78. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode Service Mode consists of the following 9 sub modes. Service Mode Name 1Device Status Mode 2Information Mode 3Device Operation Mode 4Adjustment Mode 5Running Mode 6Jam/Error Masking Mode 7Test Print Mode 8Factory Adjustment Mode 9Clear Mode You can select each sub mode orderly whenever you press the [MENU] key. Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 1) I / O Mode ( 2) I n f o Mode ( 3) Check Mode ( 4) Adj ust Mode ( 5) Runni ng Mode ( 9) Cl e a r Mode ( 8) Fac t o r y Mode ( 7) Test Mode ( 6) Mask Mode K105sm8e1_USC 8-88. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode Press and hold the [MENU] key, and then press the [ * ] key to cancel the Service Mode. The LCD indicates printers status after the cancellation. Pr i nt er ReadyR1: 36 R2: 24 NOTE The key operation of Sub UI is automatically locked if you turn off the machine. K105sm8e1_USC 8-98. 2 Device Status Mode 8. 2. 1 Function It is possible to observe the status of each signal (input and output) independently. 8. 2. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (1) I/O Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Device Status Mode. The LCD indicates signal code, signal name and signal status. Signal code Signal status Signal name 3.Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the necessary signal code on the LCD. The LCD also indicates the signal name and its status according to the selected signal code. ( 1) I / O Mode No000 I / O( - H- )Swi t ch 1 K105sm8e1_USC 8-108. 2. 3 Device Signal List SignalCode SymbolIC PortConnectorSignal NameInput / Output Status 000SW1IC18 D1J205-17Input Switch 1InputL : ON 001SW2IC18 D2J205-18Input Switch 2InputL : ON 002SW3IC18 D3J205-19Input Switch 3InputL : ON 003SW4IC18 D4J205-20Input Switch 4InputL : ON 004SW5IC18 D5J205-21Input Switch 5InputL : ON 005IC18 D6J202-7 006IC18 D7J202-8 007SCI_DATAIC18 D8Serial Data InputInput 008MAN_SIC19 D1J204-20Manual Feed SensorInputH : Paper detected 009DOOR_OPNIC19 D2J204-21Roll Deck OpenInputH : Open 010SEP_SIC19 D3J204-22Separation SensorInputL : Paper detected 011HEAT_EXITIC19 D4J204-23Exit SensorInputL : Paper detected 012INPORT1IC19 D5J204-24Input Port 1InputNot used 013HEAT_DOORIC19 D6J204-25Heater Hatch OpenInputL : Open 014IC19 D7J207-5 015SIG_INIC19 D8J204-27Stacker InputInput 016ONLINE_LEDIC20 Q1J205-15Online LEDOutputH : ON 017COOL_BL_LIC20 Q2J207-14Fuser Cooling Fan (Left)OutputH : Rotate 018SCI_LDIC20 Q3Serial LD 019SCI_CLKIC20 Q4Serial Clock 020COOL_BLW_RIC20 Q5J207-13Fuser Cooling Fan (Right)OutputH : Rotate 021SIG_OUTIC20 Q6J204-28Stacker OutputOutput 022HEAT_BL_LIC20 Q7J207-12Fuser Blower (Low)OutputH : ON 023HEAT_BL_HIC20 Q8J207-12Fuser Blower (High)OutputH : ON 024MAMTRIC21 Q1J206-7Main MotorOutputH : Rotate 025HEAT_MIC21 Q2J206-8Fuser MotorOutputH : Rotate 026HV_1STIC21 Q3J206-9Image CoronaOutputH : Output 027HV_TRIC21 Q4J206-10Transfer CoronaOutputH : Output 028HV_ACIC21 Q5J206-11Separation CoronaOutputH : Output 029BIAS_TRGIC21 Q6J206-12Developer BiasOutputH : Output 030BIAS_SWIC21 Q7J206-13Developer Bias Polarity SwitchOutputL : Positive Bias 031IC21 Q8J206-14 032H1_CW_CCWIC22 Q1J206-15Fuser Motor Reversal RotationOutputH : Reverse 033PRESS_MIC22 Q2J206-16Developer Press MotorOutputH : Rotate 034TONER_MIC22 Q3J206-17Hopper MotorOutputH : Rotate 035CLEAN_SWIC22 Q4J206-18Cleaning Roller Voltage Polarity Switch OutputL : Positive 036FEED_BLIC22 Q5J206-22Blower (BL7) ControlOutputH : Rotate 037HEAT1IC22 Q6J206-25SSR ON/OFF Signal 1OutputH : Heater Lamplights 038COOL_BL_CIC22 Q7J206-26Fuser Cooling Fan (Center)OutputH : Rotate 039POWER_OFFIC22 Q8J206-27Power Switch OutputOutputH : OFF 040ER2IC23 Q1J207-3Separation Lamp ControlOutputH : Lighting 041COUNTIC23 Q2J207-4CounterOutputH : Counting up 042HEAT_RYIC23 Q3J207-5Fuser RelayOutputH : ON 043SLCT_CLIC23 Q4Clutch Selection (Roll 1 or 2)OutputH : Roll 1 044FOWE_CLIC23 Q5J207-6(R1) J207-8(R2) Roll 1&2 Feed ClutchOutputH : ON 045BACK_CLIC23 Q6J207-9(R1) J208-9(R2) Roll 1&2 Back ClutchOutputH : ON 046FEED_CLIC23 Q7J207-10Feed ClutchOutputH : ON 047REGIST_CLIC23 Q8J207-11Registration ClutchOutputH : ON 048M_LDIC24 HJ203-14Main Motor Output DetectionInput 049FUMTR_LDIC24 GJ203-15Fuser Motor Output DetectionInput 050DIS_CNIC24 FJ203-16Developer Connection Detection Input 051HV1_LDIC24 EJ203-17Image Corona Output Detection Input 052TR_LDIC24 DJ203-18Transfer Corona Output Detection Input 053AC_LDIC24 CJ203-19Separation Corona Output Detection Input K105sm8e1_USC 8-11 SignalCode SymbolIC PortConnectorSignal NameInput / Output Status 054BIAS_LDIC24 BJ203-20Developer Bias Output Detection Input 055COUNT_OPENIC24 AJ207-4Counter Connection DetectionInput 056IBUSY_HIC1-P10Data Output BusyOutputH : Busy 057IPRADY_LIC1-P11Printer ReadyOutputL : Ready 058IPREQ_LIC1-P12Print RequestOutputL : Requested 059PAGEBLIC1-P13Print RequestOutputL : Print ON 060TEST_HIC1-P14Test PrintOutputH : Test Printing 061I_POW_ON_AIC1-P15Output 062I_POW_ON_BIC1-P16Output 063IC1-P17 064LCD_CLKIC1-P20LCD ClockOutput 065LCD_DATAIC1-P21LCD DataOutput 066LCD_ENIC1-P23J205-6LCD EnableOutput 067LCD_RWIC1-P24J205-5Data Read / Write SelectionOutput 068LCD_RSIC1-P22J205-4LCD Input SelectionOutput 069CLEAN BIASIC1-P25J206-5Cleaning Roller BiasOutputH : Output 070IC1-P26J206-6 071RESET_SIGIC1-P27Reset SignalOutput 072RXD0IC1-P32Serial 0 InputInput 073RXD1IC1-P33Serial 1 InputInput 074RXD2IC1-P51Serial 2 InputInput 075TXD0IC1-P30Serial 0 OutputOutput 076TXD1IC1-P31Serial 1 OutputOutput 077TXD2IC1-P50Serial 2 OutputOutput 078MSCUTRIC1-P60J204-5Cutter Home Position Sensor (Right) InputL : Staying atHome Position 079MSCUTLIC1-P61J204-6Cutter Home Position Sensor (Left) InputL : Staying atHome Position 080MCUTLIC1-P63J207-1Cutter Motor 1OutputH : Rotate 081MCUTRIC1-P62J207-2Cutter Motor 2OutputH : Rotate 082IPRINT_LIC1-P34Print RequestInputL : Requested 083IPCUT_LIC1-P64Paper Cut RequestInputL : Cutting 084REGIST_SIC1-P65J204-7Registration SensorInputH : Paper detected 085R1_ENC_SIC1-P66J204-8Roll 1 EncoderInput 086R2_ENC_SIC1-P67J204-9Roll 2 EncoderInput 087VLC_OFFIC1-PG0LCD Indication ON/OFFOutputH : Indicating 088PRESS_SIC1-PA5J204-10Developer Press SensorInputL : Detecting 089R1_SET_SIC1-PA6J204-11Roll 1 Set SensorInputH : Paper detected 090R2_SET_SIC1-PA7J204-12Roll 2 Set SensorInputH : Paper detected 091TONER_SAN5Toner SensorInputH : Toner detected 092R_EDGEIC1-PF7J204-13Feed SensorInputH : Paper detected 093 094 095 K105sm8e1_USC 8-128. 3 Information Mode 8. 3. 1 Function It is possible to monitor several kinds of information like analog data, operation time of each electric component and some other information. 8. 3. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (2) Info Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Information Mode. The LCD indicates item number, item name and information. Item numberItem name Information 3.Indicate the necessary item number pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, and you can check theconcerning information. The following list shows the item number, item name and the concerning information. ItemNumber Item Name (Indication)Information 00Fuser Temp 1 This item indicates the temperature of the central part of Fuser Roller. 01Fuser Temp 2 This item indicates the temperature of the right side of Fuser Roller. No00 Fuser Temp1150C ( 2) I n f o Mode No00 Fuser Temp1150CNo01 Fuser Temp2140CK105sm8e1_USC 8-13 Item Number Item Name (Indication)Information 02Fuser Temp 3 This item indicates the temperature of the left side of Fuser Roller. 03Bias Vol This item indicates the analog output voltage for the Developer Bias. 04Tr. Vol This item indicates the analog output voltage for the Transfer Corona. 05Total Cut This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from every source. 06Roll 1 Cut This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from Roll 1. 07Roll 2 Cut This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from Roll 2. 08Others cut This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated when the machine was not on printing. 09Total Image This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation totally. No04 Tr . Vo l1. 35V No02 Fuser Temp3135CNo03 Bi as Vo l1. 90VNo05 Tot a l Cu t0000138No06 Ro l l 1 Cut0000010No07 Ro l l 2 Cut0000123No08 Ot her s Cu t0000005No09 To t a l I mage0002541K105sm8e1_USC 8-14 Item Number Item Name (Indication)Information 10R1 Image This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the Roll 1. 11R2 Image This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the Roll 2. 12M Image This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the cut sheet paper from Bypass Feeder. 13R1 F Clutch This item indicates how many times the Roll 1 Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. 14R2 F Clutch This item indicates how many times the Roll 2 Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. 15R1 B Clutch This item indicates how many times the Roll 1 Back Clutch has operated up to the present. 16R2 B Clutch This item indicates how many times the Roll 2 Back Clutch has operated up to the present. 17Feed Clutch This item indicates how many times the Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. No10 R1 I mage0001383 No11 R2 I mage0001311 No12 M I mage0000233 No13 R1 F Cl u t ch0000136 No14 R2 F Cl u t ch0003511 No15 R1 B Cl u t ch0002644 No16 R2 B Cl u t ch0029877 No17 Feed Cl u t ch0007651 K105sm8e1_USC 8-15 Item Number Item Name (Indication)Information 18Reg. Clutch This item indicates how many times the Registration Clutch has operated up to the present. 19Motor 1 Time This item indicates how long minutes the Main Motor has operated up to the present. 20Motor 2 Time This item indicates how long minutes the Fuser Motor has operated up to the present. 21LED On Time It indicates how long minutes the LED Head has lighted up to the present. 22JAM Info This item indicates the record of jams.The information indicated on the second line is JAM History No., Jam Code and Counter Value (at the time of jam). The latest 20 jams can be indicated in succession whenever you press the ENTER Key. 23Error Info This item indicates the record of errors. The information indicated on the second line is Error History No., Error Code and Counter Value (at the time of error). The latest 20 errors can be indicated in succession whenever you press the ENTER Key. No18 Reg .0009021Cl ut c h No19 Mot or 1 Ti me0000015mi n No20 Mot or 2 Ti me0000003mi n No21 LED On Ti me0003212mi n No22 Jam I nf o( 01) 1007 0000385 No23 Er r or I nf o( 01) 0040 0006312 K105sm8e1_USC 8-168. 4 Device Operation Mode 8. 4. 1 Function It is possible to operate several electrical components independently, such as motor, clutch, & fans. By this you can check whether or not the DC Controller PCB (PW10520) correctly outputs the signal to each component, and also you can check whether or not such electrical component operates correctly. 8. 4. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (3) Check Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Device OperationMode. The LCD indicates signal code, signal name of target item and signal status. Signal codeSignal status Signal name of target item No00 Out pu t ( - L- )Mai n Mot or ( 3) Check Mode K105sm8e1_USC 8-17 3.Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the signal code of which target item you would liketo operate. (Example : You will check the operation of Cutter Motor 1.) Signal Code Signal NameTarget itemSignal Code Signal NameTarget item 00Main MotorMain Motor18Clean +/- SWPositive/Negative selection of Cleaning Roller Voltage 01Fuser MotorFuser Motor19Cooler Blower (R)Cooling Fan (Right) 02Fuser Rev Motor Fuser Motor (Reversal rotation) 20Tr Assist LEDTransfer Assist LED 03Press MotorDeveloper Press Motor21Heater Lamp 1Fuser Lamp 1 04Supply MotorToner Supply Motor22Heater RelayFuser Relay 05ReserveReserved23Heater Blower (L)Fuser Blower (Low speed) 06Roll 1 Feed CLRoll 1 Feed Clutch24Heater Blower (H)Fuser Blower (High speed) 07Roll 1 Back CLRoll 1 Back Clutch25Feed BlowerPaper Feed Blower 08Roll 2 Feed CLRoll 2 Feed Clutch26CounterCounter 09Roll 2 Back CLRoll 2 Back Clutch27Cutter Motor 1Cutter Motor 1 10Feed CLFeed Clutch28Cutter Motor 2Cutter Motor 2 11Reg. CLRegistration Clutch29Main SwitchMain Switch 121st CoronaImage Corona30Cooler Blower (L)Cooling Fan (Left) 13Tr CoronaTransfer Corona31Cooler Blower (C)Cooling Fan (Center) 14Sep CoronaSeparation Corona 15BiasDeveloper Bias 16Bias +/- SelectPositive/Negative selection ofDeveloper Bias 17Clean BiasCleaning Roller Bias 4.When you press the [ENTER] key, the status of output signal changes from L to H and theselected target item operates independently. Press [ENTER]. No27 Out pu t ( - L- )Cut t er Mot or 1 No00 Out pu t ( - L- )Mai n Mot or No27 Ou t pu t ( - L- )Cut t er Mot or 1 No27 Out pu t ( - H- )Cut t er Mot or 1 K105sm8e2_USC 8-188. 5 Adjustment Mode 8. 5. 1 Function It is possible to adjust the fundamental settings of the printer. 8. 5. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (4) Adjust Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Adjustment Mode. The LCD indicates item number, name of setting item and setting value. Item numberSetting value Name of setting item 3.Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the Item Number of which Setting Value you willchange. Please refer to [8.5.3Setting item list] on and after the page 8-20 for the detail of each settingitem. (Example: You will change Main Strobe A.) No000 020 [ 020 ]Lead Reg. ( Ro l l ) No008 010 [ 010]Ma i n St r obe A No000 020 [ 020 ]Lead Reg. ( Ro l l )( 4) Adj ust Mode K105sm8e2_USC 8-19 4.Press the [ENTER] key. The setting value in the parenthesizes starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it. 5.Change the setting value pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. Change the value. 6.Press the [ENTER] key. New value stops flashing and it is validated. No008 010 [ 013]Ma i n St r obe A No008 013 [ 013]Ma i n St r obe A No008 010 [ 010]Ma i n St r obe A No008 010 [ 013]Ma i n St r obe A NOTE The LCD indicates another value that is not in theparenthesises. This is the current setting value. Current setting value No008 010 [ 010]Ma i n St r obe A No008 010 [ 010]Ma i n St r obe A No008 010 [ 010]Ma i n St r obe A NOTE Some Setting Items may require another way of operation. This kind of special operation is written in each explanation in [5.3Explanation for each Setting Item]. K105sm8e2_USC 8-208. 5. 3 Setting Item list NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 000Leading Registration (Roll paper)1mm17191 to 408-34 001Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper)1mm18201 to 408-34 002Trailing Margin (Roll paper)1mm9101 to 408-34 003Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper)1mm9101 to 408-34 004Side Margin (Left and right)1mm000 to 208-35 005Reserved 006Reserved 007Reserved 008LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block A)1 microsecond10100 to 138-36 009LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block B)1 microsecond10100 to 138-36 010LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block C)1 microsecond10100 to 138-36 011LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block A)1 microsecond000 to 138-38 012LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block B)1 microsecond000 to 138-38 013LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block C)1 microsecond000 to 138-38 014Horizontal Alignmentof Pixels between Image Blocks A & B-882 to 148-40 015Horizontal Alignmentof Pixels between Image Blocks B & C-882 to 148-40 016Cut Length 1 (length information provided)1mm43430 to 1008-41 017Cut Length 2 (length information not provided)1mm50500 to 1008-41 018Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print)0.1mm5005000 to 9998-42 019Reserved- 020Reserved- 021Reserved- 022Developer Bias (Plain Paper)-1351350 to 2558-44 023Developer Bias (Tracing Paper)-1351350 to 2558-44 024Developer Bias (Film)-1351350 to 2558-44 025Developer Bias (Special Media/Plain Paper)-1351350 to 2558-44 026Developer Bias (Special Media/Tracing Paper)-1351350 to 2558-44 027Developer Bias (Special Media/Film)-1351350 to 2558-44 028Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution-1551550 to 2558-45 029Transfer Voltage (Plain Paper)-2432433 to 2558-45 030Transfer Voltage (Tracing Paper)-2432433 to 2558-45 031Transfer Voltage (Film)-2432433 to 2558-45 032Transfer Voltage(Special Media/Plain Paper) -1751753 to 2558-45 033Transfer Voltage(Special Media/Tracing Paper) -1751753 to 2558-45 034Transfer Voltage(Special Media/Film) -1751753 to 2558-45 035Separation Corona ON Timing1mm50500 to 1008-46 036Reserved 037Transfer Corona ON Timing1mm50480 to 1008-46 038Transfer Corona OFF Timing1mm35230 to 1008-47 039Fuser Temperature (Plain Paper)1oC165165120 to 1808-48 040Fuser Temperature (Tracing paper)1oC164165120 to 1808-48 041Fuser Temperature (Film)1oC170160120 to 1808-48 042Fuser Temperature (Special Media/Plain Paper)1oC165165120 to 1808-48 043Fuser Temperature (Special Media/Tracing Paper)1oC165165120 to 1808-48 044Fuser Temperature (Special Media/Film)1oC160160120 to 1808-48 045Fuser temperature to Start Idling1oC120120100 to 1408-49 046Warm Sleep - Fuser Temperature 1oC100100100 to 1608-49 047Fuser Temperature Overshoot Value1oC0100 to 308-50 048Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle)1oC111 to 208-51 049Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by)1oC221 to 208-51 050Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor1 Second15151 to 308-52 051Toner Supply Motor Time1 Second10101 to 158-52 052Dot Enhancement Level ( Dither )-111 to 38-53 053Feed Clutch OFF Time applied to long print1msec.13013080 to 1808-54 054Switch timing of Toner Supply Roller Bias1mm45450 to 2208-55 055Metric or Inch -100 to 18-56 056Language-110 to 18-56 057Interface Communication Setting-220 to 28-56 K105sm8e2_USC 8-21 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 058Recognition of Roll Deck 2-110 to 18-56 059Counter Value-500 to 58-57 060Maximum Length-000 to 18-57 061Stacking Device Setting000 to 18-57 062Operation of Fuser Roller000 to 18-58 063Operation of Central Fuser Fan (Tracing paper)1oC167168130 to 1708-58 064Operation of Central Fuser Fan (Special tracing paper)1oC143143130 to 1708-58 065Drum ReverseTime1 millisecond505010 to 708-58 066Reserved 067Operation of Separation Lamp441 to 78-59 068Reserved 069Automatic Adjustment of Cut Length--8-60 070Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -25230 to 408-61 071Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second110 to 4008-61 072Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -27250 to 408-61 073Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second220 to 4008-61 074Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -20210 to 408-61 075Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second220 to 4008-61 076Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -23230 to 408-63 077Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second110 to 4008-63 078Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -23230 to 408-63 079Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second220 to 4008-63 080Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -23230 to 408-63 081Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second330 to 4008-63 082Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) -25220 to 408-64 083Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second110 to 4008-64 084Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) -25220 to 408-64 085Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second220 to 4008-64 086Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-64 087Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-64 088Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-65 089Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-65 090Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-65 091Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-65 092Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-65 093Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-65 K105sm8e2_USC 8-22 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 094Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-66 095Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-66 096Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-66 097Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-66 098Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-66 099Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-66 100Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-67 101Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-67 102Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-67 103Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-67 104Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) -20200 to 408-67 105Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 1 second000 to 4008-67 106Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -23220 to 408-68 107Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-68 108Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-68 109Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-68 110Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -23220 to 408-68 111Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second550 to 4008-68 112Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -23230 to 408-69 113Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-69 114Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-69 115Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-69 116Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-69 117Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-69 118Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) -25220 to 408-70 119Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-70 120Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) -25220 to 408-70 121Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-70 122Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-70 123Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-70 K105sm8e2_USC 8-23 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 124Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-71 125Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-71 126Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-71 127Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-71 128Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-71 129Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-71 130Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-72 131Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-72 132Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-72 133Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-72 134Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-72 135Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-72 136Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-73 137Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-73 138Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-73 139Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-73 140Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-73 141Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-73 142Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -22210 to 408-74 143Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-74 144Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -21220 to 408-74 145Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-74 146Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-74 147Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second880 to 4008-74 148Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -22220 to 408-75 149Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-75 150Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -23240 to 408-75 151Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-75 152Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -22230 to 408-75 153Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second550 to 4008-75 K105sm8e2_USC 8-24 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 154Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-76 155Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-76 156Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-76 157Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-76 158Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-76 159Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-76 160Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-77 161Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-77 162Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-77 163Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-77 164Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-77 165Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-77 166Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-78 167Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-78 168Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-78 169Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-78 170Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-78 171Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-78 172Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-79 173Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-79 174Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-79 175Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-79 176Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-79 177Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-79 178Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -19180 to 408-80 179Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-80 180Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -19190 to 408-80 181Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-80 182Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20180 to 408-80 183Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second11110 to 4008-80 K105sm8e2_USC 8-25 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 184Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -19200 to 408-81 185Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-81 186Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20210 to 408-81 187Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-81 188Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20190 to 408-81 189Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second550 to 4008-81 190Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -22200 to 408-82 191Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-82 192Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -25230 to 408-82 193Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-82 194Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-82 195Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-82 196Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-83 197Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-83 198Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-83 199Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-83 200Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-83 201Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-83 202Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-84 203Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-84 204Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-84 205Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-84 206Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-84 207Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-84 208Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-85 209Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-85 210Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-85 211Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-85 212Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-85 213Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-85 K105sm8e2_USC 8-26 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 214Compensation of cut length (11 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-86 215Compensation of cut length (11 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-86 216Compensation of cut length (11 / Film)-50500 to 1008-86 217Compensation of cut length (11 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-86 218Compensation of cut length (11 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-86 219Compensation of cut length (11 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-86 220Compensation of cut length (12 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-86 221Compensation of cut length (12 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-86 222Compensation of cut length (12 / Film)-50500 to 1008-86 223Compensation of cut length (12 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-86 224Compensation of cut length (12 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-86 225Compensation of cut length (12 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-86 226Compensation of cut length (15 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-87 227Compensation of cut length (15 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-87 228Compensation of cut length (15 / Film)-50500 to 1008-87 229Compensation of cut length (15 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-87 230Compensation of cut length (15 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-87 231Compensation of cut length (15 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-87 232Compensation of cut length (17 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-87 233Compensation of cut length (17 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-87 234Compensation of cut length (17 / Film)-50500 to 1008-87 235Compensation of cut length (17 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-87 236Compensation of cut length (17 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-87 237Compensation of cut length (17 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-87 238Compensation of cut length (18 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-88 239Compensation of cut length (18 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-88 240Compensation of cut length (18 / Film)-50500 to 1008-88 241Compensation of cut length (18 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-88 242Compensation of cut length (18 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-88 243Compensation of cut length (18 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-88 244Compensation of cut length (22 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-88 245Compensation of cut length (22 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-88 246Compensation of cut length (22 / Film)-50500 to 1008-88 247Compensation of cut length (22 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-88 248Compensation of cut length (22 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-88 249Compensation of cut length (22 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-88 250Compensation of cut length (24 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-89 251Compensation of cut length (24 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-89 252Compensation of cut length (24 / Film)-50500 to 1008-89 253Compensation of cut length (24 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-89 254Compensation of cut length (24 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-89 255Compensation of cut length (24 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-89 256Compensation of cut length (30 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-89 257Compensation of cut length (30 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-89 258Compensation of cut length (30 / Film)-50500 to 1008-89 259Compensation of cut length (30 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-89 260Compensation of cut length (30 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-89 261Compensation of cut length (30 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-89 262Compensation of cut length (34 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-90 263Compensation of cut length (34 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-90 264Compensation of cut length (34 / Film)-50500 to 1008-90 265Compensation of cut length (34 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-90 266Compensation of cut length (34 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-90 267Compensation of cut length (34 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-90 268Compensation of cut length (36 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-90 269Compensation of cut length (36 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-90 270Compensation of cut length (36 / Film)-54540 to 1008-90 271Compensation of cut length (36 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-90 272Compensation of cut length (36 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-90 273Compensation of cut length (36 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-90 K105sm8e2_USC 8-27 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 274Compensation of cut length (A3 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-91 275Compensation of cut length (A3 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-91 276Compensation of cut length (A3 / Film)-50500 to 1008-91 277Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-91 278Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-91 279Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-91 280Compensation of cut length (A2 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-91 281Compensation of cut length (A2 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-91 282Compensation of cut length (A2 / Film)-50500 to 1008-91 283Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-91 284Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-91 285Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-91 286Compensation of cut length (A1 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-92 287Compensation of cut length (A1 / Tracing paper)-50520 to 1008-92 288Compensation of cut length (A1 / Film)-50500 to 1008-92 289Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-92 290Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-92 291Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-92 292Compensation of cut length (A0 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-92 293Compensation of cut length (A0 / Tracing paper)-50540 to 1008-92 294Compensation of cut length (A0 / Film)-50500 to 1008-92 295Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-92 296Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-92 297Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-92 298Compensation of cut length (B1 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-93 299Compensation of cut length (B1 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-93 300Compensation of cut length (B1 / Film)-50500 to 1008-93 301Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-93 302Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-93 303Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-93 304Compensation of cut length (880 / Plain paper)-50500 to 1008-93 305Compensation of cut length (880 / Tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-93 306Compensation of cut length (880 / Film)-50500 to 1008-93 307Compensation of cut length (880 / Special plain paper)-50500 to 1008-93 308Compensation of cut length (880 / Special tracing paper)-50500 to 1008-93 309Compensation of cut length (880 / Special film)-50500 to 1008-93 310Main Motor Speed (Plain paper)-21210 to 408-94 311Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper)-21210 to 408-94 312Main Motor Speed (Film)-24210 to 408-94 313Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper)-20200 to 408-94 314Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)-20200 to 408-94 315Main Motor Speed (Special film)-20200 to 408-94 316Fuser Motor Speed (Plain paper)-25180 to 408-94 317Fuser Motor Speed (Tracing paper)-24310 to 408-94 318Fuser Motor Speed (Film paper)-25240 to 408-94 319Fuser Motor Speed (Special plain paper)-20200 to 408-94 320Fuser Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)-20200 to 408-94 321Fuser Motor Speed (Special film)-20200 to 408-94 322Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper)1mm45450 to 1008-94 323Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper)1mm45450 to 1008-94 324Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film)1mm22220 to 1008-94 325Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper)1mm58580 to 1008-94 326Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper)1mm58580 to 1008-94 327Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film)1mm58580 to 1008-94 328Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -23220 to 408-95 329Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-95 330Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-95 331Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-95 332Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -23220 to 408-95 333Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second550 to 4008-95 K105sm8e2_USC 8-28 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 334Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) -23230 to 408-96 335Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-96 336Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-96 337Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-96 338Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -24240 to 408-96 339Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-96 340Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -25220 to 408-97 341Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second110 to 4008-97 342Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -25220 to 408-97 343Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second330 to 4008-97 344Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-97 345Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-97 346Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-98 347Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-98 348Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-98 349Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-98 350Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-98 351Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-98 352Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-99 353Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-99 354Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-99 355Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-99 356Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-99 357Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-99 358Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-100 359Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-100 360Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-100 361Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-100 362Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) -20200 to 408-100 363Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 1 second000 to 4008-100 364Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -22210 to 408-101 365Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-101 366Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -21220 to 408-101 367Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-101 368Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-101 369Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second880 to 4008-101 K105sm8e2_USC 8-29 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 370Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -22220 to 408-102 371Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-102 372Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -23240 to 408-102 373Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-102 374Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -22230 to 408-102 375Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second550 to 4008-102 376Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-103 377Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second110 to 4008-103 378Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -21210 to 408-103 379Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second770 to 4008-103 380Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-103 381Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-103 382Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-104 383Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-104 384Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-104 385Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-104 386Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-104 387Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-104 388Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-105 389Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-105 390Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-105 391Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-105 392Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-105 393Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-105 394Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-106 395Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-106 396Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-106 397Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-106 398Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) -20200 to 408-106 399Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 1 second000 to 4008-106 K105sm8e2_USC 8-30 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 400Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -18180 to 408-107 401Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-107 402Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -19190 to 408-107 403Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-107 404Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -18180 to 408-107 405Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second11110 to 4008-107 406Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -19200 to 408-108 407Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-108 408Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -19210 to 408-108 409Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-108 410Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -18190 to 408-108 411Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second550 to 4008-108 412Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -22200 to 408-109 413Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second110 to 4008-109 414Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -25230 to 408-109 415Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second12120 to 4008-109 416Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-109 417Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-109 418Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-110 419Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-110 420Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-110 421Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-110 422Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-110 423Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-110 424Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-111 425Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-111 426Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-111 427Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-111 428Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-111 429Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-111 K105sm8e2_USC 8-31 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 430Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-112 431Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-112 432Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-112 433Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-112 434Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) -20200 to 408-112 435Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 1 second000 to 4008-112 436Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)(Plain Paper / 30) -21200 to 408-113 437Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-113 438Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)(Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-113 439Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-113 440Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)(Plain Paper / 30) -22200 to 408-113 441Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second11110 to 4008-113 442Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)(Tracing / 30) -22230 to 408-114 443Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-114 444Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)(Tracing / 30) -21220 to 408-114 445Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-114 446Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)(Tracing / 30) -23210 to 408-114 447Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30) 1 second550 to 4008-114 448Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) -22200 to 408-115 449Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-115 450Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) -25230 to 408-115 451Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-115 452Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) -20200 to 408-115 453Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll)(Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-115 454Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-116 455Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-116 456Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-116 457Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-116 458Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-116 459Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-116 K105sm8e2_USC 8-32 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 460Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll)(Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-117 461Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-117 462Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-117 463Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-117 464Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-117 465Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-117 466Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-118 467Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-118 468Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-118 469Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-118 470Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-118 471Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-118 472Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet)(Plain Paper / 30) -20180 to 408-119 473Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-119 474Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30) -20190 to 408-119 475Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-119 476Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30) -20180 to 408-119 477Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30) 1 second11110 to 4008-119 478Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) -22200 to 408-120 479Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-120 480Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) -20210 to 408-120 481Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-120 482Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) -21190 to 408-120 483Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30) 1 second550 to 4008-120 484Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30) -22200 to 408-121 485Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Roll) (Film / 30) 1 second110 to 4008-121 486Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Cut sheet) (Film / 30) -25230 to 408-121 487Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30) 1 second12120 to 4008-121 488Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30) -20200 to 408-121 489Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-121 K105sm8e2_USC 8-33 NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Default Value Item No. Setting ItemUnit USAEUR / AS Setting range Refer to page ; 490Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-122 491Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-122 492Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-122 493Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-122 494Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) -20200 to 408-122 495Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-122 496Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-123 497Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 498Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-123 499Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 500Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) -20200 to 408-123 501Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 502Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-123 503Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 504Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-123 505Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 506Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) -20200 to 408-123 507Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30) 1 second000 to 4008-123 508Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) -255255-8-124 509Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) -255255-8-124 510Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) -255255-8-124 511Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) -33330 to 5108-124 512Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) -33330 to 5108-124 513Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) -2552550 to 5108-124 514Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) -16160 to 408-124 515Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) -16160 to 408-124 516Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film) -000 to 408-124 K105sm8e2_USC 8-348. 5. 4 Explanation for each Setting Item 8. 5. 4. 1 Leading Registration (No. 000 & 001) It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of the media. If you increase the setting value by +1 , the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 000Leading Registration (Roll paper)17191 to 401mm 001Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper)18201 to 401mm Leading Registration value is increased. value is decreased. 8. 5. 4. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 002 & 003) It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin. The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by +1 . Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 002Trailing Margin (Roll paper)9101 to 401mm 003Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper)9101 to 401mm Setting value is increased.Setting value is decreased. Trailing Margin NOTE Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much. K105sm8e2_USC 8-358. 5. 4. 3 Side Margin (Left & right) (Sub Mode No. 004) It is possible to adjust the amount of side margin. (Both left and right) Each side margin becomes 1mm wider if you increase the setting value. (As a result the width of print image becomes 2mm narrower.) Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 000 to 201mm Setting value is increased. Side Margin Setting value is decreased. NOTE Each print is compulsively provided with 3mm of side margins on both sides regardless of this setting. K105sm8e2_USC 8-368. 5. 4. 4 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No.008 to 010) It is possible to make the whole image of each Image Block (A, B and C) darker or lighter independently by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Main Pixels. As a result an even image density can be accomplished among 3 Image Blocks. The whole image of the concerning Image Block becomes darker if you increase the setting value. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 008LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block A : Left) 10100 to 131 micro second009LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block B : Center) 10100 to 131 micro second010LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block C : Right) 10100 to 131 micro second Block ABlock BBlock C Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased . Actual print image Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-39 for the explanation about Main Pixel and Supplemental Pixel. Decrease the value of008 to make the imageof Block A lighter. Increase the value of010 to make the imageof Block C darker. Main pixel Supplemental pixel K105sm8e2_USC 8-37 NOTE (1)The LED Strobe Times specified in these 008, 009 and 010 are directly applied to theTest Print.If the setting values are 10 (for 008), 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010), for example, theactual LED Strobe Times are also 10 (for block A), 11 (for block B) and 12 (for block C). In case of Test Print 008: 10 microseconds 009: 11 microseconds 010: 12 microseconds Block A Block B Block C (10) (11)(12) But in case of a copy or a plot, the density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from theoutput device (image scanner or controller) is applied to the Image Block A. And only the difference of setting values among 008, 009 and 010 are applied to theactual LED Strobe Time. If the density command from the output device is 8 microsecond and the setting valuesare 10 (for 008), 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010), for example, the actual LED Strobe Timesare 8 (for block A), 9 (for block B) and 10 (for block C). In case of copy or plot Density command from output device: 8 microseconds 008: 10 microseconds 009: 11 microseconds 010: 12 microseconds Block A Block B Block C (8) (9)(10) (2)If the value of density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device is largerthan 13 microsecond (Max.), it is automatically corrected to 13 microsecond. If it is smaller than 0 microsecond (Min.), it is corrected to 0 microsecond similarly.K105sm8e2_USC 8-388. 5. 4. 5 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block (No.011 to 013) If such image as a diagonal line looks too weak, you can make it clearer by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels. The adjustment is available for each Image Block independently. A diagonal line comes to look clearer if you increase the setting value, as the LED Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels becomes longer. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 011LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block A : Left) 000 to 131 micro second012LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block B : Center) 000 to 131 micro second013LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block C : Right) 000 to 131 micro second Block ABlock B Block C Increase the setting values of 011 and 013 to make the images of these blocks clearer. Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased. Actual print image Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-39 for the explanation about Main Pixel and Supplemental Pixel. Main pixel Supplemental pixel K105sm8e2_USC 8-39 Normally the KIP3000 takes 600 times of image exposure per inch for the vertical direction as its resolution is 600DPI. Pixels created by this normal timing are called [Main Pixel]. When a specific image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed, however, the KIP3000 will make additional image exposure between vertically neighboring 2 Main Pixels. This additional image exposure is completed within a very short time. The pixel created by this additional process is called [Supplemental Pixel]. Normal image pattern In case of a certain image pattern Main Pixels Supplemental Pixels Main Pixels Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line, for example, the diagonal one looks vague and rough although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear and smooth. This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical / horizontal one. If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel, diagonal line comes to look smoother and clearer. No Supplemental PixelSupplemental Pixels are provided. Direction of print Print imagePrint image (Diagonal line looks vague and rough.) (Diagonal Line looks clear and smooth) Reference K105sm8e2_USC 8-408. 5. 4. 6 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks (No.014 & 015) It is possible to align the pixels between Image Blocks if there is a gap of pixels. The Image Block B is the standard, and both the Image Blocks A and C can be shifted vertically. If you increase the setting value by +1, the whole pixels of the concerning Image Block is shifted 1 line (pixel) to the trailing edge side. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 014Horizontal Alignmentof Pixels between Image Blocks A & B 882 to 141 pixel 015Horizontal Alignmentof Pixels between Image Blocks B & C 882 to 141 pixel Decrease the value of 014 to shift the block A to the leading edge side. Decrease the value of 015 to shift the block C to the trailing edge side. K105sm8e3_USC 8-418. 5. 4. 7 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) (No.016) It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter. This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is provided with the length information. (this is command used on all standard pages printed from the IPS) If you increase the setting value by +1, the print length becomes 1mm longer. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 43430 to 1001mm Setting value is increased.Setting value is decreased . Cut length 8. 5. 4. 8 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No.017) It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter. This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is not provided with the length information. (This is may only be used on LONG prints over 6 meters on the IPS) If you increase the setting value by +1, the print length becomes 1mm longer. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 50500 to 1001mm Setting value is increased.Setting value is decreased . Cut length K105sm8e3_USC 8-428. 5. 4. 9 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print) (No.018) When you make a long print, the actual print length may become shorter than expected because the paper is likely to shrink. It is possible in this mode to compensate the print length manually. The length of long print is not compensated directly, but it is indirectly compensated by correcting the length of A1 print. If you increase the setting value by +1, the length of A1 print length becomes 0.1mm longer per 10mm. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 5005000 to 9990.1mm [Example of adjustment] 1.Supposing the actual length of a long print is shorter than expected. Expected lengthActual length Actual length is shorter than expected. 010050A B C010050A B C NOTE (1)It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No.016) before starting theadjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No.018). (2)This No.018 is the manual adjustment of the length of long print. But you can make the same adjustment in automatic way in the No.069. Refer to [8. 5. 4.36 Automatic Adjustment of Cut Length (Long print) (No.069)] on thepage 8-60. K105sm8e3_USC 8-43 2.Make an A1 (841mm long) or 34 long print. Measure the actual length of this A1 or 34 print to know how long millimeter it is shorter thanexpected. (Example: Print out is 838mm, so it is 3mm shorter than expected.) Expected length Actual length A1 or 34 3mm 3.Necessary value for the compensation is 10 times as long as the difference between actuallength and expected length. It is 30 in this example. (3mm x 10 = 30) Specify 30 as the setting value of No.018. 4.Make a long print. The actual print out will be as long as expected. Expected lengthActual length 010050A B C010050A B C K105sm8e3_USC 8-448. 5. 4.10 Developer Bias (No.022 to 027) It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting the Developer Bias (Negative Developer Roller Bias). The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 022Developer Bias (Plain paper)1351350 to 2551 023Developer Bias (Tracing paper)1351350 to 2551 024Developer Bias (Film)1351350 to 2551 025Developer Bias(Special media / Plain paper) 1351350 to 2551 026Developer Bias(Special media / Tracing paper) 1351350 to 2551 027Developer Bias (Special media / Film)1351350 to 2551 Setting value is increased.Setting value is decreased. NOTE Please adjust the Developer Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter. K105sm8e3_USC 8-458. 5. 4.11 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution (No.028) It is possible to compensate the Developer Bias only for the 1st Drum revolution. The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value. (Developer Bias is not compensated at all if the setting value is 0) Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 1551550 to 2551 Density of leading area is darker.Setting value is increased.(Even density) 8. 5. 4.12 Transfer Voltage (No.029 to 034) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage outputted to the Transfer Corona during the print cycle. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 029Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Plain paper) 1751753 to 2551 030Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Tracing paper) 1751753 to 2551 031Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Film) 1751753 to 2551 032Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Plain paper) 1751753 to 2551 033Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Tracing paper) 1751753 to 2551 034Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Film) 1751753 to 2551 NOTE There may be the case that the density of leading area, which corresponds to the 1st revolution of Drum, is darker than other area. In this case compensate the Developer Bias to have even density on both areas. NOTE Please adjust the Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter. K105sm8e3_USC 8-468. 5. 4.13 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.035) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona starts discharging during the print cycle. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.14 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.037) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 50480 to 1001mm NOTE You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value too much, because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed. Normal Setting value is increased too much. Transfer Corona starts discharging at this point. K105sm8e3_USC 8-478. 5. 4.15 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.038) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 40230 to 1001mm NOTE You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value too much, because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early. Normal Setting value is increased too much. Transfer Corona stops discharging at this point. K105sm8e3_USC 8-488. 5. 4.16 Fuser Temperature (No.039 to 044) It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature which is maintained after the machine gets ready You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately. The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by +1. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 039Fuser Temperature (Plain paper)165165120 to 1801oC 040Fuser Temperature (Tracing paper)164165120 to 1801oC 041Fuser Temperature (Film)170160120 to 1801oC 042Fuser Temperature(Special media / Plain paper) 165165120 to 1801oC 043Fuser Temperature (Special media / Tracing paper) 165165120 to 1801oC 044Fuser Temperature (Special media / Film) 160160120 to 1801oC (oC) Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example: 160oC) 0(Time) Turn on Ready K105sm8e3_USC 8-498. 5. 4.17 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No.045) It is possible to decide the temperature to start idling. When the Fuser Temperature reaches the value specified in this No.045 during the warming up, the Fuser Motor starts rotating to drive the Fuser Roller (idling). Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 120120100 to 1401oC Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example : 160 oC) (oC) Setting value of 045 (Example: 140 oC) 0 (Time) Ready (Idling stops.) Turn onIdling starts. 8. 5. 4.18 Warm Sleep Fuser Temperature (No.046) It is possible to decide the temperature which is maintained in the Warm Sleep. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 100100100 to 1601oC Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example: 160 oC) (oC) Setting value of 046 (Example: 100 oC) 0 (Time) Warm Sleep starts. 100 oC is maintained after this point. K105sm8e3_USC 8-508. 5. 4.19 Fuser Temperature Overshoot Value (No.047) Overshoot means that the Fuser Roller is heated up beyond the regular temperature (Fuser Temperature specified in No.039 to 044) when the temperature of Fuser Roller is very low like in the morning. In this No.047 you can specify how much degree the temperature of Fuser Roller overshoots the value of Fuser Temperature. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 0100 to 301oC Setting value of 047 (Example: Setting value is 10) (oC) Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example: 160 oC) 0(Time) Turn onReady 30 oC NOTE (1)Overshoot works only when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than 30 oC. (2)When Overshoot works, the machine gets ready when the temperature of Fuser Rollerreaches the sum value of Fuser Temperature and Overshoot. (The machine will get ready when the temperature of Fuser Roller reaches 170 oC incase of the above example.) (3)The purpose of Overshoot is to stabilize the image fusing even right after turning on. K105sm8e3_USC 8-518. 5. 4.20 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.048 & 049) It is possible to specify the control range of temperature of Fuser Roller. If you specify some setting value X on these No.048 and 049, for example, you can decide the highest limit and the lowest one of the control range of temperature. The highest limit is Fuser Temperature (Decided in No.039 to 044) plus the setting value X. And the lowest one is Fuser Temperature minus X. The Fuser Lamp continues to light up when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than the highest limit, and it is put out when the temperature reaches the highest limit. The Fuser Roller gradually gets colder after that, and the Fuser Lamp lights again when the temperature reaches the lowest limit. Control range can be decided separately to each condition in the print cycle and stand by. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 048Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle) 111 to 201oC 049Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by) 221 to 201oC Example: Value of No.048 (Fuser Temperature Control Range) is 10 Value of No.039 (Fuser Temperature) is 160 Highest limit of control rangeFuser Temperature (170 oC) (160 oC) Fuser Lamp turns OFF. (oC) Lowest limit of control range Fuser Lamp turns ON. (150 oC) 0(Time) K105sm8e3_USC 8-528. 5. 4.21 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.050) It is possible to change the reaction time of Toner Supply Motor. Reaction time is the time taken until the Toner Supply Motor starts working since Toner Low has been detected. The reaction time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 15151 to 301 second Toner LowMotor starts working Motor stops (Time) Setting value of No.050 8. 5. 4.22 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No.051) It is possible change the time the Toner Supply Motor works (ON time). The ON time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 10101 to 151 second Toner LowMotor starts working Motor stops (Time) Setting value of No.051 NOTE The reaction time may be too long if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large volume prints continuously. In this case try to decrease the setting value of No.050 to shorten the reaction time. NOTE The ON time may be too short if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large volume prints continuously. In this case try to increase the setting value of No.051 to make the ON time longer. K105sm8e3_USC 8-538. 5. 4.23 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052) It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer. An isolated dot image is more emphasized if you increase the setting value. Setting valueContents 1(Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Emphasized 2More emphasized 3Most emphasized (1)An isolated dot image tends to look so weak. The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear. (Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize thedots coming together some degree.) Dot Enhancement function is OFF. Dot Enhancement function is ON. (2)The Dot Enhancement function can be validated in the User Mode. It will not work if not validated. Reference K105sm8e3_USC 8-548. 5. 4.24Feed Clutch (CL3) OFF time applied to long print (No.053) The Feed Clutch turns OFF for a very short period whenever the machine transports the paper 3 meters long, so as to remove the paper slack in a long printing. It is possible in this No.053 to specify how long period the Feed Clutch continues to be OFF. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 13013080 to 1801msec. 3 meters 3 meters 3 meters Feed Clutch turns OFF Feed Clutch turns OFF K105sm8e3_USC 8-558. 5. 4.25 Switch timing of Toner Supply Roller Bias (No.054) It is possible to specify the timing to switch the Toner Supply Roller Bias from high to low. The setting unit is 1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 220mm. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 45450 to 2201mm The Toner Supply Roller Bias is high (-50 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias) right after starting the print. When the leading edge reaches the position at X millimeters from the sensor (PH6), which you have specified in the No.054, the Toner Supply Roller Bias changes to low (-150 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias). Setting value of No.054 (X millimeters) Toner Supply Roller Bias changes from low to high when the trailing edge of paper reaches the position at X millimeters from the sensor (PH1). Setting value of No.054 (X millimeters) Toner Supply Roller Bias changes from high to low when the leading edge of paper reaches here. Reference Toner Supply Roller Bias changes from low to high when the leading edge of paper reaches here. PH6 PH1 K105sm8e3_USC 8-568. 5. 4.26 Metric or Inch (No.055) It is possible to decide the base format of the print. Setting valueContents 0 (Default in EUR & ASIA) Metric 1(Default in USA) Inch 8. 5. 4.27 Language (No.056) It is possible to specify the indication language of User Interface. Setting valueContents 0Japanese 1 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) English 8. 5. 4.28 Interface Communication Setting (No.057) It is possible to specify the communication of Interface. Setting valueContents 0Both the A Channel and the B Channel are used alternately. Interface Board communicates with both the image scanner (through A Channel) and the controller (through B Channel) alternately. 1The A Channel only is used. Interface Board communicates with image scanner through the A Channel. 2 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) The B Channel only is used. Interface Board communicates with controller through the B Channel. 8. 5. 4.29 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.058) It is possible to make the machine recognize the optional Roll Deck 2 if it is installed. Setting valueContents 0Optional Roll Deck 2 is not installed. 1 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Optional Roll Deck 2 is installed. K105sm8e3_USC 8-578. 5. 4.30 Counter Value (No.059) It is possible to specify the counting unit of Counter. Setting valueContents 0 (Default in EUR & ASIA) 1 linear meter 10.1 linear meter 21 square meter 30.1 square meter 41 linear foot 5 (Default in USA) 1 square foot 8. 5. 4.31 Maximum Length (No.060) It is possible to specify the maximum cut length. Setting valueContents 0 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Maximum cut length is 3.6m. 1Maximum cut length is 24m. 8. 5. 4.32 Stacking Device setting (No.061) It is possible to make the KIP3000 recognize the optional device (stacker or folder) if connected. Setting valueContents 0 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Optional device is not connected. 1Auto Stacker (K-76) NOTE We will not guarantee the print quality if the print is longer than the following sizes. 36 plain paper3.6m Other sizes of plain paper 3 times as long as each standard size Tracing paperTwice as long as each standard size FilmStandard sizes K105sm8e3_USC 8-588. 5. 4.33 Operation of Fuser Roller (No.062) It is possible to decide whether or not the Fuser Roller should rotate periodically in the stand by condition. Setting valueContents 0 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Fuser Roller rotates periodically in the stand by condition. 1Fuser Roller does not rotate at all in the stand by condition. 8. 5. 4.34 Operation of Central Fuser Fan (No.063 & 064) A tracing paper wider than A2 (22) is likely to be creased when both sides of the Fuser Roller are relatively cold. When such a large tracing paper is used in the specific condition, the Central Fuser Fan works to cool down the central area of Fuser Roller. As the Fuser Lamp lights to heat up the central area of Fuser Roller, both sides are also heated up. As a result you can avoid the crease of paper. No.063 is applied when you select the tracing paper, and No.064 is applied when you select the special tracing paper. Default valueItem No.Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment 063Operation of Central Fuser Fan (Applied when tracing paper is used) 167168130 to 1701oC 064Operation of Central Fuser Fan (Applied when special tracing paper is used) 143143130 to 1701oC The Central Fuser Fan starts or stops working in the following conditions. Starts working: The right side of Fuser Roller becomes 1oC colder than the settingvalue of No.063 (or No.064), and also the central area of it becomeshotter than that of No.040 (or No.043). Stops working: The right side of Fuser Roller becomes 1oC hotter than the settingvalue of No.063 (or No.064), or the central area of it becomes 5oCcolder than that of No.040 (or No.043). Reference The Fuser Roller periodically rotates and then stops when the machine is ready, so as to equalize the temperature at every point of Fuser Roller. But if you feel it is so noisy to rotate it, select the setting value 1. In this case please note that the fusing quality may not be so good because the temperature of Fuser Roller is not equalized. Reference K105sm8e3_USC 8-598. 5. 4.35 Drum Reverse Time (No.065) It is possible to change the period for the Drum reverse rotation. Developer Roller is strongly pressed to the Drum and that may cause an indentation on Developer Rollers surface. The indentation may result in defective imaging. The Drum makes a reverse rotation in a given period twice after finishing a job. Setting a bigger value for No.065 makes the reverse rotation period longer. Default value USAEUR/ASIA Setting rangeStep of increment 505010 to 701 millisecond Print process end Drum reverse rotation starts stops / starts againstops Value for No.065Value for No.065 8. 5. 4.36 Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067) There may be the case that some type of printing paper has a difficulty in paper separation. In this case it is possible to assist paper separation by lighting the Separation Lamp. It is possible in this No.067 to decide to which type of paper the Separation Lamp should light. Selectable values are from 1 to 7 Setting valueContents 1Separation Lamp lights for plain paper. 2Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper. 3Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and tracing paper. 4 (Default in USA, EUR & ASIA) Separation Lamp lights for film. 5Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and film. 6Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper and film. 7Separation Lamp lights for all kinds of paper. Sometimes you can avoid defect of transfer (light image) by making the Separation Lamp work. So if you feel the print image is too light, try to make it work. You may be able to fix the problem.Reference (1) The Drum reverse rotation may produce a slight amount of toner sticking on the Drums surface. This causes a black line at 50mm below the leading registration on a print. Setting a smaller value will reduce such a line. (2) Setting an extremely small value may cause an indentation on Developer Roller. Reference K105sm8e3_USC 8-608. 5. 4.37 Automatic Adjustment of Cut Length (Long print) (No.069) The printing paper may shrink very much if you make a long print, but it is possible to compensate the print length automatically in this No.069. Expected print lengthActual print length Amount of Papers shrink [Way of adjustment] 1.Select the Item Number 069 in the Adjustment Mode. 2.Set an A1 roll paper to the Roll Deck 1. 3.Press the [ENTER] Key. 4.The machine takes 4 sheets of 210mm long prints automatically. 5.Then, the machine also takes 4 sheets of 840mm prints automatically. 6.The machine automatically calculates the best compensationdata from those 8 sheets of print. Press the [ * ] Key to write this data into the memory. (It will not be written in the memory if you press the [ENTER] Key.) St ep3 Dat a Wr i t eY: N: ENTER 010050A B C010050A B C K105sm8e4_USC 8-618. 5. 4.38 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.070 to 075) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment070Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)25230 to 40 071Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 110 to 4001 second 072Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)27250 to 40 073Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 220 to 4001 second 074Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11)20210 to 40 075Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 220 to 4001 second Sometimes crease of paper or defective image may occur when you make a very long print with a constant Fuser Motor Speed. Fuser Motor Speed is constant Leading edge Defective imageCrease of paper It is effective to fix these problems if we change the Fuser Motor Speed step by step during 1 sheet of print. The Fuser Motor speed can be changed 3 times in maximum for 1 sheet of print. At first the Fuser Motor rotates obeying the setting of Fuser Motor Speed (specified in No.316 to 321). After that it changes its rotation speed step by step obeying the settings of No.070 to 075. Fuser Motor 1st Speed Fuser Motor 2nd SpeedFuser Motor 3rd Speed Switch Timing (No.071)Switch Timing (No.073) Switch Timing (No.075) Fuser MotorFuser Motor 1st Fuser Motor 2nd Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (No.316)Speed (No.070) Speed (No.072)Speed (No.074) 010050ABC 010050ABCReference K105sm8e4_USC 8-62You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.070, 072 and 074. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. (The default setting value 20 corresponds to 60mm/second.) (Example) Setting value of 070 is 21 Fuser Motor 1st Speed is 60.06mm/sec. Setting value of 072 is 22 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed is 60.12mm/sec. Setting value of 074 is 23 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed is 60.18mm/sec. Fuser MotorFuser Motor Fuser Motor 1st Speed 2nd Speed 3rd Speed (60.06mm/sec.)(60.12mm/sec.)(60.18mm/sec.) You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.071, 073 and 075. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. (If you specify 0, the Fuser Motor Speed does not change.) (Example) Setting value of 071 is 5Fuser Motor 1st Speed starts 5 seconds after the Registration Sensor detects the leading edge. Setting value of 073 is 10 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed starts 10 seconds after the start ofFuser Motor 1st Speed. Setting value of 075 is 15 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed starts 15 seconds after the start ofFuser Motor 1st Speed. 5 seconds 10 seconds15 seconds (Fuser motor Speed)(Fuser Motor 1st Speed) (Fuser Motor 2nd Speed)(Fuser Motor 3rd Speed) 010050ABC 010050ABC K105sm8e4_USC 8-638. 5. 4.39 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.076 to 081) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment076Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)23230 to 40 077Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 110 to 4001 second 078Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)23230 to 40 079Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 220 to 4001 second 080Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11)23230 to 40 081Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 330 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.076, 078 and 080. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.077, 079 and 081. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-648. 5. 4.40 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.082 to 087) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment082Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)25220 to 40 083Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 110 to 4001 second 084Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)25220 to 40 085Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 220 to 4001 second 086Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11)20200 to 40 087Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Film / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.082, 084 and 086. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.083, 085 and 087. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-658. 5. 4.41 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.088 to 093) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment088Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 089Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 090Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 091Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 092Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 093Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.088, 090 and 092. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.089, 091 and 093. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-668. 5. 4.42 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A3, 12 & 11) (No.094 to 099) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment094Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 095Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 096Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 097Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 098Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 20200 to 40 099Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll/Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.094, 096 and 098. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.095, 097 and 099. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-678. 5. 4.43 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A3, 12 & 11) (No.100 to 105) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A3, 12 and 11 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment100Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)20200 to 40 101Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 102Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)20200 to 40 103Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second 104Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11)20200 to 40 105Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3, 12 & 11) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.100, 102 and 104. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.101, 103 and 105. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-688. 5. 4.44 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.106 to 111) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment106Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17)23220 to 40 107Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 108Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17)24240 to 40 109Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 110Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17)23220 to 40 111Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.106, 108 and 110. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.107, 109 and 111. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-698. 5. 4.45 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.112 to 117) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment112Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)23230 to 40 113Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 114Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)24240 to 40 115Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 116Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17)24240 to 40 117Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.112, 114 and 116. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.113, 115 and 117. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-708. 5. 4.46 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.118 to 123) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment118Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)25220 to 40 119Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 120Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)25220 to 40 121Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 122Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17)20200 to 40 123Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Film / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.118, 120 and 122. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.119, 121 and 123. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-718. 5. 4.47 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.124 to 129) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment124Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 125Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 126Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 127Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 128Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 129Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.124, 126 and 128. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.125, 127 and 129. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-728. 5. 4.48 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A2, 18 & 17) (No.130 to 135) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment130Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 131Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 132Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 133Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 134Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 135Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.130, 132 and 134. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.131, 133 and 135. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-738. 5. 4.49 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A2, 18 & 17) (No.136 to 141) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment136Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17)20200 to 40 137Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 138Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17)20200 to 40 139Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 140Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17)20200 to 40 141Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special film / A2, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.136, 138 and 140. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.137, 139 and 141. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-748. 5. 4.50 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.142 to 147) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment142Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22)22210 to 40 143Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 144Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22)21220 to 40 145Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 146Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22)21210 to 40 147Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 880 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.142, 144 and 146. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.143, 145 and 147. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-758. 5. 4.51 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.148 to 153) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment148Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)22220 to 40 149Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 150Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)23240 to 40 151Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 152Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)22230 to 40 153Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.148, 150 and 152. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.149, 151 and 153. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-768. 5. 4.52 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.154 to 159) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment154Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)21210 to 40 155Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 156Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)21210 to 40 157Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 158Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22)20200 to 40 159Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.154, 156 and 158. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.155, 157 and 159. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-778. 5. 4.53 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.160 to 165) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment160Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 161Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 162Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 163Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 164Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 165Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.160, 162 and 164. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.161, 163 and 165. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-788. 5. 4.54 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.166 to 171) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment166Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 167Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 168Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 169Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 170Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 171Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.166, 168 and 170. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.167, 169 and 171. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-798. 5. 4.55 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.172 to 177) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment172Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22)20200 to 40 173Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 174Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22)20200 to 40 175Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 176Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22)20200 to 40 177Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.172, 174 and 176. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.173, 175 and 177. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-808. 5. 4.56 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.178 to 183) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment178Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34)19180 to 40 179Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 180Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34)19190 to 40 181Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 182Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34)20180 to 40 183Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 11110 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.178, 180 and 182. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.179, 181 and 183. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-818. 5. 4.57 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.184 to 189) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment184Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)19200 to 40 185Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 186Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)20210 to 40 187Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 188Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)20190 to 40 189Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.184, 186 and 188. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.185, 187 and 189. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-828. 5. 4.58 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.190 to 195) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment190Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)22200 to 40 191Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 192Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)25230 to 40 193Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 194Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34)20200 to 40 195Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.190, 192 and 194. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.191, 193 and 195. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-838. 5. 4.59 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.196 to 201) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment196Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 197Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 198Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 199Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 200Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 201Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.196, 198 and 200. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.197, 199 and 201. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-848. 5. 4.60 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.202 to 207) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A0, 36 and 34 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment202Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 203Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 204Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 205Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 206Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 207Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.202, 204 and 206. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.203, 205 and 207. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-858. 5. 4.61 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.208 to 213) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A0, 24 and 22 sizes by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment208Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34)20200 to 40 209Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 210Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34)20200 to 40 211Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 212Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34)20200 to 40 213Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.208, 210 and 212. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.209, 211 and 213. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-868. 5. 4.62 Compensation of cut length for roll width 11 (No.214 to 219) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 11 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment214Compensation of cut length (11 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 215Compensation of cut length (11 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 216Compensation of cut length (11 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 217Compensation of cut length (11 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 218Compensation of cut length (11 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 219Compensation of cut length (11 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.63 Compensation of cut length for roll width 12 (No.220 to 225) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 12 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment220Compensation of cut length (12 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 221Compensation of cut length (12 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 222Compensation of cut length (12 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 223Compensation of cut length (12 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 224Compensation of cut length (12 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 225Compensation of cut length (12 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.214 to 219. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.220 to 225. K105sm8e4_USC 8-878. 5. 4.64 Compensation of cut length for roll width 15 (No.226 to 231) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 15 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment226Compensation of cut length (15 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 227Compensation of cut length (15 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 228Compensation of cut length (15 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 229Compensation of cut length (15 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 230Compensation of cut length (15 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 231Compensation of cut length (15 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.65 Compensation of cut length for roll width 17 (No.232 to 237) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 17 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment232Compensation of cut length (17 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 233Compensation of cut length (17 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 234Compensation of cut length (17 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 235Compensation of cut length (17 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 236Compensation of cut length (17 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 237Compensation of cut length (17 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.226 to 231. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.232 to 237. K105sm8e4_USC 8-888. 5. 4.66 Compensation of cut length for roll width 18 (No.238 to 243) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 18 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment238Compensation of cut length (18 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 239Compensation of cut length (18 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 240Compensation of cut length (18 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 241Compensation of cut length (18 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 242Compensation of cut length (18 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 243Compensation of cut length (18 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.67 Compensation of cut length for roll width 22 (No.244 to 249) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 22 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment244Compensation of cut length (22 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 245Compensation of cut length (22 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 246Compensation of cut length (22 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 247Compensation of cut length (22 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 248Compensation of cut length (22 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 249Compensation of cut length (22 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.238 to 243. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.244 to 249. K105sm8e4_USC 8-898. 5. 4.68 Compensation of cut length for roll width 24 (No.250 to 255) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 24 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment250Compensation of cut length (24 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 251Compensation of cut length (24 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 252Compensation of cut length (24 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 253Compensation of cut length (24 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 254Compensation of cut length (24 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 255Compensation of cut length (24 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.69 Compensation of cut length for roll width 30 (No.256 to 261) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 30 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment256Compensation of cut length (30 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 257Compensation of cut length (30 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 258Compensation of cut length (30 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 259Compensation of cut length (30 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 260Compensation of cut length (30 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 261Compensation of cut length (30 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.250 to 255. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.256 to 261. K105sm8e4_USC 8-908. 5. 4.70 Compensation of cut length for roll width 34 (No.262 to 267) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 34 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment262Compensation of cut length (34 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 263Compensation of cut length (34 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 264Compensation of cut length (34 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 265Compensation of cut length (34 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 266Compensation of cut length (34 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 267Compensation of cut length (34 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.71 Compensation of cut length for roll width 36 (No.268 to 273) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 36 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment268Compensation of cut length (36 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 269Compensation of cut length (36 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 270Compensation of cut length (36 / Film)54540 to 1001mm 271Compensation of cut length (36 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 272Compensation of cut length (36 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 273Compensation of cut length (36 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.262 to 267. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.268 to 273. K105sm8e4_USC 8-918. 5. 4.72 Compensation of cut length for roll width A3 (No.274 to 279) It is possible to compensate the cut length of A3 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment274Compensation of cut length (A3 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 275Compensation of cut length (A3 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 276Compensation of cut length (A3 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 277Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 278Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 279Compensation of cut length (A3 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.73 Compensation of cut length for roll width A2 (No.280 to 285) It is possible to compensate the cut length of A2 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment280Compensation of cut length (A2 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 281Compensation of cut length (A2 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 282Compensation of cut length (A2 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 283Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 284Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 285Compensation of cut length (A2 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.274 to 279. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.280 to 285. K105sm8e4_USC 8-928. 5. 4.74 Compensation of cut length for roll width A1 (No.286o 291) It is possible to compensate the cut length of A1 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment286Compensation of cut length (A1 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 287Compensation of cut length (A1 / Tracing paper)50520 to 1001mm 288Compensation of cut length (A1 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 289Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 290Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 291Compensation of cut length (A1 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.75 Compensation of cut length for roll width A0 (No.292 to 297) It is possible to compensate the cut length of A0 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment292Compensation of cut length (A0 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 293Compensation of cut length (A0 / Tracing paper)50540 to 1001mm 294Compensation of cut length (A0 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 295Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 296Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 297Compensation of cut length (A0 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.286 to 291. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.292 to 297. K105sm8e4_USC 8-938. 5. 4.76 Compensation of cut length for roll width B1 (No.298 to 303) It is possible to compensate the cut length of B1 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment298Compensation of cut length (B1 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 299Compensation of cut length (B1 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 300Compensation of cut length (B1 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 301Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 302Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 303Compensation of cut length (B1 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm 8. 5. 4.77 Compensation of cut length for roll width 880 (No.304 to 309) It is possible to compensate the cut length of 880 roll paper if it is not correct. The setting range is from 0 to 100, and the cut length becomes 1mm longer if you increase the setting value by +1. Adjustment can be done for each type of paper separately. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment304Compensation of cut length (880 / Plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 305Compensation of cut length (880 / Tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 306Compensation of cut length (880 / Film)50500 to 1001mm 307Compensation of cut length (880 / Special plain paper)50500 to 1001mm 308Compensation of cut length (880 / Special tracing paper)50500 to 1001mm 309Compensation of cut length (880 / Special film)50500 to 1001mm NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.298 to 303. NOTE Please finish the basic adjustment of cut length (Cut Length 1 [No.016] and Cut Length 3 [No.018]) before starting to adjust these settings from No.304 to 309. K105sm8e4_USC 8-948. 5. 4.78 Main Motor Speed (No.310 to 315) It is possible to adjust the speed of Main Motor for each type of paper separately. If you increase the setting value by +1, the motor speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment310Main Motor Speed (Plain paper)21210 to 40- 311Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper)21210 to 40- 312Main Motor Speed (Film)24210 to 40- 133Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper)20200 to 40- 314Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)20200 to 40- 315Main Motor Speed (Special film)20200 to 40- 8. 5. 4.79 Fuser Motor Speed (No.316 to 321) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately. If you increase the setting value by +1, the motor speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment316Fuser Motor Speed (Plain paper)25180 to 40- 317Fuser Motor Speed (Tracing paper)24310 to 40- 318Fuser Motor Speed (Film paper)25240 to 40- 319Fuser Motor Speed (Special plain paper)20200 to 40- 320Fuser Motor Speed (Special tracing paper)20200 to 40- 321Fuser Motor Speed (Special film)20200 to 40- 8. 5. 4.80 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.322 to 327) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona stops discharging during the print cycle. You can specify the timing for each type of paper separately. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment322Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper)58180 to 1001mm 323Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper)58180 to 1001mm 324Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film)58180 to 1001mm 325Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper)58580 to 1001mm 326Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper)58580 to 1001mm 327Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film)58580 to 1001mm CAUTION The Main Motor Speed is the basis for many other print settings. So you have to re-adjust all of these print settings if you change the Main Motor Speed. K105sm8e4_USC 8-958. 5. 4.81 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.328 to 333) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment328Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 23220 to 40 329Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 330Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 24240 to 40 331Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 332Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 23220 to 40 333Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.328, 330 and 332. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.329, 331 and 333. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-968. 5. 4.82 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.334 to 339) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment334Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 23230 to 40 335Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 336Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 24240 to 40 337Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 338Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 24240 to 40 339Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.334, 336 and 338. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.335, 337 and 339. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-978. 5. 4.83 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.340 to 345) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment340Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 25220 to 40 341Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 110 to 4001 second 342Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 25220 to 40 343Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 330 to 4001 second 344Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 345Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.340, 342 and 344. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.341, 343 and 345. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-988. 5. 4.84 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)(No.346 to 351) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment346Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 347Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 348Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 349Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 350Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 351Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.346, 348 and 350. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.347, 349 and 351. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-998. 5. 4.85 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special tracing paper / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17)(No.352 to 357) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment352Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 353Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 354Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 355Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 356Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 357Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.352, 354 and 356. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.353, 355 and 357. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1008. 5. 4.86 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) (No.358 to 363) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A2, 18 and 17 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment358Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 359Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 360Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 361Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second 362Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 20200 to 40 363Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A3, A2, 12, 11, 18 & 17) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.358, 360 and 362. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.359, 361 and 363. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1018. 5. 4.87 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.364 to 369) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment364Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 22210 to 40 365Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 366Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 21220 to 40 367Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 368Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 21210 to 40 369Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 880 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.364, 366 and 368. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.365, 367 and 369. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1028. 5. 4.88 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.370 to 375) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment370Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)22220 to 40 371Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 372Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)23240 to 40 373Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 374Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22)22230 to 40 375Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.370, 372 and 374. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.371, 373 and 375. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1038. 5. 4.89 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.376 to 381) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment376Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)21210 to 40 377Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 110 to 4001 second 378Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)21210 to 40 379Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 770 to 4001 second 380Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22)20200 to 40 381Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.376, 378 and 380. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.377, 379 and 381. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1048. 5. 4.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.382 to 387) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment382Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 383Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 384Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 385Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 386Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 387Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.382, 384 and 386. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.383, 385 and 387. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1058. 5. 4.91 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special tracing paper / A1, 24 & 22) (No.388 to 393) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment388Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 389Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 390Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 391Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 392Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 393Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.388, 390 and 392. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.389, 391 and 393. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1068. 5. 4.92 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special film / A1, 24 & 22) (No.394 to 399) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A1, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment394Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 395Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 396Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 397Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second 398Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 20200 to 40 399Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A1, 24 & 22) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.394, 396 and 398. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.395, 397 and 399. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1078. 5. 4.93 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.400 to 405) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment400Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 18180 to 40 401Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 402Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 19190 to 40 403Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 404Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 18180 to 40 405Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 11110 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.400, 402 and 404. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.401, 403 and 405. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1088. 5. 4.94 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.406 to 411) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment406Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)19200 to 40 407Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 408Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)19210 to 40 409Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 410Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34)18190 to 40 411Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.406, 408 and 410. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.407, 409 and 411. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1098. 5. 4.95 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.412 to 417) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment412Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)22200 to 40 413Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 110 to 4001 second 414Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)25230 to 40 415Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 12120 to 4001 second 416Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34)20200 to 40 417Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.412, 414 and 416. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.413, 415 and 417. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1108. 5. 4.96 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.418 to 423) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A0, 36 and 34 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment418Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 419Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 420Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 421Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 422Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 423Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.418, 420 and 422. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.419, 421 and 423. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1118. 5. 4.97 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special tracing paper / A0, 36 & 34) (No.424 to 429) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A0, 36 and 34 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment424Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 425Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 426Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 427Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 428Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 429Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.424, 426 and 428. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.425, 427 and 429. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1128. 5. 4.98 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper(Special film / A0, 36 & 34) (No.430 to 435) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A0, 24 and 22 sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment430Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 431Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 432Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 433Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second 434Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 20200 to 40 435Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Cut sheet / Special film / A0, 36 & 34) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.430, 432 and 434. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.431, 433 and 435. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1138. 5. 4.99 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper(Plain paper / 30) (No.436 to 441) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment436Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)21200 to 40 437Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / plain paper / 30) 110 to 4001 second 438Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)20200 to 40 439Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / plain paper / 30) 12120 to 4001 second 440Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30)22200 to 40 441Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / plain paper / 30) 11110 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.436, 438 and 440. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.437, 439 and 441. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1148. 5. 4.100 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / 30) (No.442 to 447) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment442Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)22230 to 40 443Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30) 110 to 4001 second 444Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)21220 to 40 445Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / tracing / 30) 12120 to 4001 second 446Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30)23210 to 40 447Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / tracing / 30) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.442, 444 and 446. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.443, 445 and 447. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1158. 5. 4.101 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / 30) (No.448 to 453) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment448Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30)22200 to 40 449Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30)110 to 4001 second 450Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30)25230 to 40 451Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30)12120 to 4001 second 452Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30)20200 to 40 453Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30)000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.448, 450 and 452. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.449, 451 and 453. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1168. 5. 4.102 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / 30) (No.454 to 459) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment454Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)20200 to 40 455Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second 456Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)20200 to 40 457Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second 458Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30)20200 to 40 459Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.454, 456 and 458. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.455, 457 and 459. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1178. 5. 4.103 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / 30) (No.460 to 465) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment460Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 461Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second 462Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 463Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second 464Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 465Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.460, 462 and 464. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.461, 463 and 465. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1188. 5. 4.104 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / 30) (No.466 to 471) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30 size by roll paper feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment466Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special film / 30)20200 to 40 467Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed(Roll / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second 468Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special film / 30)20200 to 40 469Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed(Roll / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second 470Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special film / 30)20200 to 40 471Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed(Roll / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.466, 468 and 470. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.467, 469 and 471. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1198. 5. 4.105 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Plain paper / 30) (No.472 to 477) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment472Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)20180 to 40 473Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30) 110 to 4001 second 474Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)20190 to 40 475Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30) 12120 to 4001 second 476Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30)20180 to 40 477Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30) 11110 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.472, 474 and 476. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.473, 475 and 477. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1208. 5. 4.106 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Tracing paper / 30) (No.478 to 483) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment478Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)22200 to 40 479Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30) 110 to 4001 second 480Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)20210 to 40 481Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30) 12120 to 4001 second 482Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30)21190 to 40 483Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30) 550 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.478, 480 and 482. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.479, 481 and 483. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1218. 5. 4.107 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Film / 30) (No.484 to 489) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment484Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)22200 to 40 485Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30) 110 to 4001 second 486Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)25230 to 40 487Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30) 12120 to 4001 second 488Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30)20200 to 40 489Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.484, 486 and 488. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.485, 487 and 489. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1228. 5. 4.108 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Special plain paper / 30) (No.490 to 495) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment490Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 20200 to 40 491Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second 492Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 20200 to 40 493Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second 494Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 20200 to 40 495Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.490, 492 and 494. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.491, 493 and 495. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1238. 5. 4.109 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Special tracing paper / 30) (No.496 to 501) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment496Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 497Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second 498Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 499Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second 500Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30)20200 to 40 501Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.496, 498 and 500. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.497, 499 and 501. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. 8. 5. 4.110 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheetpaper (Special film / 30) (No.502 to 507) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st, 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30 size by cut sheet bypass feeding. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment502Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)20200 to 40 503Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second 504Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)20200 to 40 505Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second 506Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30)20200 to 40 507Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30) 000 to 4001 second You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.502, 504 and 506. If you increase the setting value by +1, each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.06mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed, 2nd one and 3rd one in each Item No.503, 505 and 507. If you increase the setting value by +1, the timing to switch the speed is 1 second delayed. Please refer to the explanation on the pages 8-61 and 8-62 for the details of these settings. K105sm8e4_USC 8-1248. 5. 4.111 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.508 to 510) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 100mm end of a print. This section does not function and is reserved for future update. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment508Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) 255255-- 509Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) 255255-- 510Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) 255255-- 8. 5. 4.112 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.511 to 513) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 70mm end of a print. A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a print in some cases. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment511Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) 33330 to 510- 512Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) 33330 to 510- 513Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) 2552550 to 510- 8. 5. 4.113 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.514 to 516) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 30mm end of a print. A setting combination among No.511 to No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a print in some cases. Default valueItem No. Setting Item USAEUR/ASIA Setting range Step of increment514Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) 16160 to 40- 515Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) 16160 to 40- 516Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film) 000 to 40- NOTE Keep the setting values unchanged from each default 255. NOTE Please adjust the Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter. K105sm8e5_USC 8-1258. 6 Running Mode (Factory Mode) 8. 6. 1 Function In the Running Mode the machine takes usual printing operation even if no paper is installed. (If you install any paper it is transported and ejected from the printer as usual. But note that the printer continues printing endlessly.) 8. 6. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (5) Running Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Running Mode. 3.In case the machine is provided with 2 Roll Decks, you can select either of them pressingthe [ * ] Key. You can select Deck 1 and 2 alternately pressing the [ * ] Key. 4.Press the [ENTER] key, and the printer starts the printingoperation. (This is called Running Operation.) (Start) is indicated when you start the Running Operation. ( 5) Runn i ng Mode Deck1 Runn i ng( Ready ) Deck2 Runn i ng( Ready ) Deck1 Runn i ng( St ar t ) NOTE (1)You can not go to other sub modes of the Service Mode unless you cancel the RunningOperation. (2)Cut length and the image pattern rely on the settings specified in the Test Print Mode. NOTE The Running Mode is prepared for factory use. Do not take the following operation because it is meaningless to do it in the field. K105sm8e5_USC 8-126 5.Press the [ENTER] key again to cancel the Running Operation. The indication changes to (Stop), and after that (Ready) is indicated when the PrintingOperation has been completed. NOTE (-----) is indicated if the Running Operation is notavailable. It will be indicated in the following cases. 1.Any of paper jam, error or warning condition occurs.2.Printer is not ready. Deck1 Runn i ng( St op) Deck1 Runn i ng( - - - - - ) Deck1 Runn i ng( Ready ) K105sm8e5_USC 8-1278. 7 Jam/Error Mask Mode 8. 7. 1 Function If the printer has any paper jam or other error, it is possible to mask (ignore) it in the Jam/Error Masking Mode. The jam or error is not detected when it is masked, you can operate the printer as usual even if the cause of jam or error is not removed. 8. 7. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (6) Mask Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Jam/Error Masking Mode. The LCD indicates mask item (sensor name or error name) and status. Mask item Status ( 6)Mask Mode .R1 Set SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 0 NOTE Masking condition will be cancelled if you cancel it manually in the Jam/Error Masking Mode or if you cancel the Service Mode. K105sm8e5_USC 8-128 3.Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the necessary mask item on the LCD. If you will mask any paper jam, go to the following step 4. If you will mask any error, go to the following step 6. Mask item (Indication on the LCD) Contents of mask R1 Set SensorRoll Deck 1 Jam R2 Set SensorRoll Deck 2 Jam Feed SensorFeeding Jam Regist SensorRegistration Jam Manual SensorBypass Feeder Jam Sep SensorInternal Jam Paper jam Exit SensorFuser Jam M Motor ErrorMain Motor Error F Motor ErrorFuser Motor Error P Motor ErrorPaper Feed Motor Error Dev Motor ErrorDeveloper Motor Error Counter ErrorCounter Error 1st ErrorImage Corona Output Error Tr ErrorTransfer Corona Output Error AC ErrorSeparation Corona Output Error Bias ErrorDeveloper Bias Output Error Error FPGA ErrorFPGA Configuration Error 4.In case you will mask any paper jam, press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate thenecessary mask item. (Example: You will mask the Registration Jam.) .R1 Set SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 0 .Reg i s t SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 0 K105sm8e5_USC 8-129 5.Each paper jam occurs being related with 3 factors such as R (Remain), D (Delay) andE (Early arrival), which can be masked separately. The value 0 beside each factor means not masked, and 1 means masked. Press the [ENTER] Key several times until the necessary factor is masked. 6.In case you will mask any error, press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate thenecessary mask item. (Example: You will mask the Main Motor Error.) 7.Press the [ENTER] Key, and you can mask the selected mask item. Error Mask will be indicated when the selected mask item is in the mask condition. .M Mo t or Er r orEr r or Mask .M Mo t or Er r or .Reg i s t SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 0 .Reg i s t SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 1 .Reg i s t SensorR: 0 D: 1 E: 0 Press the [ENTER] key. The status of mask for thefactor E (Early) changes to1 (masked). Press the [ENTER] key. The status of mask for thefactor D (Delay) changes to1 (masked). .R1 Set SensorR: 0 D: 0 E: 0 .M Mo t or Er r or NOTE You can cancel the mask condition if you press the [ENTER] Key once more. K105sm8e5_USC 8-1308. 8 Test Print Mode 8. 8. 1 Function Test Print Mode is available to make the printer perform printing operation by all alone (no output device is connected). The image patterns printed in the Test Print Mode are memorized in the printer. 8. 8. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (7) Test Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Test Print Mode. ( 7) Tes t Mode Pr i n t er ReadyR1: 36 R2 : 17 K105sm8e5_USC 8-131 3.There are some kinds of Sub Item in the Test Print Mode. Please select the necessary Sub Item pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys. Please refer to the later pages as each Sub Mode is explained precisely. Print ModeScale Setting Mode Deck Selection Mode Negative/Positive Setting Mode Paper Length Setting Mode Mirror Image Setting Mode Print Count Setting Mode Roll 2 Size Setting Mode Image Pattern Setting Mode Roll 2 Type Setting Mode Manual Type Setting Mode Roll 1 Size Setting Mode Manual Size Setting Mode Roll 1 Type Setting Mode Pr i n t er ReadyR1: 36 R2 : 17 .Sca l eOFF .Deck Se l ec t i onRo l l 1 .Nega/ Pos iPos i t i ve .Paper Lengt h36 x 1 .Mi r r orOFF .Pr i n t Count010 Count .Ro l l 2 Si ze24 .Image Pa t t er nP( 0 ) S( 0) .Ro l l 1 Si ze36 .Manua l Si ze11 x 17 .Manua l TypePl i a n .Rol l 2 TypePl i a n .Rol l 1 TypePl i a n K105sm8e5_USC 8-1328. 8. 2. 1 Print Start Mode Press the [ENTER] Key to start test printing. Now Printing is indicated during Test Print. Press the [ENTER] key again if you want to stop the Test Print in the middle. Printing Stop is indicated. 8. 8. 2. 2 Deck Selection You can specify which paper source should be used for Test Print. Select either Roll 1 or Roll 2 pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Bypass Feeder is selected as the paper source automaticallyif only you set the cut sheet paper. Manual is indicated in this case. (It becomes impossible to make Test Print with Roll 1 or Roll 2.) Pr i n t er ReadyR1: 36 R2 : 17 Now Pr i nt i ngR1: 36 R2 : 17 Pr i nt i ng St opR1: 36 R2 : 17 .Deck Se l ec t i onRo l l 1 .Deck Se l ec t i onRo l l 2 .Deck Se l ec t i onManua l Now Pr i nt i ngR1: 36 R2 : 17 NOTE In addition to the above indications, you will find such indications as Warming up,Printer stops., Warm Sleep, Cold Sleep and so on according to the condition of printer. K105sm8e5_USC 8-1338. 8. 2. 3 Paper Length You can specify the paper length (cut length) of the Test Print. The following standard paper lengths are selectable. Metric : A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, B1, B2, B3, B4 and B5 Inch: 48, 44, 42, 36, 34, 24, 22, 18, 17, 12, 11, 9 and 8.5 If you press the [ * ] key several times, you can magnify the standard size by the integral number. (For example the cut length becomes A0 x 2 (2378mm) if you press the [ * ] key once when A0 is selected. It will become A0 x 3 (3567mm) if you press twice.) 1.Indicate Paper Length on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (36x1 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Change the paper length pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. And change the magnification pressing the [ * ] Key. [ ] or [ ] Key [ * ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Paper Lengt h36 x 1 .Paper Lengt h24 x 1 .Paper Lengt h24 x 2 .Paper Lengt h36 x 1 .Paper Lengt h24 x 1 NOTE Even if you specify a longer paper length than the maximum cut length, it is automatically corrected to the maximum cut length. (The maximum cut length relies on the paper size or the maximum cut length setting.) K105sm8e5_USC 8-1348. 8. 2. 4 Print Count It is possible to specify how many sheets of test print should be done. 1.Indicate Print Count on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (001 Count in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change thesetting now. The setting value flashes. 2.Indicate the necessary print count pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Pr i n t Count001 Count .Pr i n t Count024 Count .Pr i n t Count001 Count K105sm8e5_USC 8-1358. 8. 2. 5 Image Pattern You can choose which image pattern should be printed in the Test Print. 1.Indicate Image Pattern on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (P(0)S(0) in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change thesetting now. The setting value flashes. 2.P(X) of the setting value means the Test Pattern Number Select the necessary Test Pattern Number pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.S(X) of the setting value means the size (enlargement or reduction of image pattern). Press and hold the [ * ] Key, and then press [ ] or [ ] Key to change the size. Press and hold the [ * ], and then press [ ] or [ ]. 4.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Image Pa t t er nP( 0) S( 0) .Image Pa t t er nP( 1) S( 0) .Image Pa t t er nP( 1) S( 1) .Image Pa t t er nP( 0 ) S( 0) .Image Pa t t er nP( 1 ) S( 0) K105sm8e5_USC 8-1368. 8. 2. 6 Manual Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of cut sheet paper you will use. 1.Indicate Manual Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (Plain in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the type of the cut sheet paper you will use. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. 8. 8. 2. 7 Manual Size It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of cut sheet paper you will use. 1.Indicate Manual Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (11x17 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Indicate the same size with the used cut sheet paper pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. .Manua l Si ze11 x 17 .Manua l Si ze18 x 12 .Manua l Si ze11 x 17 .Manua l TypePl i a n.Manua l TypePl i a n .Manua l TypeT r c ng a i K105sm8e5_USC 8-1378. 8. 2. 8 Roll 1 Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1. 1.Indicate Roll 1 Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (Plain in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 1. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. 8. 8. 2. 9 Roll 1 Size Setting It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1. 1.Indicate either Roll 1 Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (36 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 1 pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Rol l 1 TypePl i a n .Ro l l 1 Si ze36 .Ro l l 1 Si ze24 .Ro l l 1 Si ze36 .Rol l 1 TypePl i a n .Rol l 1 TypeT r c ng a i K105sm8e5_USC 8-1388. 8. 2.10 Roll 2 Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2. 1.Indicate Roll 2 Type on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (Plain in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 2. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. 8. 8. 2.11 Roll 2 Size Setting It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2. 1.Indicate either Roll 2 Size on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (36 in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 2 pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Ro l l 2 Si ze36 .Ro l l 2 Si ze24 .Ro l l 2 Si ze36 .Rol l 2 TypePl i a n .Rol l 2 TypePl i a n .Rol l 2 TypeT r c ng a i K105sm8e5_USC 8-1398. 8. 2.12 Mirror It is possible to print a mirror image. 1.Indicate Mirror on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (OFF in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. 8. 8. 2.13 Nega/Posi It is possible to print a negative image. 1.Indicate Nega/Posi on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (Positive in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change thesetting now. The setting value flashes. 2.Switch between Positive and Negative pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .Mi r r orOFF .Mi r r orON .Nega/ Pos iPos i t i ve .Nega/ Pos iNegat i ve .Mi r r orOFF .Nega/ Pos iPos i t i ve K105sm8e5_USC 8-1408. 8. 2.14 Scale It is possible to print an image of scale on the printed paper for measuring purpose. 1.Indicate Scale on the LCD, and press the [ENTER] key. The setting value (OFF in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the settingnow. The setting value flashes. 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] Key 3.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. .Sca l eOFF .Sca l eON .Sca l eOFF K105sm8e5_USC 8-1418. 9 Factory Adjustment Mode( Factory Use Only ) 8. 9. 1 Function This mode is used mainly in the Factory to adjust several units before shipment. The followings are available operations. Sub Mode No.Available operation 00Main Motor rotates for 3 minutes. 01Drum rotates for 1 revolution. Also the Image Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating. 02Drum rotates for 1 revolution. Also the Transfer Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating. 03Drum rotates for 1 revolution. Also the Separation Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating. 04Main Motor rotates first, and then Bias is outputted for 3 minutes. 05The machine makes the same operation with the normal printing. 8. 9. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (8) Factory Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU]key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Factory Adjustment Mode. The LCD indicates Sub Mode Number, Sub Mode Name and the status. Sub Mode No. Sub Mode Name Status 3.Select the necessary Sub Mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. (Example: You will make the Transfer Corona operate.) [ ] or [ ] Key ( 8) Fac t or y Mode No00 Ma i n Mo t or( - - - - - ) No02 Tr Out put( - - - - - ) No00 Ma i n Mo t or( - - - - - ) K105sm8e5_USC 8-142 4.Press the [ENTER] key, and the selected object starts operating. Start is indicated when the selected object is operating. Press the [ENTER] key again to stop the operation in the middle. [ENTER] Key No02 Tr Out put( St ar t ) No02 Tr Out put( - - - - - ) K105sm8e5_USC 8-1438.10 Clear Mode 8.10. 1 Function It is possible to clear several kinds of information. The following modes are available. 8.10. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (9) Clear Mode on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Clear Mode. Name of modeContents RAM Clear ModeYou can initialize all settings of Adjustment Mode and some other initial information memorized in the RAM. Error Clear ModeYou can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. Jam Record Clear ModeYou can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory. Error Record Clear ModeYou can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory. Software Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Software Counter. Total Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of Software Counter. ( 9) Cl ear Mode .RAM Cl ear NOTE Record all the present data for the safety before you make RAM Clear. K105sm8e5_USC 8-144 3.Select any subordinate mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. Please read the later pages for the explanation about each mode. .RAM Cl ear .Er r or Cl earE- 000 .Er r or I nf o Cl rCl ear.Jam I n f o Cl earCl ear .Pr i nt Count0001154 .To t a l Count0001720 K105sm8e5_USC 8-1458.10. 2. 1 RAM Clear Mode You can initialize all setting values of Adjustment Mode and some other initial information memorized in the RAM. To make RAM Clear, press and hold the [ * ] Key, and then press the [ENTER] Key. Initial state is indicated after the clearance. Press any key after the RAM Clear, and you can cancel the Service Mode. Press and hold the [ * ], andthen press the [ENTER]. 8.10. 2. 2 Error Clear Mode You can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. If the Fuser has any error, its error code is indicated in the LCD. To make Error Clear, press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key. No error code will be indicated after the Error Clear. Press and hold the [ * ], andthen press the [ENTER]. .Er r or Cl ear .Er r or Cl earE- 000 I n i t i a l s t at e .RAM Cl ear NOTE The followings are possible errors caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. E-000: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 1 E-001: Fuser Over Temperature Error E-002: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 2 E-003: Fuser Low Temperature Error 1 E-004: Fuser Low Temperature Error 2 Once anyone of the above occurs, it is impossible to make copy, plot and scan unless you clear it in the Error Clear Mode! NOTE Before you make Error Clear, please wait until the Fuser is enough cooled down. K105sm8e5_USC 8-1468.10. 2. 3 Jam History Clear Mode You can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory. Clear is indicated on the LCD before the clearance. Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of jams. Clear disappears from the LCD after the clearance. Press and hold the [ * ], andthen press the [ENTER]. No jam code will be indicated in the No.22 (Jam Info) of the Information Mode. 8.10. 2. 4 Error History Clear Mode You can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory. Clear is indicated on the LCD before the clearance. Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of errors. Clear disappears from the LCD after the clearance. Press and hold the [ * ], andthen press the [ENTER]. No error code will be indicated in the No.23 (Error Info) of the Information Mode. .Jam I n f o Cl earCl ear .Jam I n f o Cl ear .Er r or I nf o Cl rCl ear .Er r or I nf o Cl r K105sm8e5_USC 8-1478.10. 2. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Software Counter. 1.Indicate the Software Counter Setting Mode, and then press the [ENTER] Key. The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it. Press the [ENTER] Key. 2.Change the setting value pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. Press [] or [] Key. 3.If you press the [ * ] Key, one more upper digit flashes. Change the value in the same way. Press the [ * ] Key. 4.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. .Pr i nt Count0001150 .Pr i nt Count0001150 .Pr i nt Count0001154 .Pr i nt Count0001154 NOTE The KIP3000 has a Software Counter which was synchronized with the Hardware Counter. These are displayed in the UI. It is not necessary to change the value unless the PW10520 PCB is replaced or value lost to reset. In this case set the value in this mode. .Pr i nt Count0001150 .Pr i nt Count0001154 K105sm8e5_USC 8-1488.10. 2. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of Software Counter. 1.Indicate the Total Counter Setting Mode, and then press the [ENTER] Key. The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it. Press the [ENTER] Key. 2.Change the setting value pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. Press [] or [] Key. 3.If you press the [ * ] Key, one more upper digit flashes. Change the value in the same way. Press the [ * ] Key. 4.Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The indication stops flashing when decided. .To t a l Count0001720 .To t a l Count0001723 .To t a l Count0001723 .To t a l Count0001720 NOTE The counting unit of Total Counter is always linear meter. Note that you can not change it. .To t a l Count0001720 .To t a l Count0001723 K105sm8e6_USC 8-1498.11 User Mode 8.11. 1 Construction of the User Mode The User Mode consists of following 5 sub modes. (1)Status Indication (Normal Mode) (2)Deck Information Mode (3)Setting Mode 1 (4)Setting Mode 2 (5)Command Mode 8.11. 2 Selecting each sub mode 1.Confirm that the machine is OFF. Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key. You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation, so it becomes possible to selecteach sub mode of the User Mode. 2.Select each sub mode pressing the [MENU] key. The name of selected sub mode is indicated on the LCD. Status Indication (Normal Mode) Deck Information Mode Command Mode Setting Mode 1Setting Mode 2 Pr i n t er ReadyR1: 36 ( 4) Command ( 3) Se t t i ng Mode2 Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 1) Deck I n f o ( 2) Se t t i ng Mode1 Press [MENU] key NOTE It is impossible to select the sub mode if the key operation is locked. K105sm8e6_USC 8-1508.11. 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode) Normally the LCD indicates the status of printer. The following list shows the possible indication and the status of printer. LCD IndicationStatus of printer Printer is in warming up. Printer is ready for printing. Printer is now on printing. Printing is stopped in the middle. Printer is stopped by some abnormal condition. Printer is in the Warm Sleep. Printer is in the Cold Sleep. Pr i n t S t o ppe dR1 : 3 6 Wa r mi ng upR1 : 3 6 War m Sl eepR1: 36Pr i n t er ReadyR1: 36 Now Pr i nt i ngR1 : 36 Pr i n t er St opR1: 36 K105sm8e6_USC 8-1518.11. 4 Deck Information Mode 8.11. 4. 1 Function It is possible to indicate the information about the roll paper (size, type and remaining level). 8.11. 4. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Indicate (1) Deck Info on the LCD pressing the [MENU] Key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Deck Information Mode. [ENTER] Key 3.If you press [ ] and [ ] Keys, you can indicate either Roll 1 Size or Roll 2 Size on theLCD. You check the information about the Roll1 when Roll 1 Size is indicated, and you can check that of Roll 2 when Roll 2 Size is indicated. So select either Roll Deck of which information you will check. [ ] and [ ] Keys Roll 1 information Roll 2 information Ro l l 1 Si ze36 Ro l l 2 Si ze36 ( 1) Deck I n f o Ro l l 1 Si ze36 NOTE You can indicate Roll 2 Size only when the machine is equipped with the Roll Deck 2.( 1) Deck I n f o K105sm8e6_USC 8-152 4.After selecting the Roll Deck, press the [ * ] key several times to indicate the information aboutthe selected Roll Deck. The LCD indicates Size (Width), Type and Remain (Remaining level of roll) orderlywhenever you press the [ * ] Key. Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n (1)Each indication in Roll Remain means as follows. 100%From 100 to 75% 75%From 75 to 50% 50%From 50 to 10% 10%Smaller than 10% (2)The following messages are also indicated according to the situation. Machine is checking the paper.Selected roll paper is empty. Press [*] key Press [*] key Press [*] key Ro l l 1 Si ze36 Ro l l 1 Rema i n75% Ro l l 1Paper Check Ro l l 1Paper Empt y Reference K105sm8e6_USC 8-1538.11. 5 Setting Mode 1 8.11. 5. 1 Function This is a setting mode to make the machine recognize the size and the type of roll paper. 8.11. 5. 2 Indication and Operation (1)Roll type setting 1.Indicate (2) Setting Mode 1 on the LCD pressing the[MENU] Key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 1. The LCD initially indicates Roll 1 Type. [ENTER] Key 3.There are 2 setting items Roll Type and Roll Size in the Setting Mode, which you canspecify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively. To specify the type of roll paper, indicate either Roll 1 Type or Roll 2 Type pressing the [ ] key and [ ] key. [ ] key and [ ] key Ro l l 2 S i z e36 Ro l l 1 S i z e36 Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n ( 2) Se t t i ng Mode1 ( 2) Se t t i ng Mode1 Ro l l 2 Ty p eP l a i n Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n K105sm8e6_USC 8-154 4.Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the paper type. The paper type indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change thesetting. [ENTER] Key 5.Pressing the [] and [] Keys, select the type of the roll paper installed on theconcerning Roll Deck. [ ] and [ ] Keys 6.Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting. The selected setting (Tracing in this example) stops flashing when decided. [ENTER] Key Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n NOTE 1 is indicated after the paper type if you press the [ * ] Keyat this time. It means the special paper. (Tracing 1 in this example means Tracing paper ofspecial paper.) Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n Ro l l 1 Ty peT r ac i ng Ro l l 1 Ty peT r ac i ng Ro l l 1 Ty peT r ac i ng Ro l l 1 Ty peT r ac i ng 1 K105sm8e6_USC 8-155(2)Size setting 1.Indicate (2) Setting Mode 1 on the LCD pressing the[MENU] Key. 2.Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 1. The LCD initially indicates Roll 1 Type. [ENTER] Key 3.There are 2 setting items Roll Type and Roll Size in the Setting Mode, which you canspecify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively. To specify the size of roll paper, indicate either Roll 1 Size or Roll 2 Size pressing the [ ] key and [ ] key. [ ] key and [ ] key 4.Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the size setting. The size indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change the setting. [ENTER] Key Ro l l 2 S i z e36 Ro l l 1 S i z e36 Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n ( 2) Se t t i ng Mode1 ( 2) Se t t i ng Mode1 Ro l l 2 Ty p eP l a i n Ro l l 1 Ty p eP l a i n Ro l l 2 S i z e36 Ro l l 2 S i z e36 K105sm8e6_USC 8-156 5.Pressing the [] and [] Keys, select the size of the roll paper installed on the concerningRoll Deck. [ ] and [ ] Keys 6.Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting. The selected setting (24 in this example) stops flashing when decided. [ENTER] Key Ro l l 2 S i z e24 Ro l l 2 S i z e24 Ro l l 2 S i z e36 Ro l l 2 S i z e24 K105sm8e6_USC 8-1578.11. 6 Setting Mode 2 8.11. 6. 1 Function It is possible to validate several power saving functions or to change its timer setting. Also it is possible to validate several functions related with image process. 8.11. 6. 2 Indication and Operation (1)Selection of each Sub Mode 1.Press the [MENU] key to indicate (3) Setting Mode 2. 2.Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 2. The LCD initially indicates Warm Sleep. ( 3) Se t t i ng Mode2 .Warm Sl eepOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-158 3.As there are 10 Sub Modes in the Setting Mode 2, select the necessary one pressing the[ ] and [ ] Key. [ ] and [ ] Keys .L ow Temp ModeOFF .Power Of f T i me10mi n .Warm Sl eepOFF .Fu l l I mage ModeOFF .Warm Sl eep T i me10mi n .EnhanceOFF .Co l d Sl eepOFF .Smoo t h i ngOFF .Co l d Sl eep T i me10mi n .Aut o Power Of fOFF .TR As s i s t L EDOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-159(2)ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode It is possible to validate the Warm Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function. (You can set the timer of the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(3)Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-160.) 1.Select Warm Sleep in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Warm Sleep Mode will work if you select ON. [ENTER] Key .Warm Sl eepOFF .Warm Sl eepON The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the temperature of heater some degrees. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3000 is ready.But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is better for saving the power to fall down the temperature of heater.(Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade.) The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. However, please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP3000 gets ready.) Reference .Warm Sl eepOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-160(3)Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode It is possible to set a timer of the Warm Sleep Mode. If the KIP3000 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Warm Sleep Mode works. (It is necessary to validate the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it. Refer to [(2)ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-159.) 1.Select Warm Sleep Time in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change thesetting. [ENTER] Key 3.Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys. The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. [ ] and [ ] Keys 4.Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. The timer value stops flashing when decided. [ENTER] Key .Warm Sl eep T i me10mi n .Warm Sl eep T i me10mi n .Warm Sl eep T i me10mi n .Warm Sl eep T i me50mi n .Warm Sl eep T i me50mi n .Warm Sl eep T i me50mi n The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the temperature of heater some degrees. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3000 is ready.But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is better for saving the power to fall down the temperature of heater. (Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade.) The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. However, please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP3000 gets ready.) Reference .Warm Sl eep T i me10mi n K105sm8e6_USC 8-161(4)ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode It is possible to validate the Cold Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function. (You can set the timer of the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(5)Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-162.) 1.Select Cold Sleep in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Cold Sleep Mode will work if you select ON. [ENTER] Key .Col d Sl eepOFF .Col d Sl eepON The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting off supplying the power to the heater unit. It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3000 is ready.But if the KIP3000 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time, it is the best way for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely. The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. However, please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP3000 gets ready.) Reference .Col d Sl eepOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-162(5)Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode It is possible to set a timer of the Cold Sleep Mode. If the KIP3000 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Cold Sleep Mode works. (It is necessary to validate the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it. Refer to [(4)ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-161.) 1.Select Cold Sleep Time in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change thesetting. [ENTER] Key 3.Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys. The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. [ ] and [ ] Keys 4.Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. The timer value stops flashing when decided. [ENTER] Key .Co l d Sl eep T i me10mi n .Co l d Sl eep T i me10mi n .Co l d Sl eep T i me10mi n .Co l d Sl eep T i me50mi n .Co l d Sl eep T i me50mi n .Co l d Sl eep T i me50mi n The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting off supplying the power to the heater unit. It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 - 170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3000 is ready.But if the KIP3000 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time, it is the best way for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely. The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. However, please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP3000 gets ready.) Reference .Co l d Sl eep T i me10mi n K105sm8e6_USC 8-163(6)ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF It is possible to validate the Auto Power OFF which is a kind of power saving function. (You can set the timer of the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode. Refer to [(7)Timer setting of Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-164.) 1.Select Auto Power Off in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Auto Power OFF will work if you select ON. [ENTER] Key .Aut o Power Of fOFF .Aut o Power Of fON The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP3000 automatically if no print job or copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer). If the KIP3000 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF, the operator needs to turn it on again pressing the Power Switch. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically.) Reference .Aut o Power Of fOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-164(7)Timer setting of Auto Power OFF It is possible to set a timer of the Auto Power OFF. If the KIP3000 receives no job for the time you have specified here, the Auto Power OFF works. (It is necessary to validate the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it. Refer to [(6)ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-163.) 1.Select Power Off Time in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing, which means now you can change thesetting. [ENTER] Key 3.Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys. The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. [ ] and [ ] Keys 4.Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. The timer value stops flashing when decided. [ENTER] Key .Power Of f T i me10mi n .Power Of f T i me10mi n .Power Of f T i me10mi n .Power Of f T i me50mi n .Power Of f T i me50mi n .Power Of f T i me50mi n The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP3000 automatically if no print job or copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer). If the KIP3000 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF the operator needs to turn it on again pressing the Power Switch. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically.) Reference .Power Of f T i me10mi n K105sm8e6_USC 8-165(8)Transfer Assist setting To print the image clearer, it is possible to make the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) work. 1.Select TR Assist LED in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Transfer Assist LED will work if you select ON. [ENTER] Key There may be the case that the print image looks so light (not so clear) although the density setting is proper or higher than required. This kind of problem may occur when the used printing paper is special, because it is difficult to transfer the toner image fully onto it. The Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) is the solution for this kind of problem as it helps to transfer the toner image. Try to make it work if you feel the print image is so light. Transfer Assist LED is OFF. Transfer Assist LED is ON. (Image looks not so clear.) (Image looks clear with enough density.) NOTE You can specify to which type of paper the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) should work. It can be specified in the Service Mode. Refer to [8. 5. 4.35Operation of Separation Lamp (No.067)] on the page 8-59. Reference .TR As s i s t L EDOFF .TR As s i s t L EDON .TR As s i s t L EDOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-166(9)Smoothing setting It is possible to validate the Smoothing function which makes a diagonal line look clearer. 1.Select Smoothing in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Smoothing function is validated if you select ON. [ENTER] Key A diagonal line tends to look weaker than vertical one or horizontal one. The Smoothing function emphasizes the diagonal one so that it becomes as clear as vertical and horizontal ones. Smoothing function is OFF. Smoothing function is ON. (Diagonal line looks so weak.) (Diagonal line looks clear.) .Smoo t h i ngOFF .Smoo t h i ngON Reference .Smoo t h i ngOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-167(10)Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer. 1.Select Enhance in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select ON. [ENTER] Key An isolated dot image tends to look so weak. The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear. (Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize the dots coming together some degree.) Dot Enhancement function is OFF. Dot Enhancement function is ON. (Diagonal line looks so weak.) (Diagonal line looks clear.) NOTE The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select ON in the User Mode. At this time the Level (degree) of Dot Enhancement Function relies on the setting in the Service Mode. Refer to [8. 5. 4.23Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.052)] on the page 8-53 for this setting. .EnhanceOFF .EnhanceON Reference .EnhanceOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-168(11)Full Image Mode setting Full Image Mode can be validated, which makes it possible to print the image in the trailing margin area. 1.Select Full Image Mode in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Full Image Mode is validated if you select ON. [ENTER] Key Usually each print is compulsively provided with a trailing margin of 3mm long regardless of the image size. But the image can be printed even in the trailing margin area if you validate the Full Image Mode. Full Image Mode is OFF.Full Image Mode is OFF. (Print is provided with trailing margin.) (No trailing margin is provided.) NOTE The interval between each sheet of print becomes longer than usual if you validate the Full Image Mode, because it requires a cleaning operation between each sheet. .Fu l l I mage ModeOFF .Fu l l I mage ModeON Reference .Fu l l I mage ModeOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-169(12)Low Temperature Mode setting Low Temperature Mode can be validated to secure the fusing quality in the cold environment. 1.Select Low Temp Mode in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1)Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-157how to select it.) 2.Switch between ON and OFF pressing the [ENTER] Key. The Full Image Mode is validated if you select ON. [ENTER] Key The toner image may not be fixed firmly onto the paper if you make a copy or plot right after turning on the machine (in the morning especially) in very cold environment. But it is possible to avoid this kind of fusing problem by the Low Temperature Mode. It works as follows. 1.If both the center and sides of the Fuser Roller are colder than 30 degrees centigrade when you turn on the machine (or when you cancel the Sleep Mode), the Low Temperature Mode is validated. 2.The Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees higher than the setting temperature. (If the setting temperature is 170 degrees, it is heated up to 180 degrees.) 3.The machine does not get ready even if the Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees higher than the setting temperature. Instead of that the Fuser Roller continues rotating for 360 seconds. (Setting temperature plus 10 degrees is kept during this period.) 4.When 360 seconds has passed, the machine gets ready. Reference .L ow Temp ModeOFF .L ow Temp ModeON .L ow Temp ModeOFF K105sm8e6_USC 8-1708.11. 7 Command Mode 8.11. 7. 1 Function This is a mode to make Initial Cut for the roll media. 8.11. 7. 2 Indication and Operation 1.Press the [MENU] key to indicate (4) Command. 2.Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Command Mode. The LCD indicates Initial Cut. The leading edge of the new roll media may be rough or folded. To straighten the leading edge easily, the KIP3000 has a convenient function called Initial Cut. If you select one roll media and make the Initial Cut, the leading part (210mm from the leading edge) of roll media is cut off. The leading edge of that roll media is straight after the Initial Cut. Reference ( 4) Command .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 1 ( Ready ) K105sm8e6_USC 8-171 3.Pressing the [ * ] Key, select either Roll 1 or Roll 2 to which you will make Initial Cut. [ * ] Key 4.Press the [ENTER] Key to make Initial Cut. The LCD indicates (Start) during the Initial Cut. [ENTER] Key NOTE The LCD indicates (- - - - -) is it is impossible to makeInitial Cut by some reason like an error of machine. .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 1 ( Ready ) .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 2 ( Ready ) .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 2 (- - - - - ) .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 1 ( St a r t ) .I n i t i a l Cu tRo l l 1 ( Ready ) K105sm8e7_USC 8-1728.12Scanner Utility 8.12. 1Installation 8.12. 1. 1Installing USB Driver 1.Loosen 4 screws (1), remove 4 screws (2)to remove Cover 10 (3). 2.Disconnect the USB Cable (4), and connect it to the USB Terminal to your service PC. 1 34NOTE Below are the system requirements to operate Scanner Utility. Windows 2000 / XP operating system USB 2.0 support 2 K105sm8e7_USC 8-173 3.Turn on both your PC and the KIP 3000. [Found New Hardware Wizard] startsautomatically. Click [Next]. 4.Choose Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]. Click [Next]. Choose this. KIP K105SC is shown as example in this section. K105SK is displayed for machines before S/N 10510001. Reference K105sm8e7_USC 8-174 5.Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive. Mark CD-ROM drives and click [Next]. Mark this. 6.The following message is indicated when the necessary driver is found. Click [Next]. K105sm8e7_USC 8-175 7.Click [Next] when the following message is indicated. 8Complete the [Found New Hardware Wizard] clicking [Finish]. K105sm8e7_USC 8-176 9. Open Device Manager, and confirm that [KIP K105SC] is operating properly. K105sm8e7_USC 8-1778.12. 1. 2Installing Scanner Utility 1. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive Locate Scanner Utility setup file and run SETUP.EXE. 2. The Setup Program starts. Click [Next]. 3. The destination of the software can be changed. Click [Next]. K105sm8e7_USC 8-1784. The name of the program folder can be changed. Click [Next]. 5. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. Click [Finish]. K105sm8e7_USC 8-1798.12. 2Starting Scanner Utility Start Scanner Utility by; Start _Program _ ScannerUtility _ ScannerUtility (Scanner Utilitys initial screen) NOTE To use the entire adjustment menu, follow the instruction below. (A command line option switch to be set.) (1) Open the properties panel for a Scanner Utility shortcut. (2) Add the following text to the end of a path name. (en quad)/Maintenance K105sm8e7_USC 8-1808.12. 3Displaying Scanner Information It is possible to display the scanner information in the following way. 1.Select [Information] under [Scanner]. 2. Scanner Utility acquires the scanner information and displays it. K105sm8e8_USC 8-1818.12. 4Scanner Adjustment It is possible to make the following scanner adjustment with Scanner Utility. Shading (white balance calibration) Calibration (color correction) Feed Distance (1:1) Position (stitching) These adjustments are very important because they are greatly related with the image quality. 8.12. 4. 1Shading (white balance calibration) [Purpose of Shading (white balance calibration)] The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic. This may be a problem because the inputs (density) from those pixels are uneven although they read the same image (density). But the Calibration compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness among the pixels. As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after Shading. Original (even density) Dark Dark Light Light Before CalibrationAfter Calibration (Uneven inputs)(Even inputs) [Necessary situation] Shading is required when; Machine installation After replacing; (1) CIS Assembly (2) CIS Controller Board (3) Main Board (4) Gap Roller NOTE Shading adjustment should be performed with Shading Sheet (P/N: Z058300790, 10 sheets). 1 sheet of Shading Sheet is included in the KIP 3000 accessary. Keep it in safe custody. K105sm8e8_USC 8-182[Operation] 1.Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable. 2.Start Scanner Utility. 3.Select [Calibration] under [Adjust]. 4.At first it is required to calibrate all pixels. Select [All] and then click [Execute]. You will be asked to set the original. K105sm8e8_USC 8-1835.Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 3000 accessory to the scanner. 6.Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet, and the scanner reads it.It takes about 5 minutes to complete Shading adjustment. 7.When finished scanning, click [OK]. Click [Confirm] to check the result of Shading. NOTE (1) One corner of the Shading Sheet is cut off. Set Shading Sheet so that the corner is on the left and on the front side of machine. (2) Handle Shading Sheet with great care. Keep it in safe custody for avoiding dirt, fold or tear. NOTE The dialog the same as the former step 6 will appear again. Just click [OK] without removingShading Sheet. K105sm8e8_USC 8-184 8.The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed. Scan image of Shading Sheet 9.Scrolling the image horizontally, check whether the density is even or not. If the density is even at every place, finish Shading clicking [Close]. There may be some place of which density is different from others as the following image. As this pixel is defective, it is necessary to calibrate it individually in the next step. Defective pixel K105sm8e8_USC 8-185 10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel, select [Specified part]. 11. Move the pointer onto the scan image, and you will find a kind of red cursor. red cross cursordefective pixel NOTE Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image. This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks. K105sm8e8_USC 8-18612. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it. The defective pixel is selected by this operation. If there are some more defective pixels, select them in the same way. Match the vertical line to a defective pixel. 13. Click [Execute], and the selected defective pixel is compensated individually. 14. You will be asked to set the original again. Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK]. Check the result of Shading again. When finished, click [Close]. K105sm8e9_USC 8-1878.12. 4. 2Calibration (color correction) [Purpose of Calibration (color correction)] The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic. This may be a problem because the inputs (color) from those pixels are uneven although they read the same image (color). But Calibration compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness among the pixels. As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after the Color Correction. [Necessary situation] Calibration is required only for machines with color scan option. Calibration is required when; Machine installation After replacing; (1) CIS Assembly (2) CIS Controller Board (3) Main Board (4) Gap Roller [Operation] 1.Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with a USB 2.0 Cable. 2.Start Scanner Utility. 3.Select [Color Correction] under [Adjust]. K105sm8e9_USC 8-1884.Click [Scan]. You will be asked to set the original. 5.Set Calibration Sheet in the KIP 3000 accessory to the scanner. 6.Click [OK] after setting the original, and the scanner reads Calibration Sheet. NOTE Position Calibration Sheet in the center of Original Table so that the numbers on Calibration Sheet are at the top. K105sm8e9_USC 8-1897. The scan image of Calibration Sheet is displayed. Click [Get]. When the pointer moves on to the scan image, it changes to a red cross cursor. 8. Click the 6 reference points where the following picture shows to read color information on Calibration Sheet. Each reference point has a pair of markers. Align the cursor with the markers so that the cursor is placed on a reference point. And then click the point to set a reference point. Set the all the 6 reference point in the order shown below. markers red cross cursorcursor placed on a reference point You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse. Press F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image. Reference match the cursor to the markers red cross cursor match them 6 reference points K105sm8e9_USC 8-1909. When finished the 6 clicks for the reference points, [Set] will be activated. Click [Set] to apply the reference points to the color correction adjustment. 10. Click [Confirm]. Scan Calibration Sheet again. Check that the scan image and Calibration Sheet do not have extreme difference in color between them. Click [Close] to finish. K105sm8e9_USC 8-1918.12. 4. 3Feed Distance (1:1) [Purpose of Feed Distance (1:1)] The lengths between actual original image and scan image may become different each other if you replace the Feed Roller of the Scanner Unit. This is caused by the mechanical play that each Feed Roller has. Actual original imageScan image Feed Distance is the solution for this phenomenon. It compares the actual original image and the scan image to know how much their lengths are different. Then Feed Distance calculates the best compensation (motor speed) automatically so that both images should become as long as each other. [Necessary situation] Feed Distance is required when; After replacing; (1) Drive Roller 1 (2) Drive Roller 2 (3) Gap Roller Also you need to check whether the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following parts. (Please record the current setting value before the replacement and input the same value after the replacement.) (1) CIS Assembly (2) Main Board K105sm8e9_USC 8-192[Operation] 1.Measure the actual distance between a point and c point on the far left area of original, and also between b point and d point on the far right area. Lets suppose that each distance is as follows. Between a point and c point (800) is 799.7mm Between b point and d point (800) is 799.8mm Target Sheet Measure between these 2 points.Measure between these 2 points. 2.Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable. 3.Start Scanner Utility. bd 1000ac 800c 1000ac 800 d 800bd 800d 1100c 1100d 1150c 1150 NOTE There are some number of c point X and d point X on the Target Sheet. You can select any one, but better adjustment can be expected if you measure a longer distance. NOTE Feeding Distance adjustment should be performed with Target Sheet(P/N: Z058501590, 10 sheets). K105sm8e9_USC 8-193 4.Select [Adjust Feed Distance] from [Adjust]. The Adjust Feed Distance Dialog is indicated. NOTE (1) If [Adjust Feed Distance] does not appear, follow the instruction on the next page. [Adjust Feed Distance] does not appear.K105sm8e9_USC 8-194 NOTE (Continued) a) Open the properties panel for a Scanner Utility shortcut. b) Add the following text to the end of a path name. (en quad)/Maintenance (2) We recommend you to record the current setting value of Feed Distance for the safety before starting the adjustment from the next step. Click [Current value], and the current setting value is indicated. Current setting value K105sm8e9_USC 8-195 5.At first, input the actual distance between a point and c point in [Actual Distance],which you have measured at the former step 1. Actual distance between a and b 6.Set the Target Sheet to the scanner unit, and then click [Scan]. 7.A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated. Simply click [Scan] to scan the Target Sheet.(You do not have to change any setting this time.) K105sm8e9_USC 8-196 8.The scan image of the Target Sheet is indicated in the screen of Scanner Utility. Scan image of Target Sheet 9.Indicate the enlarged image of a point on the screen, which was the measuring point at theformer step 1. You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse. Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image. Reference NOTE Make another scan for the top and bottom part of Target Sheet. Scan images for top and bottom part should not be used for Feeding Distance adjustment. K105sm8e9_USC 8-19710. Click the input window of [Theoretical Distance]. A red cursor appears on the screen. 11. Click the mouse once at the measuring point. Click the mouse at the measuring point. K105sm8e9_USC 8-19812. Similarly indicate the enlarged image of c point and click the mouse at the measuring point. Click the mouse at the measuring point. 13. Some value is indicated in [Theoretical Distance] according to 2 measuring points youspecified at both steps 9 and 10. This value means the distance between a point and b point of the resulting scan image. K105sm8e9_USC 8-19914. Click [Calculate]. The program automatically calculates the best compensation value considering the differenceof Actual Distance and Theoretical Distance. The calculated compensation value (motor speed) is indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value]. 15. Click [Set], and the calculated Feed Adjustment Value is validated. K105sm8e9_USC 8-20016. It is necessary to check the balance of original feeding between left and right after validatingthe new setting. (Left side means a-c points side, and right side means b-d points side.) Repeat the former steps from 3 to 12 also for the right side (between b point and d point),and compare the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left (a-c points) and right(b-d points). You do not have to do anymore thing if the difference between left and right is within 0.2%.(within 0.2% means the difference of indicated values is within +/-20.) Please click [Close] without clicking [Set]. 17. If the difference of the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left and right is larger than0.2%, do as follows. a)Measure the actual distance between the center of a-b points and that of c-d points onthe Target Sheet. Center of a-b points Center of c-d points Measure between these 2 points. b)Repeat the former steps from 3 to 12 for the center area. c)Click [Set] to validate the Value indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value]. bd 1000ac 800c 1000d 800d 1100c 1100d 1150c 1150 K105sm8e9_USC 8-2018.12. 4. 4 Position (stitching) [Purpose of Position (stitching)] The scanner part of KIP3000 reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image Sensor). As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks. Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. As a result there occurs the duplication of image between neighboring Image Block (same image is commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks). Position is the solution for these kinds of phenomenon. It is possible remove the vertical gap of image by vertical positioning process (Y offset). And it is also possible to remove the duplication of image by horizontal positioning process(X overlap). [Necessary situation] Position is required when; After replacing; (1) CIS Assembly (2) Gap Roller Also you need to check whether or not the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following part. (Please record the current setting value before the replacement and then input the same value after the replacement.) (1) Main Board Gap of CIS position Overlaps of reading area Duplications of image Vertical gap of image K105sm8e9_USC 8-202 [Operation] 1.Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable. 2.Start Scanner Utility. 3.Select [Calibration] from [Adjust]. The Position Adjustment Dialog is indicated. NOTE Position adjustment should be performed with Target Sheet(P/N: Z058501590, 10 sheets). K105sm8e9_USC 8-203 NOTE (1) If [Adjust Position] does not appear, follow the instruction below. a) Open the properties panel for a Scanner Utility shortcut. b) Add the following text to the end of a path name. (en quad)/Maintenance [Adjust Position] does not appear.K105sm8e9_USC 8-204 4.Click [Default Value], and all setting value become default condition. Default setting values NOTE (Continued) (2) We recommend you to record the current setting values of Position for the safety before starting the adjustment from the next step. Click [Current value], and the current setting values are indicated. Current setting values K105sm8e9_USC 8-205 5.Click [Set] to decide the setting values. 6.Set the Target Sheet to the scanner unit, and then click [Scan]. K105sm8e9_USC 8-2067.A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated. Simply click [Scan] to scan the Target Sheet. (You do not have to change any setting this time.) 8.The scan image of the Target Sheet is indicated in the screen of Scanner Utility. You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse. Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image. Reference NOTE Make another scan for the top and bottom part of Target Sheet. Scan images for top and bottom part should not be used for Position adjustment. K105sm8e9_USC 8-207 9.There will be 4 border lines of Image Blocks where you can find vertical gap of image andDuplication of image. Border line of Image Blocks Border lines Image Blocks You can integrate these Image Blocks correctly by specifying the same image included in bothImage Blocks. (By selecting the same image, the program automatically calculates how muchthe image Block should be shifted vertically and horizontally.) Go to the next page for the adjustment. Same image included in both blocks.Image Blocks are integrated. 12 43 5 B078 B078B079 B079B078 B078B079 B079B078B079 B078 B078B079 B079B078 B078B079 B079 K105sm8e9_USC 8-20810. You need to adjust the position of 2-3 block and 3-4 block first, and then that of 1-2 block and4-5 block. Click the input window X Overlap (or Y Offset) of 2-3 (or 3-4).A red cursor appears on the screen. Clock the input window 11. Find the same image which is included in both Image Blocks. Same image K105sm8e9_USC 8-20912. Move the red cursor onto the found image on one Image Block, and specify it clicking on it. Click on this image. K105sm8e9_USC 8-21013. Also move the red cursor onto the same image on another Image Block, and specify it clickingon it. Click on this image. K105sm8e9_USC 8-21114. Scanner Utility automatically calculates the best value for each X Overlap andY Offset. Click [Check]. Setting value is automatically calculated. 15. Click [Set] to decide the setting value. A dialog pops up to requesting reload of document. Click [OK]. K105sm8e9_USC 8-21216. After deciding the new setting value, please scan the Target Sheet again and check theconcerning border of Image Blocks. Confirm that the vertical gap of image and duplication of image are removed. (Before adjustment) (After adjustment) NOTE If the scan image still has small vertical gap or duplication, change the setting value little by little with the key board. Change the value with key board. K105sm8e9_USC 8-21317. Repeating the former steps from 10 to 15, adjust the positions of 2-3 block and 3-4 block first. Adjust them first. 12 43 512 435K105sm8e9_USC 8-21418. Then adjust the positions of 1-2 block and 4-5 block. Adjust them later. 12 43 512 435K105sm8e9_USC 8-2158.12. 5Updating Firmware It is possible to install a new Firmware to the KIP 3000 with Scanner Utility. 1.Select [Update Firmware] under [Scanner]. 2.Firmware Download Utility is displayed. Click [Browse]. K105sm8e9_USC 8-2163.Select the Firmware component on the hard drive (or another drive). Click [Open]. 4.Confirm that the file name you will install is displayed. Click [Start]. File name 5.New Firmware is sent to the KIP 3000. Please wait data transfer completes. 6.A dialog is displayed, which request you to turn off the KIP 3000. Turn off the machine. K105sm8e9_USC 8-217 7.Click [Exit] finally. K105sm9e1 Chapter 9 Appendix !NLLT~!NLLT~NR1O11 2O!ROU!T BRLAKLR12846 R1O21284SW1POWLR SW!TOHRY1HLATLR RLLAYJ1O818J1O2J1OO1 2J288621 OSSR1 1 28 41284J1O6J6OO HLATLR LAMP OLNTLR24MS1UPPLR !NT. SW.7884MS2lUSLR !NT. SW.78842 1 S!DLOLNTLR1 2 1 2 1 2THLRMOSTAT1 2 8LX!TSLNSOR8 4 6J6O4J261J249 J26O1 6482DLHUM!D!l!LR HLATLR RLLAYDLHUMD!lY HLATLR UN!TDLHUMD!lYHLATLR SW.J1O9J1144!NT. SW.2A1A2B1B1 2 8 1 2 8 J911 J9O1GNDGNDDO6VTXDRXDS!G~!NS!G~OUT GNDTH1TH2TH8POWLR~OllHLAT~LX!TR2O6TONLRSD!SONPRLSS~SJO2O9STR!P~S1 2 8J266RLG!ST~SSLNSORDO6V TxDRxD1 2 8MAN~!NSLNSORR/WLODDVDDL DOD1D6D2D8D6D7D4N.O.GNDRSN.O.6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9 1O 18 11 12 14 16 16LOD~RWLODDDO6VLOD~LNLOD~DOLOD~D1LOD~D6LOD~D2LOD~D8LOD~D6LOD~D7LOD~D4LOD~RSLOD~GND26846781SW1SW2SW8SW49SW61OON7O2ON7O1 ONL!NL~LLDJ2O9~1 to 4O J21O~1 to 4OGND24)6VGND6 6 4J264R21O R2O9J211~B1 to J211~B84J2461 2 8 4R2O2R2O6R2O1R2O4R2OOR2O824V 2 8 1 6 6 4J1O1J22O24V24VGND24)GND24)GND24)J2OO~2J2OO~4J2OO~8J2O8~8J2O8~12J2O8~1OJ2O4~28J2O6~27J2O4~8OJ2O4~28J2O4~29J2O4~27J2O1~8J2O1~2J2O1~1J2O8~6J2O4~17J2O8~16J2O4~1OJ2O4~2OJ2O4~7J2O4~22J2O2~4J2O2~8J2O2~1J2O6~21J2O6~2OJ2O6~19J2O6~18J2O6~17J2O6~16J2O6~16GNDJ2O6~22J2O6~18J2O6~12J2O6~11J2O6~1OJ2O6~9J2O6~8J2O6~7J2O6~14J2O6~6J2O6~6J2O6~4J2O6~8J2O6~2J2O6~1GNDJ2O2~6GNDJ2O2~6J2O7~18SW!TOHHLATLR DOOR!N~L!N~N!N~GR1O6 GNDJ2O1~48 2 1 6 6 4J2668 2 1J211~A1 to J211~ A84ON1~A1 to ON1~A84 ON1~B1 to ON1~B84PRLSSSLNSORTONLR~OAR~SJ2O2~7HLATM~OLKHLATM~TRGHLATM~LDJ2O8~16J2O6~ 8J2O6~ 6M2~OW~OOWJ2O6~16BRAKLlGOUT2 1L!NL l!LTLR J2O8~76VJ2O2~2J267PRLSS2 1 J262MOTORJ2662 4 8 16VJ2O8~1818 14 12 11J268 2 8 1M6~W!RL~RM6~W!RL~LJ214~ 1J214~ 2OUT PUT8OUT PUT2OUT PUT1OUT PUT4TAB1TAB2TAB8HVB!AS8HVB!AS2HVB!AS1HV1HV2HV824VGND24)GNDGNDTRANLOGB!ASANLOGB!ASLDAOLDTRLD!MLDB!ASSW HVAOHVTRHV!M6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9ON8O2ON8O1ON8O88 2 1 4J2O6~9J2O6~1OJ2O6~11J2O6~18J2O8~17J2O8~18J2O8~19J2O8~2OJ2O8~8J2O8~2J2O8~1J2O8~46 9 8 1ODO6VJ2O4~18GNDJ2O4~1624VJ2OO~11 2 8DOOR SW!TOHUPPLR UN!TMS4SD1O7SD1O88J248 J244J288J2281 2 8J228R2O7GND6) ~~87 1~~~~~~J276J1221 2J1O8DO6VJ2O4~14GNDJ2O4~166VJ2O4~19J2O8~116VJ2O8~96VGNDJ2O8~6SD1O2SD1O1SD1O4SD1O8SD1O6SD1O6128J6O1J1O6R1O9 R1O761284678 R1O8 R1O6lUSLRMOTOR4 8 6 8 7 6 92 1BRAKLlGOUT2 1J241 J242MA!NMOTORMA!NM~OLKMA!NM~TRGMA!NM~LDJ2O8~14J2O6~ 7J2O6~28R1O8AOL)AON)186GND2N.O.4N.O.24V12 7GND6)8GND6)96V1O6VSD2O8GND6)SD2O86VSD2O7SD2O9SD2O124V6VSD214SD211GND6)JO21O6V7 6LR2J2O7~8HV2 1ON6O2ON6O12124VGND24)2 124VGND24)21PRLSSMTONLRM1O 9 8 7J6428 4 6 2 1J648J6416V24V24V24V24V24V24VJ2O6~16J2O6~17J2O6~21J2O6~22GND6)2 1 8 4 6 6RLG!STOLUTOHRLG!ST~OLOOUNTLR1 2OOUNTJ284J222J2O7~11J2O7~4SD21724VJO2OOHLATBLJ2O7~12MS821 4 8SD212GND6)6VSD2O6to SD2O6from SD2O8to PAPLRfrom JO2OOUN!TSD2O61 2 8 from JO2O6SD2O2GND24)SD2OOGND24)to POWLR SWto PW6664to PW6664from SD2O8from SD2O9to JO2OOJ1O4R6O2 R6O1J11O21J11121J112 J118SD118SD114J11621J11621J117 J118SD116SD116SD112SD111R218R216R2148OLLAN~SWJ2O6~181 4 2 86VGNDJ4O12 8 6J2O6~ 1J2O6~ 81 4SD1O9SD11O21from SD2O2B!ASTRGJ2O6~12R2196VHLAT16 6 7 8 96VGNDJ2O6~2OJ2O6~26J2O6~19J2O6~282 8 12 8 1J227 4 8 6 8 7 6 9 2 1OLLAN~TRGJ2O6~6LR1lLLDBL28 27 6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9 1O 18 11 12 14 16 16 17 18 21 22 28 24 2O 19 26 26R217from SD2O28 2 4J2771to SOANNLRDO6VJ2O6~4BL6SD221R218PRLSSMTONLRMLR1lLLDBL824VGND24) AOL)AON)HLAT~RYJ2O7~ 6DLHUM!D!l!LR OPT!ONMa1n Un1t DLHUM!D!l!LR OPT!ONPapor Un1tJ2726 6 2 8 4 1 8 7R212J2689 1O 11 12 18 142 8 1TONLRTONLR MOTOR1 2J268SD219J269SLNSOR8 2 1 4J261R221R222J12612J287J119R1O4186GND2N.O.4N.O.J274J128 J7O1186 L24J7O71824J7O81 28 2 1 4 7 N6SD117SD118LN182LNJ7O2 J7O61824SHUT DOWNSHUT DOWNGND286818RXDGNDTXDOTS286RXDGNDTXD1862476RXDTXDGND 1 to 81 to 8128664646826OV T2A18M2 M1M4J2O7~16MS8OPLNHo1ts 866GV~L6 6BL9J2O6~26J2O7~14BL6OUT1OUT1OUT1!N 284J6OOOUT2!NOUT2OUT24VGND24)to J6OOfrom R2O4OUT1~B!AS~SW!OHGNDJ2O6~14J2O6~2N.O.M88.9Kohm/8Wx8 R!GHTOOOL BLOWLROLNTLR LLlTHLATLR BLOWLRR!GHT LLlT1 2 1 2J2461 2J286BLOWLRlLLD8 2J2841 21R2288BLOWLR!PA OOOL!NG J278 J288 J2798 22 1181 28 1 21 2 8J24O J289THLRM!STORTHLRM!STORTHLRM!STORS!DLLLlTJ248R!GHT MANUAL SLT RLG R8O1B`from SD2O16J8181SLNSORJ81O1lLLDOLUTOHROLL 2OLUTOHBAOKROLL 2J8O68 2 1J8O42 1 4 4 81 2 8 41 6 6J2211 6 6LNOODLRlLLDOLUTOHROLLSLNSORLNOODLRROLL 2SLT ROLL 2OLUTOHBAOKROLL 1OLUTOHlLLDROLL 1 SLNSORSLTROLL 1SLNSORROLL 1SLNSORlLLDM6MOTOROUTTLR 97J8O61 8J8O18 2J8O92 12 88 2 11O 6 7 8 9J816JO8OO24V2J8O21 4 1 4 8 4 8 2J8O81O 11 14 16 1618 14 2O2 8DO6VJO8O242 8 4JO8O1GND6)8 2J8O72 11 28J8O81 8 2J8124 8 6 6J81112R!GHTLLlT 84668 9 21 1211 12 16PUSH SW!TOH)DOOR SW!TOHMS6J814)122 2O 19 17 18 28 24 182168 7 1O 17 18J2O7~9J2O7~8R2BK~OLR2lD~OLJ2O4~4J2O4~9J2O4~12R2LNO~SR2SLT~SJ2O7~1OJ2O7~7J2O7~6lLLD~OLR1BK~OLR1lD~OLJ2O4~8J2O4~11J2O4~18DO6VR1LNO~SR1SLT~SR~LDGLJ2O4~21J2O7~2J2O7~1J2O4~2J2O4~6J2O4~6DOOR~OPLNMOUTLMOUTRGNDMSOUTRMSOUTLR8OOR216!NLLT~!NLLT~NR1O11 2O!ROU!T BRLAKLR12846 R1O21284SW1POWLR SW!TOHRY1HLATLR RLLAYJ1O818J1O21 2J288621 OSSR1 1 28 41284J1O6J6OO HLATLR LAMP OLNTLR24MS1UPPLR !NT. SW.7884MS2lUSLR !NT. SW.78842 1 OLNTLR1 2 1 2 1 2THLRMOSTAT1 2 8LX!TSLNSOR8 4 6J6O4J261J249 J26O1 6482DLHUM!D!l!LR HLATLR RLLAYDLHUMD!lY HLATLR UN!TDLHUMD!lYHLATLR SW.J1O9J1144!NT. SW.2A1A2B1B1 2 8 1 2 8J911 J9O1GNDGNDDO6VTXDRXDS!G~!NS!G~OUT GNDTH1TH2TH8POWLR~OllHLAT~LX!TR2O6TONLRSD!SONPRLSS~SJO2O9STR!P~S1 2 8J266RLG!ST~SSLNSORDO6V TxDRxD1 2 8MAN~!NSLNSORR/WLODDVDDL DOD1D6D2D8D6D7D4N.O.GNDRSN.O.6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9 1O 18 11 12 14 16 16LOD~RWLODDDO6VLOD~LNLOD~DOLOD~D1LOD~D6LOD~D2LOD~D8LOD~D6LOD~D7LOD~D4LOD~RSLOD~GND26846781SW1SW2SW8SW49SW61OON7O2ON7O1 ONL!NL~LLDJ2O9~1 to 4O J21O~1 to OGND24)6VGND6 6 4J264R21O R2O9J211~B1 to J211~B84J2461 2 8 4R2O2R2O6R2O1R2O4R2OOR2O824V2 8 1 6 6 4J1O1J22O24V24VGND24)GND24)GND24)J2OO~2J2OO~4J2OO~8J2O8~8J2O8~12J2O8~1OJ2O4~28J2O6~27J2O4~8OJ2O4~28J2O4~29J2O4~27J2O1~8J2O1~2J2O1~1J2O8~6J2O4~17J2O8~16J2O4~1OJ2O4~2OJ2O4~7J2O4~22J2O2~4J2O2~8J2O2~1J2O6~21J2O6~2OJ2O6~19J2O6~18J2O6~17J2O6~16J2O6~16GNDJ2O6~22J2O6~18J2O6~12J2O6~11J2O6~1OJ2O6~9J2O6~8J2O6~7J2O6~14J2O6~6J2O6~6J2O6~4J2O6~8J2O6~2J2O6~1GNDJ2O2~6GNDJ2O2~6J2O7~18SW!TOHHLATLR DOOR!N~L!N~N!N~GR1O6 GNDJ2O1~48 2 1 6 6 4J2668 2 1J211~A1 to J211~ A84ON1~A1 to ON1~A84 ON1~B1 to ON1~B84PRLSSSLNSORTONLR~OAR~SJ2O2~7HLATM~OLKHLATM~TRGHLATM~LDJ2O8~16J2O6~ 8J2O6~ 6M2~OW~OOWJ2O6~16BRAKLlGOUT2 1L!NL l!LTLR1 82 4J2O8~76V1 2 8J8O8SLNSORROLL 2OLUTOHlLLDROLL 2OLUTOHBAOKROLL 1OLUTOHlLLDROLL 1OLUTOHJ8O1BAOKROLLOLUTOH1 2lLLD1 2 8ROLL 1J8O7SLT1 2 8ROLL 1J8O6LNOODLRSLNSOR SLNSOR1 2 8ROLL 2J81OSLT1 2 8ROLL 2J8O9LNOODLRSLNSOR SLNSOR1O 2 1 18 6 11 6R8O1R8OO 12OUTTLRMOTORJ811 R!GHTLLlT 28 24 18 17 19 2O12 18 11 2 8 4 1 6 14 6 16 17 18 8 7 1O 1614J2O2~2R1lD~OLR1BK~OLR2lD~OLR2BK~OLlLLD~OLR2LNO~SR2SLT~SR1LNO~SR1SLT~SGNDDOOR~OPLNJ2O4~21J2O4~2J2O4~11J2O4~8J2O4~12J2O4~9J2O7~6J2O7~7J2O7~8J2O7~9J2O7~1OMOUTRMOUTLJ2O7~1J2O7~2MSOUTRMSOUTLJ2O4~6J2O4~6J267PRLSS2 1 J262MOTORJ2662 4 8 16VJ2O8~1818 14 12 11J268 2 8 1M6~W!RL~RM6~W!RL~LJ214~ 1J214~ 2OUT PUT8OUT PUT2OUT PUT1OUT PUT4TAB1TAB2TAB8HVB!AS8HVB!AS2HVB!AS1HV1HV2HV824VGND24) GNDGNDTRANLOGB!ASANLOGB!ASLDAOLDTRLD!MLDB!ASSW HVAOHVTRHV!M6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9ON8O2ON8O1ON8O88 2 1 4J2O6~9J2O6~1OJ2O6~11J2O6~18J2O8~17J2O8~18J2O8~19J2O8~2OJ2O8~8J2O8~2J2O8~1J2O8~46 9 8 1ODO6VJ2O4~18GNDJ2O4~1624VJ2OO~11 2 8 R~LDGLJ2O4~18DOOR SW!TOHUPPLR UN!TMS4SD1O7SD1O88J248 J244J288J2281 2 8J228J221R2O7GND6) ~~87 1~~~~~~J276J1221 2J1O8 2 14 86 6DO6VJ2O4~14GNDJ2O4~166VJ2O4~19J2O8~116VJ2O8~96VGNDJ2O8~6SD1O2SD1O1SD1O4SD1O8SD1O6SD1O6128J6O1J1O6R1O9 R1O761284678 R1O8 R1O6lUSLRMOTOR4 8 6 8 7 6 92 1BRAKLlGOUT2 1J241 J242MA!NMOTORMA!NM~OLKMA!NM~TRGMA!NM~LDJ2O8~14J2O6~ 7J2O6~28R1O8AOL)AON)186GND2N.O.4N.O.24V1 7GND6)8GND6)96V1O6VSD2O8GND6)SD2O86VSD2O7SD2O9SD2O124V6VSD214SD21124VJO8OOJO8O1GND6)GND6)JO21O6V7 6LR2J2O7~824VGND24)2 124VGND24)21PRLSSMTONLRM1O 9 8 7J6428 4 6 2 1J648J6416V24V24V24V24V24V24VJ2O6~16J2O6~17J2O6~21J2O6~22GND6)2 1 8 4 6 6RLG!STOLUTOHRLG!ST~OLOOUNTLR1 2OOUNTJ284J222J2O7~11J2O7~4SD21724VJO2OOHLATBLJ2O7~12MS821 4 88 4 8 9DO6VJ2O4~4 916 16 21 228 4 6 2 1 6J812SD212GND6)6VSD2O6to SD2O6from SD2O8to PAPLRB`from SD2O1from JO2OOUN!TSD2O61 2 8 from JO2O6SD2O2GND24)SD2OOGND24)to POWLR SWto PW6664to PW6664from SD2O8from SD2O9to JO2OOJ1O4R6O2 R6O1J11O21J11121J112A J118ASD118SD114J11621J11621J117A J118ASD116SD116SD112SD111R216R214 8OLLAN~SWJ2O6~181 4 2 86VGNDJ4O12 8 6J2O6~ 1J2O6~ 81 4SD1O9SD11O21from SD2O2B!ASTRGJ2O6~12JO8O28 4J8O21 28 4J8O81 28 4J8O61 28 4J8O41 28 47R2196VHLAT16 6 7 8 96VGNDJ2O6~2OJ2O6~26J2O6~19J2O6~282 8 12 8 1J227 8 2 1J818DO6V4 8 6 8 7 6 9 2 1OLLAN~TRGJ2O6~6LR1lLLDBL28 27 6 7 6 2 8 4 1 8 9 1O 18 11 12 14 16 16 17 18 21 22 28 24 2O 19 26 26R216R217from SD2O28 2 4J2771to SOANNLRDO6VJ2O6~4BL6SD221R218PRLSSMTONLRMLR1lLLDBL DO6VDO6V!N) HLAT1!N) HLAT2GNDDO6VDO6VOUT)OUT)AOL)AON)HLAT~RYJ2O7~ 6DLHUM!D!l!LR OPT!ONMa1n Un1t DLHUM!D!l!LR OPT!ONPapor Un1t4 8 2 1 7 6 6 1O 9 8J272MS6J814)21PUSH SW!TOH)DOOR SW!TOH6 6 2 8 4 1 8 7R212J2689 1O 11 12 18 142 8 1TONLRTONLR MOTOR1 2J268SD219J269SLNSOR8 2 1 4J261R221R222J126J81612J287J119R1O4186GND2N.O.4N.O.J274J128 J7O1186 L24J7O71824J7O81 28 2 1 4 7 N6SD117SD118LN182LNJ7O2 J7O61824SHUT DOWNSHUT DOWNGND286818RXDGNDTXDOTS286RXDGNDTXD1862476RXDTXDGND 1 to 81 to 8128664646826OV T2A18M2 M1M6 M42OJ2O7~16MS8OPLNHo1ts 866GV~LBL9J2O6~26J2O7~14BL6J112B J118BJ117B J118B1OKohm/2Wx8to J6OOGND24)HV182ON6O2GND24)24VON6O11 2 J6OOOUT2!NOUT1!NOUT1OUT N.O.24VOUT2OUT4821R218from R2O4OUT1~B!AS~SW!OHJ2O6~2J2O6~14GND6 6M8 J2461 2R!GHTOOOL BLOWLROLNTLR LLlTHLATLR BLOWLRR!GHT LLlT1 1 2 2J286BLOWLRlLLD8 2J2841 21R2288!PA OOOL!NG BLOWLRJ278 J288 J2798 22 1181 28 1 21 2 8J289 J24O lLLD lLLDMANUAL SLT RLG THLRM!STORTHLRM!STORTHLRM!STORS!DLLLlTJ248R!GHTS!DL 1.Items shown by grayare not used.S3B-PH-SM3-TBJ2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J91LEDGLEDGLEDRLEDBLEDCAGNDRSGNDM TRVCCGNDOS 1GNDOS 2GND +3.3V +3.3V GND GND MAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+ MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK- SERIAL DATA+ DATA LATCH+ SERIAL DATA- DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+ 0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P- 0CH DATA- 1CH DATA+ 1CH DATA- RESET GND+3.3V+3.3VGNDGNDPD3GND/GPD3GND/GMAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK-SERIAL DATA+DATA LATCH+ 5V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3VGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDSERIAL DATA-DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P-0CH DATA-1CH DATA+1CH DATA-RESETGNDCIS SENSORCIS CONTROLLER BOARDJ1FH10A-15S-1SH(02)J21J1KX14-50K5DJ787BFN-030SJ2B10B-PH-SM3-TB1 12V2 GND3 5V4 GNDJ4B3B-XH-ADF13-4P-J1B4P-VHJ3DF13-10P-1.25V-E1000J2DF20F-20DP-1V(59)DF20F-20DP-1V(59)J15DF13B-4P-1.25VJ12B10B-PH-SM3-TBJ13DF13-10P-1.25VJ2B5B-PH-SM3-TBJ20B8B-PH-SM3-TBJ15DF13-4P-1.25VJ10FX8C-60S-SV5(22)J16DF13B-3P-1.25VJ4DE20F-10DP-1V(59)J8803-91-010-30-002J14803-91-014J11To PCUSB2.0UBR44-4N5C10-30-002DF13B-4P-1.25V(21)J32LEDR3LEDB4LEDCA5 GND6 RS7 GND8 M9 TR10 VCC11 GND12 OS 113 GND14 OS 2151 2 3 412VGND5VGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151 2 3 41 2 3 45 6 7 8 9101 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910MTR_PULSEMTR_RESET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6GND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101 2 1 2 3 41 2 3 4 1 2 35 6 7 8 9101 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819201J4CIS CONTROLLER BOARDJ1FH10A-15S-1SH(02)J2DF20F-20DP-1V(59)DF13B-4P-1.25V(21)J3J42 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920 +3.3V +3.3V GND GND MAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+ MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK- SERIAL DATA+ DATA LATCH+ SERIAL DATA- DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+ 0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P- 0CH DATA- 1CH DATA+ 1CH DATA- RESET GND+3.3V+3.3VGNDGNDMAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK-SERIAL DATA+DATA LATCH+SERIAL DATA-DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P-0CH DATA-1CH DATA+1CH DATA-RESETGNDJ22DF20F-20DP-1V(59)J20DF20F-20DP-1V(59)J23DF20F-20DP-1V(59)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819201 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920 +3.3V +3.3V GND GND MAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+ MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK- SERIAL DATA+ DATA LATCH+ SERIAL DATA- DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+ 0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P- 0CH DATA- 1CH DATA+ 1CH DATA- RESET GND+3.3V+3.3VGNDGNDMAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK-SERIAL DATA+DATA LATCH+SERIAL DATA-DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P-0CH DATA-1CH DATA+1CH DATA-RESETGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819201 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920 +3.3V +3.3V GND GND MAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+ MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK- SERIAL DATA+ DATA LATCH+ SERIAL DATA- DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+ 0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P- 0CH DATA- 1CH DATA+ 1CH DATA- RESET GND+3.3V+3.3VGNDGNDMAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK-SERIAL DATA+DATA LATCH+SERIAL DATA-DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P-0CH DATA-1CH DATA+1CH DATA-RESETGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819201 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920J24DF20F-20DP-1V(59) +3.3V +3.3V GND GND MAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+ MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK- SERIAL DATA+ DATA LATCH+ SERIAL DATA- DATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+ 0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P- 0CH DATA- 1CH DATA+ 1CH DATA- RESET GND+3.3V+3.3VGNDGNDMAIN CLOCK+SHIFT CLOCK+MAIN CLOCK-SHIFT CLOCK-SERIAL DATA+DATA LATCH+SERIAL DATA- STOP SW FW SEN GND RV SEN CV SEN GNDSIZE SEN[0]SIZE SEN[1]SIZE SEN[2]SIZE SEN[3] 5VSTOP SWFW SENGNDRV SENCV SENGNDSIZE SEN[0]SIZE SEN[1]SIZE SEN[2]SIZE SEN[3]5VDATA LATCH-LINK CLK O/P+0CH DATA+LINK CLK O-P-0CH DATA-1CH DATA+1CH DATA-RESETGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111 2 3 4VBUS D- D+ GND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819201 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151617181920 GND1LEDGLEDGLEDRLEDBLEDCAGNDRSGNDM TRVCC5V3.3V3.3V3.3V 24V 24VGNDGND U V M3.3VGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDPD3GND/GMTR_PULSEMTR_RESET0 1 2 SIGGND 5V3 4 5 6 GNDGNDOS 1GNDOS 2GNDCIS SENSOR2LEDR3LEDB4LEDCA5 GND6 RS7 GND8 M9 TR10 VCC11 GND12 OS 113 GND14 OS 2151 2 3 412VGND5VGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 GND1LEDGLEDGLEDRLEDBLEDCAGNDRSGNDM TRVCCGNDOS 1GNDOS 2GNDCIS SENSOR3SB-2DC2.CAxxxxxx means the cable.2LEDR3LEDB4LEDCA5 GND6 RS7 GND8 M9 TR10 VCC11 GND12 OS 113 GND14 OS 2151 2 3 412VGND5VGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 GND1LEDGLEDGLEDRLEDBLEDCAGNDRSGNDM TRVCCGNDOS 1GNDOS 2GNDCIS SENSOR2LEDR3LEDB4LEDCA5 GND6 RS7 GND8 M9 TR10 VCC11 GND12 OS 113 GND14 OS 2151 2 3 412VGND5VGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 GND1LEDGLEDGLEDRLEDBLEDCAGNDRSGNDM TRVCCGNDOS 1GNDOS 2GNDCIS SENSOR2LEDR3LEDB4LEDCA5 GND6 RS7 GND8 M9 TR10 VCC11 GND12 OS 113 GND14 OS 2151 2 3 412VGND5VGND1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 GNDFPC4600303SB-2CCB3SB-2CCB CIS CONTROLLER BOARDDATA CONTROLLER BOARDKIP3000 SCANNER DIAGRAMPOWER BOARDJ1FH10A-15S-1SH(02)J2DF20F-20DP-1V(59)DF13B-4P-1.25V(21)J3J43SB-2CCB CIS CONTROLLER BOARDJ1FH10A-15S-1SH(02)J2DF20F-20DP-1V(59)DF13B-4P-1.25V(21)J3J43SB-2CCB CIS CONTROLLER BOARDJ1FH10A-15S-1SH(02)J2DF20F-20DP-1V(59)DF13B-4P-1.25V(21)J3J43SB-2CCBCA460001J9MM30-144B1-B1CA460005CA460022J5J131 12V2 GND3 5V4 GNDDF13-4P-J141 12V2 GND3 5V4 GNDDF13-4P-J101 12V2 GND3 5V4 GNDDF13-4P-J1111 2 31J2FrontSensor2 32 3 11 2 3 412V2 GND3 5V4 GNDDF13-4P-J12DF13B-2P-1.25VCA460017 CA460020STEPPING MOTORELP-04NVPower (24V)CA460021CA4600193SB-2POWERSENSOR RELAY BOARDPR4091-05CA460006CA460007CA460008CA460009CA460002CA460000CA460003CA460004CA460023CA460014 SIGGND 5V1J3RearSensor2 32 3 1CA460013 SIGGND 5V1J4SizeSensor2 32 3 1CA460010 SIGGND 5V1J5SizeSensor2 32 3 1CA460011 SIGGND 5V1J6SizeSensor2 32 3 1CA460012 SIGGND 5V1J7J1DF13B-11P-S2B-PH-SM3-TBJ8J3DF13B-11P-1.25VSizeSensor2 32 3 1CA460013 SIGGND 5V1J9CoverSensor2 32 3 1CA460018 SIGGNDJ8StopSensor1 32 1CA460016FPC460030FPC460031FPC460030FPC460030
Categories
Top types
Audio & home theatre
Cameras & camcorders
Computer cables
Computer components
Computers
Data input devices
Data storage
Networking
Print & Scan
Projectors
Smart wearables
Software
Telecom & navigation
TVs & monitors
Warranty & support
other →
Top brands
Acer
AEG
Aeg-Electrolux
Asus
Canon
Casio
Electrolux
HP
LG
Nikon
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sony
Yamaha
other →
Top types
Infotainment
Musical instruments
Video games & consoles
other →
Top brands
Acer
AEG
Asus
Dometic
Electrolux
HP
Juno
Panasonic
Philips
Progress
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
ZANKER
Zoppas
other →
Top types
Binding machines
Boards
Calculators
Correction media
Desk accessories & supplies
Drawing supplies
Equipment cleansing kit
Folders, binders & indexes
Laminators
Mail supplies
Paper cutters
Sorters
Storage accessories for office machines
Typewriters
Writing instruments
other →
Top brands
Bosch
Canon
Casio
Craftsman
Dell
Epson
Fujitsu
HP
KitchenAid
LG
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sharp
Smeg
other →
Top types
Bedding & linens
Cleaning & disinfecting
Do-It-Yourself tools
Domestic appliances
Home décor
Home furniture
Home security & automation
Kitchen & houseware accessories
Kitchenware
Lighting
other →
Top brands
AEG
Aeg-Electrolux
Bosch
Electrolux
HP
IKEA
Indesit
LG
Panasonic
Philips
Progress
Samsung
Sony
Whirlpool
Zanussi
other →
Top types
Bags & cases
Children carnival costumes
Clothing care
Clothing hangers
Dry cleaners
Fabric shavers
Men's clothing
Tie holders
Ultrasonic cleaning equipment
Watches
Women's clothing
other →
Top brands
Braun
Casio
Citizen
Garmin
Huawei
Indesit
LG
Mitsubishi Electric
Philips
Radio Shack
SEVERIN
Sony
V7
Velleman
ZyXEL
other →
Top types
Air Handlers
Boom Lifts
Compact Excavator
Elevators
Excavators
Finishers
Front End Loaders
Noise Reduction Machine
Oxygen Equipment
Robotics
Scrubber
Spreader
Tractor
Trash Compactor
Welding System
other →
Top brands
AEG
Aeg-Electrolux
Asus
Canon
Casio
Electrolux
HP
LG
Nikon
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sony
Whirlpool
Yamaha
other →
Top types
Blood pressure units
Electric toothbrushes
Epilators
Feminine hygiene products
Foot baths
Hair trimmers & clippers
Makeup & manicure cases
Men's shavers
Personal paper products
Personal scales
Shaver accessories
Skin care
Solariums
Teeth care
Women's shavers
other →
Top brands
AEG
Aeg-Electrolux
Bosch
Canon
Casio
Electrolux
KitchenAid
LG
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sony
Whirlpool
Yamaha
Zanussi
other →
Top types
Hot beverage supplies
other →
Top brands
other →
Top types
Cars
Electric scooters
Motor vehicle accessories & components
Motor vehicle electronics
Motorcycles
Motorhomes
Offroad Vehicle
Scooters
Utility Vehicle
other →
Top brands
AEG
Aeg-Electrolux
Bosch
Canon
Casio
Craftsman
Electrolux
LG
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Yamaha
Zanussi
other →
Top types
Baby bathing & potting
Baby furniture
Baby safety
Baby sleeping & bedding
Baby travel
Feeding, diapering & nursing
Toys & accessories
other →
Top brands
AEG
Asus
Bosch
Canon
Casio
Electrolux
HP
LG
Panasonic
Philips
Samsung
Sony
Whirlpool
Yamaha
Zanussi
other →
Top types
Bicycles & accessories
Bubble machines
Camping, tourism & outdoor
Fitness, gymnastics & weight training
Martial arts equipment
Skateboarding & skating
Smoke machines
Sport protective gear
Target & table games
Water sports equipment
Winter sports equipment
other →
Top brands
Craftsman
Daikin
Emerson
Epson
Frigidaire
Harbor Freight Tools
HP
Miele
Philips
ProForm
Samsung
Sears
Sennheiser
Weider
Yamaha
other →
Top types
Pet hair clippers
other →
Top brands
Andis
other →
Top types
Pill Reminder Device
Stairlifts
other →
Top brands
Alber
Bruno
E-PIL
Minivator
Savaria
other →
73-019 CPS AR300 Manual Warning: This product may expose you to chemicals including lead which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.